Home

CODA-DA System User Manual

1. Figure 5 46 The General Information Area in Acquisition Model e Position The position of either the fish or the vessel in either Lat Long or UTM appears at the top of the display and shows the position of the newest ping in the window A symbol of a fish or a vessel appear in the middle of the position to indicate the position reference point e date time the present date and time The date is displayed as dd mm yy e Nav Sync A clock face displayed between date and time shows green when the navigation data is in sync and has a red cross on the face when not in sync e fish alt shows the distance of the towfish above the seabed whendthe data was acquired e heading shows the direction in which the vessel or towfish is heading e line the line name which is either taken from the Nav String or entered by the user e range displays either the true range in meters for a side scan window or sweep time in msecs for a seismic window e cursor pointer the position directly under the cursor on the screen namely Eastings Northings and Kp The information is colour coded to indicate the channel over which the cursor is positioned channel colour is indicated in the top right of the display window The position is fully geo corrected and is calculated using the navigation data stored with each ping If the fish height is known the position is automatically slant range corrected May 2001 for version 2 1 81 Wo s S va eu Buis
2. Time includes carriage motion and settling Note Loading time includes spin up time Loading time is defined as the time in which the START STOP UNIT command using polycarbonate medium takes to execute But in the case of immediate loading after power on the drive must perform a self diagnosis of about 6 seconds If the optical disk cartridge is inserted during self diagnosis the loading time will be delayed until the self diagnosis is complete 236 May 2001 for version 2 1 J Hardcopy Devices J 1 J 1 1 Alden 9315 CTP Series Printers The DA System can output data in real time during acquisition to the Alden printer via a parallel interface Note Before connecting the printer to the DA System both the printer and the DA System must be shut down and the power supplies to both switched off see Section 13 1 The DA System should only be powered up when the printer has been connected to the appropriate port of the DA System see Section 4 3 The printer must be switched on before the DA System has been powered up Configure the Printer It is recommended that the Alden Electronics Operator s Manual is used in conjunction with the following instructions To print successfully from this device the printer must first be configured correctly before selecting the Alden printer from the DA System s list of available printers Configuring the printer is only necessary when first setting up the DA System and the Alden
3. System Hard Disk 3 1 Have all previous interpretations and tag files been stored to tape optical disk and labelled correctly 3 3 Have all unwanted tag files on the system hard disk optical disk been deleted Report Files 254 May 2001 for version 2 1 GeoKit PI100 Mobilisation Comments Initials 4 1 Are the Report Setup files correct for the job 4 2 Can the Report ASCII output on floppy be read by the system the report is intended for 4 3 Is the report format as required and meaningful 44 Is the Report Setup file saved onto the system hard disk optical disk 4 5 Have the Report Setup files been saved to tape optical disk using Mainte nance Menu Backup Setup Files 4 6 Has the Report Setup file name changed on the system hard disk optical disk 4 7 Has the Report Setup been reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu gt Restore Setup Files 4 8 Is the tape optical disk write protected and labelled Signed Date CODA system mobilised for Tagging amp Reporting M 3 P1100 Mobilisation Checklist P1100 Mobilisation Comments Initials 1 Tagging amp Reporting 1 1 Have all the checks in the GeoKit Pipe line Inspection Mobilisation Checklist above been carried out successfully 2 Pipeline Inspection 2 1 Is the pipeline e
4. Lu Q 250 May 2001 for version 2 1 M Mobilisation Checklists Before starting a survey with the CODA DA System system you should check that the equipment is mobilised correctly Correct mobilisation procedures ensure that at the time of sailing the system is functioning correctly and is receiving all the data it needs in a form that it understands We recommend that the mobilisation procedures are observed every time a vessel sails and that they form the basis of any ISO9000 definition of readiness for use before sailing If any of the items in the list below are unclear feel free to consult our Technical Support staff at any time Details are given on the inside front cover of this manual Our Technical Support staff may ask about the mobilisation checklist items if technical support is required during a survey M 1 DA System Mobilisation Checklist DA System Mobilisation Comments Initials System 1 1 Does the hardware have the correct speci fications for the job 1 2 Have you had enough training to operate the system Trigger Input 2 1 Is an external trigger required 2 2 Does the systematrigger repeatedly 2 3 Does the pings per second displayed by the system correspond to the external trig ger rate see Section A Trigger Output 3 1 Is a trigger output required 32 Connect all the systems which
5. The zoom pointer appears when the DA System is in zoom mode Keyboard shortcut lt Control z gt The move pointer is used to move tags Keyboard shortcut lt m gt The watch pointer appears when the system is waiting for an operation to complete 0 pa The automatic tracking pointer is used to reset the bottom tracking position Keyboard shortcut lt b gt May 2001 for version 2 1 31 Introduction The text entry pointer appears when the pointer is placed in a text entry box and is used to enter text in the selected field of a pop up The Centre On pointer appears after selecting the Centre On icon from the tool bar Click on a point on the screen you wish to view at the centre of your window The Fix Zoom pointer appears after selecting Fix Zoom from the tool bar Click on a point on the screen you wish to be the centre of the zoom The Pan Grab pointer appears after selecting the Pan Grab icon from the tool bar Click and hold on a point on the screen the move the mouse around to move the image Release the mouse button when the image is in the desired position Be oa D 7 The Egg Timer pointer appears only when the CODA system is initialising It is not seen during any other operations When the pointer is in a patticularmode for example for moving or deleting tags you must complete the operation or deselect the mode before selecting another pointer mode
6. 3 1 2 1 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 The Menu Bar lies across the top of the screen throughout operation of the DA System It displays eight menu options File Display Settings Tagging Reporting Applications Processing and Help When you click on any of these options that is you move the pointer over an option and then click the left mouse button a pull down menu appears The functions of the various menu options are explained in Part II Tear off Menus The pull down menus can be detached from the Menu Bar and moved around the screen they remain on screen until dismissed To detach a pull down menu select the dotted tear off strip at the top of the menu this changes the menu to a pop up window To move the window press and drag it to another part of the screen that is move the pointer over the window s titlebar press the left mouse button and hold it down while you drag the pointer to the desired position then release the mouse button To dismiss the window double click on the button in the top left corner of the window or position the pointer over the window and press lt Escape gt Tool Bar BY8e0U0 am lt S sage Figure 3 4 The DA System Tool Bar Directly below the Menu Bar is a Tool Bar The icons included in the Tool Bar allow you to perform a number of operations within the window without opening the relevant menus Trackplot Mosaic This option which is used to display visually the track and image data of the su
7. CR value_entry type key a unique identifier for the string required for group otherwise optional nav basis LATLONG incoming values are latitude and required longitude METRES incoming values are UTM nav termination The terminator of the string for example LF required for ASCII optional for binary LOCAL incoming time is local separator ASCIL character which separates navigation required for ASCII string entries not valid for binary value_entry type multiple separator entries are legal time basis GMT incoming time is GMT required update warning time in seconds for the navigation time out if optional defaults no new data has been received through the to 30 seconds RS 232 interface an error message will appear on the screen The value_list defines the variables to be updated by the incoming navigation string and the means of interpretation of the incoming value value_list value_entry value list value entry value field name interpretation entry width entry offset gain The value list is seen to be a list of value entries which are themselves made up of a line beginning with a value field name followed by an interpretation entry followed by optional offset and gain values Note that the order of value entries within the value list is the order in which incoming ASCII characters in the navigation string will be expected to be parsed interpretation entry ASCI
8. Example 203 A 3 2 Shallow Seismic Custom Settings Example 2 204 A 3 3 Approximate Sound Velocities Table 205 A 3 4 Default Sub Bottom Profiler Setups 205 B Coda Navigation Data String 207 B 1 Coda Format 207 B 2 Coda Date Format 208 C Corrected Navigation Data Format 209 C1 UTC Time Offsets 209 D Editing Navigation Library Strings 211 D 1 Navigation Interpretation Lists 212 D 2 Navigation Groups 215 D 3 Navigation Library Explained 245 D 4 Example Navigation Library Entry 218 E Coda Data Format Summary 221 E 1 Coda Data Information Table 221 F Filters 225 F 1 Butterworth Filter 225 G Data Formats 227 G 1 Copy Tape Format 227 H Tape Drive Units 229 H 1 Hewlett Packard HP C1533 C1599A 4mm DAT Tape Unit 229 H 1 1 Head Cleaning 229 H 1 2 LED Interpretation 229 H 1 3 Recommended Tapes 229 H 1 4 Environmental Specifications 230 H 1 5 Hints and Precautions 230 H 2 Exabyte Eliant 820 8mm Tape Units 231 10 May 2001 for version 2 1 I J VI VII H 2 1 Head Cleaning H22 LED Interpretation H2 3 Environmental Specifications H 2 4 Hints and Precautions Optical Disk Drive Units I 1 Drive Controls I 2 Error Conditions I 3 Using Optical Media I 4 Recommended MO Disks LS Formatting Disks I 6 Caring for the Drive I 7 Performance Specifications Hardcopy Devices J 1 Alden 9315 CTP Series Printers J 1 1 Configure the Printer J 1 2 Select the Printer J 1 3 Troubleshooting J 2 EPC 1086 2 Thermal Printer J 2
9. cross track cross track offset 268 May 2001 for version 2 1 of RS 232 interfaces the rate at which raw data bits are sent roughly equivalent to bits second binary digit the smallest information unit in a digital system industry standard bayonet connector for analogue and digital signals of the DA 100 DA200 automated location of the seabed first return to allow the towfish altitude to be calculated 8 bits this button cancels any items or options selected and dismisses a pop up window retaining the previous settings recognising the difference between lower and upper case letters for example a and A industry standard parallel interface for connecting devices such as printers and plotters to computer equipment the means of carrying out head cleaning for DAT or Exabyte tape drive units a tape cartridge which holds cleaning tape rather than recording tape press down and release the appropriate mouse button if no button is specified the left button should be used of analogue input signals not converting the whole of the input range thus losing some of the signal for example the outgoing pulse in sonar data thissshould only be allowed to happen if the information being discarded will NEVER need to be recovered Coda Technologies format for storing data to a recording media retains more information about the recorded data than other proprietary data formats the name commonly used in DOS s
10. the rule used to translate incoming digital signals into grey levels or colours for display also known as palette testing a piece of equipment by using its own output as an input signal thus testing both the input and output functionality a comparatively small range of grey levels is used to display all the parts of the image the viewer is interested in see also contrast high contrast removing the high frequency component of a signal the name commonly used on DOS systems for the first parallel port Lookup Table a trigger used to start a number of pieces of electrical equipment to ensure their synchronisation May 2001 for version 2 1 273 9 JBSSOJE Glossary amp Conversions MB Media Recognition System megabyte menu Menu Bar merge length Microsoft Windows minimum length Mosaic mosaicing Motif mouse MS DOS multi node tag multi resolution multi tasking nav string navigation data navigation input navigation library navigation string node non interlaced northings off line 274 May 2001 for version 2 1 Megabyte roughly 1 000 000 bytes second generation DDS standard tapes which have markings which allow the length of tape to be determined by the tape drive unit approximately 1 000 000 bytes see also MB an area of the display either a Menu Bar or a window which allows users to choose from a number of options using either the keyboard or the m
11. F Figure 12 2 The Nav Loopback Menu 12 2 2 End Nav Loopback Test Titlebar Menu End Nav Loopback Test stops the program generating navigation loopback data If the nav loopback programsis not running selecting this menu item has no effect 12 2 3 Restore Restore returns the DA System main display to its full size if ithas been iconified This option is unavailable if the DA System is not iconified 12 2 4 Minimise Minimise reduces the DA System main display to an icon displayed on the Coda background window 12 2 5 Lower Lower moves the DA System display window into the background This menu item has an effect only when there is more than one window open 12 2 6 Restart DAx00 This option closes the current DA System display and restarts the DA System This stops all recording and automated analysis 12 3 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu contains several commands that are not required for everyday operation of the DA System These include installing a software upgrade loading a navigation library backing up tag setup files and changing various system settings 166 May 2001 for version 2 1 12 3 1 You access this menu by iconifying the DA System main display this is done either by pressing lt Alt F9 gt or by clicking on the iconify symbol in the top right corner of the Title Bar see Figure 3 2 page 21 When the main display is iconified and the background Coda window is revealed press lt Alt Shi
12. JF Copy to Both Channels ok Apply Load Save Cancel ir Shift Reset Auto Done Viewing Range 2 Input y Screen Figure 7 7 Example of Seismic Return before Rectification D Ce 10M sk mo Ro On Se By ay r CODA DA200 n Image Enhancement Setup Left Right ois WERT Input Colourmap Greyscale iyi NT Copy to Both Channels ok Apply Load Save Cancel PAL ns cr Shift Reset Auto Done Viewing Range a Input y Screen Figure 7 8 Example of Same Seismic Return with Full Wave Rectification Full wave rectification can be simulated by applying the transfer characteristics in the Image Enhancement graph shown in Figure 7 8 this page May 2001 for version 2 1 109 Usi 7 5 4 7 A Practical Example Setting a Black Level Setup the corrected nay lt a NLS ETUI e corrected hay E CODA DA200 Image Enhancement Setup Left N Right e e ir m QU Input Colourmap Greyscale y J Copy to Both Channels o Apply Load Save Cancel is m Snn Reset auto Done Viewing Range gt Input Figure 7 9 Example of Seismic Return before setting Black Level bes INT x FT ml M etup the corrected nav CODA DA200 Image Enhancement Setup Left Fight Input de rl Shift Reset Auto Done Viewing Range amp Input 4 Figure 7 10 Example of Same Seism
13. When Change IP Address is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly a warning appears in the maintenance menu May 2001 for version 2 1 169 WARNING After this process has finished the system will be restarted and all playback and acquisition will be aborted Do you wish to proceed default n y n Press lt y gt to proceed The system then prompts for the name of the system Enter the name and press lt return gt A message appears giving the current system name and IP address Enter the new IP address and press lt return gt A message appears asking for confirmation of the new IP address Press lt return gt The nextmessage requests the subnet mask Enter the default lt return gt A message will appear confirming the IP address update and will ask whether another IP address is to be changed default n Press lt return gt The system will now shut down and re boot 12 3 5 Load Navigation Lib This menu item is used to load a navigation format library from a DOS formatted floppy disk When Load Navigation Lib is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly a prompt appears asking for a diskette to be inserted into the floppy disk drive Insert a diskette into Floppy Drive I Type go when ready or q to quit default go Insert a diskette and type lt go gt or press lt Return gt The diskette is e
14. lt CR gt lt LF gt carriage return line feed string terminator The first task is to determine the navigation identifier This is stored against the key word ident This is the entry that appears in the Navigation Format list of the Nav Input Settings pop up see Figure 5 18 page 66 4n ounexample the entry should read ident NMEA 0183 GPGGA We now need to build our interpretation list This is made up of two parts The setup list and the value_list The setup list contains general definitions Our setup list for the example navigation list would look like the following Time basis GMT Nav basis LATLONG separator ASCII TEXT key ASCII TEXT GPGGA lt All value_list nagivation entries see below gt Nav Termination Binary Integer 1 10 endnav Note We are not supplying update warning as we are happy with a time of 30 seconds If our separator was a space we would use the entry separator ASCII TEXT Some of the common mistakes that lead to an error when accessing your navigation library entry are e spelling separator incorrectly e missing closing quotes on strings e failing to enclose keys with more than two strings in quotation marks for example Nav Basis Note Please check for all of these if you have an error decoding your navigation string Now that we have set up the ident and
15. y n The default is mot to clean the tag directory Press either lt y gt or lt n gt and then press lt Return gt Do you wish to clean thelog directory default n y n The default is not to clean the log directory Press either lt y gt or lt n gt and then press lt Return gt Do you wish to clean the nav directory default n y n The default is not to clean the nav directory Press either lt y gt or lt n gt and then press lt Return gt Do you wish to clean setup directory default n yn The default is not to clean the setup directory Press either lt y gt or lt n gt and then press lt Return gt Change Time This option is used to change the system time This may be necessary if you wish to use the DA System time in acquisition and it is set incorrectly When this item is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the system displays the current date and time and prompts you to update them both Enter the current time in hours minutes and seconds in the format HH MM SS for example 21 17 05 and the current date month day and year in the format mm dd ccyy for example 09 17 1997 When these values have been entered the system clock immediately sets itself to the time and date requested Change Password Selecting this option allows you to change the install password for the system The system prompts you to type the old install passw
16. 23 Optical Disk Drive Controls 233 Optical Disk Error Conditions 233 Optical Disk Using Optical Media 234 optical disks replaying data disks 85 96 optical disks recommended brand 3 Optical Menu 172 option selection button 24 outputting hardcopy 137 Overlay Data displaying 125 parallel output 183 playback incorporating smoothed navigational data 27 89 Playback Speed Settings pop up 88 using the Goto command 145 playback mode 85 playback mode See data playback mode playback See data playback Playing Back Data 85 Playing Back Survey Data 20 pointer types 31 32 pop up action buttons 26 29 pop up selector 26 powering down the system 175 powering up the system 44 preparing the system for transportation 175 Printer Setup window 140 Serial Setup window 141 printers see hardcopy devices printing text reports 159 160 production information 188 Properties smoothing 72 Quick Start 19 quick start procedure 19 20 R Raw A Scan displaying 131 reducing noise 111 Refresh Display command 111 Release Status 44 Report Generation 158 160 Report Setup 154 157 report setup adding columns 154 155 adding tag types 157 deleting columns 154 155 deleting tag types 157 loading a previous setup 154 multi node tags 156 report headings 156 157 report separators 156 reportable items 155 saving the current setup 154 setting column parameters 154 sort order 156 text strings 156 Reporting menu 153 160 reports generating
17. 3 Now check that your data looks correct if you need to fine tune the display refer to Section 7 for detailed instructions Playing Back Data Step 3 Controlling Playback Speed From the display window you have open using the Settings Playback Speed popup previ ously acquired data can be replayed at different speeds controlling the length of time for which data remains displayed on screen during scrolling sv Real Time 2 Fast as Possible Fixed Rate 15 0 pings sec Figure 6 6 The Playback Speed Settings Pop up Window The Playback Speed Setting has three modes Real Time Fast as Possible and Fixed Rate see Figure 6 6 this page e Real Time playback simulates acquisition speed and replays the data at the rate at which it was acquired e Fast as Possible means the data is replayed as fast as possible The maximum achievable ping rate depends on the speed of the optical disk drive used or on the speed of the tape unit used and the format of the tape e Fixed Rate allows you to select the number of pings the default is 5 pings sec This can be changed by clicking the mouse in the pings sec text entry box below the fixed rate option and entering the ping rate required Setting the ping rate above the fastest possible ping rate causes the data to play back at the fastest possible ping rate 88 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 5 6 6 6 6 1 For a fixed rate of playback the pings sec display in the General Infor
18. As tab forms overlap the required tab form may have to be brought to the front of the pile by clicking on its tab tear off a pull down menu that can be detached from the Menu Bar for permanent menu display text entry an area in a window for entering text or numerical values Click within the box rectangular area and type text or edit the text using the keyboard toggle switchfrom one setting to another usually between on and off A toggle switch is a switch that has just two positions toolkit a pop up that contains various tools for processing the data for example TVG and Image Enhancement Each pop up contains an interactive graph and several smart icons Restart This shuts down the software of the DA System system and causes the program to restart It does not cause the DA System to reboot The short cut key is lt Control c gt as indicated on the menu A box pops up asking for confirmation that the system is to restart click Yes or No as appro priate Key Shortcuts Many of the common commands can be carried out using key shortcuts A key shortcut is a single keystroke or a combination of keystrokes that executes a command The lt Alt gt key can be used to activate pull down menus To do this press and hold down the lt Alt gt key and then press the key of the underlined letter in the required optionin the Menu Bar For example pressing lt Alt f gt causes the File menu to appear An item fromthe pull down menu can
19. If you fail to do so a warning pop up appears on screen reminding you that a pointer operation is already in progress Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop up and then complete the pointer operation or deselect the mode before continuing to the next pointer operation Deselecting a mode usually involves repeating the action for selecting the mode 3 7 Terminology The most common computer terms used in this manual are defined below A more complete list of terms can be found in the Glossary at the end of this manual Apply Cancel click double click information window Menu Bar OK pop up menu pop up window this button applies the settings or options selected and retains the pop up window on screen this button cancels any items or options selected and dismisses the pop up window the previous settings are retained press down and release the appropriate mouse button If no button is specified use the left button press and release the appropriate mouse button twice in rapid succession If no button is specified use the left button a window that provides information during acquisition or playback this information cannot be edited It can be displayed for any length of time and is dismissed by clicking on the OK or Done button the area at the top of the main display in which eight menu options are permanently displayed File Display Settings Tagging Reporting Applications Processing and Help
20. Note that the size of ASCII file which can be copied to a floppy disk is limited to the formatted capacity of the floppy disk normally 1 44 MB Note If the system is being used for data acquisition or playback the process of saving a report file to floppy disk will take longer to complete To speed up the process pause the display until the report file has been saved to the floppy disk Printer Setup Window Figure 10 17 The Printer Setup Pop up Window Selection of the appropriate printer port is made by clicking on the port to which the printer is connected If the port is a serial port one of the Com ports the Serial Setup button should be clicked to set up the serial line parameters Either Portrait or Landscape Format may be selected for PostScript printers by clicking on the appropriate toggle Where a printout is being saved in ASCII format this selection does not apply and will therefore be ignored Type allows a choice of ASCII or PostScript printer May 2001 for version 2 1 159 Wo S S va eu Busy Once the required selections have been made the appropriate action button at the bottom of the pop up should be clicked on Note The printer should be connected to the required port of DA System before OK or Apply is clicked see Section 4 3 and Appendix J 160 May 2001 for version 2 1 11 Making Backup Copies You will probably want to make backup copies of the data acquired by the DA System You may
21. Orange flickering The drive is executing a command and holds write data in the buffer memory or performing of an internal calibration Off The drive is not ready 1 2 Error Conditions Error Color Color Color Color 1 2 3 4 RAM TEST FAILURE Orange Orange Orange Orange SCSI RESET ALWAYS ASSERTED SEE Orange Orange Orange Green TERMINATION PROBE DSP WATCHDOG TIMER FAILURE Orange Orange Green Orange May 2001 for version 2 1 233 Appendices Error Color Color Color Color 1 2 3 4 MICROCODE CHECKSUM FAILURE Orange Orange Green Green SCSI CHIP TEST FAILURE Orange Green Orange Orange ENDEC CHIP TEST FAILURE Orange Green Orange Green POWER SUPPLY FAULT Orange Green Green Orange OVER TEMPERATURE FAULT Orange Green Green Green DISKBUFFER TEST FAILURE Green Orange Orange Orange DSP ROM CHECKSUM FAILURE Green Orange Orange Green DSP RAW R W TEST FAILURE Green Orange Green Orange INVALID VALUES FOUND IN NON VOLA Green Orange Green Green TILE MEMORY LOADER FAILURE OR EJECT FAULT Green Green Orange Orange SPIN UP OR SPIN DOWN FAULT Green Green Orange Green 1 3 Using Optical Media Figure I 2 this page shows the location of the write protection switch on the optical media cartridge Write Inhibited Side qv Write Enabled Side A co Figure l 2 Drive Write Protection S
22. Reference Number May 2001 for version 2 1 281 Second Fold aritime Street 3URGH Fix Postage Stamp Fourth Fold tuck into flap 282 May 2001 for version 2 1 First Fold Product Feedback We at Coda value your opinion Please give us your opinion of our products in each of the following areas We ll send you a free mousemat on receipt of your form Product Name Excellent Good Fair Poor Ease of Use is the product easy to use 0 m 0 g Hardware is the hardware reliable 0 o 0 0 Software is the software reliable o 0 0 g Range of Facilities are there enough tools 0 m m g Appearance Do you like the format of the dis g g g g play Physical Is the product ergonomically Oo 0 0 g designed Suitability Is the system suited to your applica 0 m m g tion Automation Do you rely on automated interpre m m m g tation Does the product meet our need Why or why not What s the single most important improvement we could make to the product Please complete the following information Name optional Job Title or Function Organisation Address Phone If we need more information may we contact you Yes I Nof Thank You May 2001 for version 2 1 283 SUOISJOAUOD 9 JBSSOJE Second Fold aritime Street 3URGH Fix Postage Stamp Fourth Fold tuck into flap 284 May 2001 for
23. and lt Tab gt keys at the same time will bring each window or iconised window to the foreground of the main display in turn each click will bring the back most window to the f selection switch for a group of options only one of gt the selection click on another diamond button In the 3 3 2 also from the Report Setup Options menu the selected 3 3 3 Option Selection Button Figure 3 9 An Option Selection Button The option selection button displays a currently held value and indicates that other values can be selected In Figure 3 9 this page from the File Open Acquisition menu the Trigger is set to Trig A Click on the option button to display a list of other options in this case Active Triggers and then drag the pointer to another trigger to select that trigger for the channel 3 3 4 Spin Box Figure 3 10 A Spin Box 24 May 2001 for version 2 1 Spin boxes appear in pop ups where you are required to specify a numerical setting You can either click in the box and type the required numbers or use the up and down arrows to change to the correct setting Pressing and dragging on the horizontal bar between the up and down arrows allows you to alter the value too if you drag upwards the value will increase and if you drag downwards the value will decrease 3 3 5 Scrolling Option List Mosaic Window 1 wil Figure 3 11 A Scrolling Option List ing option lists consist of a text area and a
24. and therefore the extent of noise reduction by selecting the size of smoothing filter small medium or large see Figure 7 11 this page Cross Track Smoothing Filter Size 4 Small Medium Large Apply To vy Left w Right w Both off OK Apply Cancel Figure 7 11 The Cross Track Smoothing Pop up Window The size of the filter determines the extent to which the data is smoothed The Smalb filter reduces the magnitude of noise spikes to a lesser degree but ensures that the image remains sharp By contrast the Large filter reduces the noise spikes to the greatest extent but renders the image more blurred Note None of the cross track smoothing options performs any along track smoothing Cross track smoothing is more suitable for sidescan data than shallow seismic data For removing noise from shallow seismic data use a combination of time varying frequency filtering trace mixing and swell filtering Cross track smoothing can be applied to the Left Channel Right Channel or Both Channels together At any time the display can be restored to its previous state by clicking on the Cancel button The desired smoothing filter can be applied with or without dismissing the pop up window by clicking on the OK or Apply button respectively This processing is only applied to the displayed data the data being recorded or replayed is not affected by any processing May 2001 for version 2 1 111
25. displaying in text window 158 printing hardcopy 159 saving to floppy disk 159 Rescan button 150 152 Reson Seabat 8125 Interface networking 59 Restart command 166 restarting the system 33 Restore command 166 Restore Setup Files 172 restoring previous software version 168 setup files 171 RS232 setting up communication 62 S Save button 26 saving navigation lib 170 pop up settings 28 29 report setups 154 tag files 148 scale lines displaying 125 scaling display data 101 Screen Dump pop up 139 screen dumps 138 Printer Setup window 140 screen saver option 174 scroll bar 25 Scrolling Option List 25 Seabat 8125 Interface networking 59 Seabed Position 74 Seabed Tracking 67 seismic channels 50 Seismic TVG 122 Select Default button 28 289 Select Factory Default button 28 serial input output 183 Serial Setup window 141 setting up the system 44 Setting up Bottom Tracking 68 75 Setting Up Navigation Input 64 Setting Up RS232 Communication 62 Setting up Sub Bottom Profiling 74 Setting up Sub bottom profiling 79 Setting up the DA200 19 settings pop up loading 27 28 resetting to factory default 26 saving 28 29 storing as the default 26 setup files backing up 171 restoring 171 Showing the Seabed Position 74 shutting down the system 175 Side Panel 41 Side Panel of DAS0 Showing DAT Drive Bay 42 Side Panel of the DASO with Magneto Optical Drive 41 Side Panel of the DASO with Tape Drive 41 sidescan channels 49
26. printer or after a hard reset ofthe printer that is switching the power on while the ON LINE button is pressed The configuration is normally retained when the power is switched off In default mode the printer can print only about 8 lines per second Resetting the printer allows the Alden to achieve a maximum speed of 14 to 15 lines per second This maximum speed restricts the ping rate to the speed of the printer in acquisition mode For best quality output therefore Coda recommends that data is printed when the DA System is in playback mode rather than in acquisition mode To reset the printer to default mode 1 Hold down the ON LINE button while switching the power to the printer on see Reset in the Alden Operator s Manual To change the ADDR function address from the default SCSI port to the Parallel interface 1 Press the OFF LINE button twice This puts the printer into Detach modei as indicated on the printer s display 2 Press successively on the ADDRESS button to cycle through the options The Parallel interface is selected when appears in the ADDR display see Address in the Alden Operator s Manual To enable the printer to print at 15 lines per second 1 Switch the HEAD CALIBRATION off See Custom Settings in the Alden Operator s Manual 2 Press and hold the PAPER key and turn the power ON The printer prints the CONSTANT test pattern and displays the default printer se
27. 1 Configure the Printer J 2 2 Select the Hardcopy Device J 2 3 Troubleshooting J 3 EPC HSP100 Printer J 4 Ultra 120 195 or 200 Printer A D Card DOS Diagnostics Test K 1 Test Procedure Multiple Windows Checklists Mobilisation Checklists M 1 DA System Mobilisation Checklist M2 GeoKit PI100 Mobilisation Checklist M 3 PI100 Mobilisation Checklist M4 TrackPlot Mosaic Mobilisation Checklist On Line Checklists N 1 Saving Tag Files to Tape Disk Checklist N 2 Loading Tag Files to System Hard Disk Checklist Interpretation Checklist O 1 GeoKit PI100 Interpretation Checklist Glossary amp Conversions Conversion Table Glossary Software Defect Report Form Product Feedback Manual Feedback May 2001 for version 2 1 231 231 232 232 233 233 233 234 235 235 235 235 237 237 237 238 238 238 238 239 239 240 240 245 245 247 251 251 253 255 256 257 257 257 259 259 263 267 281 283 285 11 12 May 2001 for version 2 1 G O pr S gt O dm i dm ou 14 May 2001 for version 2 1 1 1 1 Welcome Congratulations on buying or hiring the CODA DA System data acquisition system Your investment in the DA System will make working with your sonar data easier and faster The DA System provides automated interpretation tools and a suite of interactive enhancement and event marking tools all of which are designed to improve data i
28. 19015 4096 200 216 290 3 4 19 609 5632 400 432 580 7 14 000 3042 A 2 3 Default Widescan Setups The following table shows the settings used by the DA System system for a Widescan data channel True Range Slant Trigger Trigger Sample Samples m Range m period Rate pings Frequency Channel msec per sec Hz 50 54 69 14 5 40 000 1340 150 162 69 14 5 40 000 1340 250 270 69 14 5 40 000 1340 350 377 69 14 5 40 000 1340 May 2001 for version 2 1 201 saoipueddy Appendices A 3 Description of Shallow Seismic Parameters for Custom Settings 6 9 Sample Freq Hz determines the number of samples used to represent the incoming data and can be altered via a text entry box The default sample frequency of 40 000Hz 40KHz per data channel can be altered by clicking on the text entry box and edited using the keyboard It is very important to ensure that the sampling frequency is high enough to prevent aliasing or undersampling Typical suggested sample frequencies are given in Appendix A The minimum sampling frequency is 3 5KHz the maximum sampling frequency is 160KHz overall in other words if four channels are being used the maximum frequency for each channel is 40KHz Samples Ping is the number of samples used for each ping return It can be altered via the associated text entry box This setting affects the time over which the signal is sampled and hence the sampled range o
29. 2 4 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 2 2 3 The Front Panel The Side Panel The Side Panel of the DA50 The Side Panel of the DASO with Magneto Optical Drive The Side Panel of the DASO showing DAT Drive Bay May 2001 for version 2 1 5 4 3 Connecting the System 4 4 Powering Up the System Acquiring and Recording Survey Data 51 Getting High Quality Data Step 1 Mobilisation 5 2 Getting High Quality Data Step 2 Data Acquisition 5 2 1 Acquiring Analogue Data 5 2 1 1 Triggering Analogue Data Acquisition 5 2 1 2 Acquiring Analogue Sidescan Data 5 2 1 3 Acquiring Analogue Shallow Seismic Data 5 2 1 4 Other Channels 5 2 2 Acquiring Data from a Digital Sonar 5 2 2 1 Edgetech DF1000 5 2 2 2 Edgetech ACI 5 2 3 Acquiring Data over a Local Area Network 5 288 Networking to an Edgetech MIDAS XSTAR system 5 2 3 2 Networking to an Edgetech FSIU Interface System 5 2 3 3 Networking to a Reson Seabat 8125 Interface System 5 3 Getting High Quality Data Step 3 QC by Viewing the Data 5 3 1 Choosing Which Channels to View 5 3 2 Setting Offset and Gain for Each Channel 5 4 Getting High Quality Data Step 4 Navigation Inputs 5 4 1 Setting Up RS232 Communication 542 Checking the Format of the Incoming Nav Data 5 4 3 Setting Up Navigation Input 5 4 4 Other Navigation Parameters in Acquisition Mode 5 4 4 1 Survey and Line Name 544 2 Setting Towfish Layback and Offset 5 4 4 3 Setting the UTM Zone 5 5 Getting High Quality Data Step 5 Bottom Tracking 5 5 1
30. 2001 for version 2 1 7 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 Processing Sonar Data for Display The Processing functions are applied in the order they are turned on by the user with the following exceptions TVG is always applied last Fish height bottom tracking is always applied to raw data for example it is first applied to a copy of the raw data the swell value calculation is always applied to raw data Note Changes made in the Processing menu in playback mode affect only the data being displayed to the screen the data on the tape or optical disk is not affected in any way Similarly in acquisition mode processing has no effect on data being recorded to tape or optical disk Fish height and swell values however are recorded alongside ping data and can be referenced in playback mode Choosing Which Data To View The number of channels displayed can be changed from two channels dual channel mode to one channel single channel mode using the Display menu Selecting Left Data Channel or Right Data Channel from this menu causes the display to show either the left or right display channel respectively To revert to dual channel mode select Both Data Channels Note however that two separate channels can only be displayed in dual channel mode if they were recorded on the same trigger Adjusting the Offset and Gain Applied to the Data The Processing Scale Display Data pop up is used to select the portion of the input signal range to be display
31. 4 channels at once namely Port and Starboard at both 100kHz and 500kHz If you only wish to collect data for 2 channels rather than 4 simply select the channels you require It is not yg to select data acquisition for only one channel The input channel numbers for the DF1000 data are fixed The Coda W channels are as follows e Port 100kHz Input Channel 1 e Starboard 100kHz Input Channel 2 e Port 500kHz Input Channel 3 e Starboard 500kHz Input Channel 4 The DF1000 towfish has an optional feature of providing instrumentation data The towfish can supply data for the heading towfish depth and towfish voltage It is possible to store the values as part of the navigation data These values can be stored by selection the appropriate toggle buttons in the Nav Decode frame 52 May 2001 for version 2 1 If water depth is being received from the Navigation Input through the COM2 port then towfish depth is ignored However if water depth is not being received through this port then it is calcu lated by adding towfish depth to fish height to derive the water depth These fields can then be reported see Report Generation Section 10 10 2 The towfish depth may be used to calculate water depth for the report If navigation data is currently being received using Navigation Input then selecting the DF1000 values will override the values received from Navigation Input The Device Active Inactive toggle button is used to either switch on o
32. 6 1 discusses the details of how to correct navigation data as it is read from tape by the DA System system Correction of the navigation data requires a floppy disk with an appropriate smoothed or processed navigation file The format for the corrected navigation file is described below The corrected position at each fix is written in ASCII text to the file with white space tabs or spaces separating each entry time fix easting northing heading kp dcc layback fish_offset fish_height water_depth The time should be in UTC format that is the time in seconds since 1st January 1970 The note at the end of this section shows how to convert a date and time in GMT to UTC The Easting and Northing should be in the same format as the original Easting and Northing metres if the navigation basis was UTM and degrees if the navigation basis was WGS84 in both cases the easting or northing should be written as a decimal fraction for example 59 6543 rather than in degrees minutes and seconds of arc The corrected heading should be in degrees 0 to 359 999 Kp in kilometres and dcc layback and fish offset in the same units as those originally used when the navigation data was obtained that is metres If a field is not relevant or if no value has been calculated the character or should be placed in the appropriate column Each orrected entry should be on a single line with entries in ascending time order If entrie
33. 6 17 The Application Specific Area Device Tab in Playback Mode optical disk version When the DA System is in playback mode the Devices tab in the Application Specific Area shows information on the tape devices or disk devices present on the system see Figure 6 16 page 98 and Figure 6 17 page 98 If optical drives are fitted this display indicates what file if any has been selected see 6 2 2 by displaying it along side the relevant device icon The icon acts as a media eject button by clicking on the relevant device icon 98 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 12 Using Other Coda Software Modules Data Acquisition Az Geokit Ag Pipeline Inspection 1 TrackPlot _ Mosaic Figure 6 18 The Applications Menu The Applications menu allows you to select which Coda application you wish to run The Appli cation Specific Area of the main display will change according to the application being used The only option available on the standard DA System system is Data Acquisition For infor mation about the other software modules contact Coda Technologies directly or consult the appropriate software module manual When an automated interpretation application is running for example automated pipeline inspection the letter R is appended to the application menu item This lets you switch between application modules while remaining aware of which application is currently running GeoKit The Geophysicist On line Interpret
34. 6 Once the Mosaic has built up has it been manipulated to produce the desired image 3 7 Have any required screen dumps been generated Signed Date CODA TrackPlot Mosaic mobilised 256 May 2001 for version 2 1 N On Line Checklists The purpose of these checklists is to ensure that the system operator is carrying out all the required steps when tagging or generating reports with the Coda system N 1 Saving Tag Files to Tape Disk Checklist Tape System Blank tape loaded into drive 1 1 Files saved using Tagging Manage Tag Files Tape Load Save 1 Save Batch Overwrite to overwrite existing data on tape Save Batch Append to write to the first blank section of the tape Tag files saved correctly List Previous Batch showed the appropriate tag files 1 Optical Disk System Blank optical disk loaded into drive 1 Tag files located and selected using Tagging Manage Tag Files Database 1 Location Tag files copied to target location using Copy Tag Files 1 Tag files saved correctly Database Location showed the appropriate tag files 1 Tape Disk Systems Tag file tape labelled correctly 1 Date and time of recording 1 Data Source l Client 1 Kp start and end 1 Tag file name 1 Tag file tape optical disk write protected 1 Tag file stored with data file tape optical disk 1 N 2 Loading Tag Files to System Hard Disk Checklist Tag file tape disk loaded into correct drive 1 Tag file tape rewound tape s
35. 79 79 79 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 82 83 83 85 85 86 86 87 6 3 1 Choosing Which Channels to View 6 3 2 Setting Offset and Gain 6 4 Playing Back Data Step 3 Controlling Playback Speed 6 5 Playing Back Data Step 4 Bottom Tracking 6 6 Playing Back Data Step 5 Corrected Navigation 6 6 1 Incorporating Corrected Navigation Data 6 6 2 Selecting Raw or Corrected Navigation 6 6 3 Choosing UTM or Lat Long Coordinate Display 6 64 Other Navigation Parameters 6 6 4 1 Survey and Line Name 6 6 4 2 Setting Towfish Layback and Offset 6 6 4 3 Setting the UTM Zone 6 7 The Tape Disk Controls in Playback Mode 6 7 1 Playing the Tape or Disk 641 2 Stopping the Tape or Disk 6 13 Pausing Replay 6 7 4 Goto 6 7 4 1 Goto to a Position on a File or Tape 6 7 4 2 Got to a Specific Tag 6 7 4 3 Goto a Specific Time 6 7 4 4 Goto a Specific KP Chainage 6 7 4 5 Goto a Specific Fix Number 6 7 46 Goto a Specific Ping Number 6 1 5 Fast Forward Cue 6 7 6 Rewind Review 6 8 Ejecting Tapes and Disks 6 9 Deleting Files from an Optical Disk 6 10 The General Information Area in Playback Mode 6 10 1 The General Information in Playback Mode 1 6 10 2 The General Information Area in Playback Mode 2 6 11 The Application Specific Area Devicestin Playback Mode 6 12 Using Other Coda Software Modules Processing Sonar Data for Display 7 1 Choosing Which Data To View 7 2 Adjusting the Offset and Gain Applied to the Data 7 2 1 Automated Scale
36. 80Hz refresh date whilst diSplaying 1040 x 780 non interlaced pixels may damage the monitor 3 For DA100 200 systems only Plug the monitor power cable into the AC Out socket and the monitor signal cable into the monitor signal socket 4 Plug the keyboard cable into the keyboard socket On systems which have two PS 2 sockets the keyboard cable must be plugged into the LOWER one Caution Do not att mpt to plug in another Mose type for example a Microsoft mouse as this might not work usingdhe defauliSystem settings Contact Coda Technol ogies if you need Use a different type of mouse 5 For DA100 200 systems only Plug the mouse or trackball cable into the serial port labelled COMI 6 If required connect a printer to the parallel port labelled ZPT1 For data acquisition only 7 Connect the analogue sonar signals to the BNC connectors These are labelled CH1 to CH4 in the DA100 200 and CH1 and CH2 in the DA50 25 8 Connect the trigger signal e If an external trigger is to be used the trigger signal should be connected to the trigger input BNC sockets labelled TRIG A IN or TRIG B IN for DA200 systems which have two trigger inputs For sub bottom profilers the trigger input should be the output of the heave compensation unit where fitted e If the DA System is being used as the trigger source for external sonar equipment the trigger signal should be connected through BNC connectors to the trigger output socke
37. Area in Playback Mode 2 2 Dualvert 1 X Horiz 1 N Figure 6 15 The General Information Area in Playback Mode 2 e Position The position of either the fish or the vessel in either Lat Long or UTM appears at the top of the display and shows the position of the newest ping in the window see Section 6 6 3 A symbol of a fish or a vessel appear in the middle of the position to indicate the position reference point e date time the date and time at which the data was recorded The date is displayed as dd mm yy e Nav Sync A clock face displayed between date and time shows green when the navigation date is in sync and red when it is not e pings s the rate pings per second at which the display lines scroll down the screen In playback mode the rate can be changed using the Settings Playback Speed pop up e ping no the number of the ping being displayed in the top line of the Data Display Window May 2001 for version 2 1 97 Wejs S va eu Buisn It is continuously updated while data is scrolling e survey displays the survey description as entered in the Nav Parameters pop up see Section 6 6 4 e Kp the kilometre post number of the newest ping in the display window e cursor pointer the position directly under the cursor on the screen namely Eastings Northings and Kp The information is colour coded to indicate the channel over which the cursor is positioned channel colour is indicated in the top right
38. Connectors Figure 4 3 this page shows the typical layout of the DA System s back panel It identifies the connectors serial ports and other item Use this illustration to acquaint yourself with the cable connections before you try to connect the system using the instructions below Note the location of the following parts which are identified from left to right Voltage selector switch In older DA Systems only Newer systems automatically select the correct voltage This is located between the AC In and AC Out sockets It has two settings 240V and 110 120V The DA System is delivered with the input voltage mains voltage of its power supply unit PSU set to 240V If the local onboard supply is 110 120V the voltage selector switch must be set accordingly Failure to do so would result in damage to the PSU If this switch is not present then the system has an auto switching power supply and no manual switching between mains voltages ismecessary Caution Always confirm that the syStem voltage has been set correctly before switching on the system for the first time incorrect voltage selection candamage the power supply unit Keyboard socket Figure 4 3 this page shows a DA System fitted with two PS 2 connectors If the system that you are using has two PS 2 connectors you must use the lower one to connect the keyboard Other DA System systems are fitted with either a single PS 2 or a single non PS 2 connector for connecting the keybo
39. DA System A single program running as a real time process in the Unix operating system digitises the incoming analogue data and reads in RS 232 navigation data The incoming analogue data is time stamped with the ping time in UTC and the latest navigation data is combined with it Note that the navigation data the acquisition parameters and the ping time are all stored for each data channel and each ping with the digitised analogue data see Appendix E for a description of the data stored in the Coda data format Once this process of combination has been carried out the data is available either within the DA System system for use by the media IO sub system or the display sub system or optionally over Ethernet 180 May 2001 for version 2 1 14 5 The media IO sub system is responsible for saving full resolution data to tape or optical disk If dual drives are fitted the recording can be continuous without the need to pause for tape or disk changes Otherwise a brief gap will appear in the recorded data during the change period It should be noted that the media IO and the acquisition sub systems are independent of the user interface and display systems When the full resolution data has been transferred to the display sub system TVG curve compen sation can be carried out This allows compensation for a sidescan sonar s inbuilt TVG curve if required This compensation is carried out on the 12 bit digitised data and is controlled by t
40. IP Address the IP address of the FSIU 4 Press Test Connection This activates a ping test on the FSIU IP address toycheck the integrity of the network connection If successful the system will return the message IP address is alive 5 Use the Lock button to prevent accidental change and save the set up using the Save button May 2001 for version 2 1 55 wajskS va eu Buisn Using the DA System Figure 5 7 The Network Tab system on initial opening _ Figure 5 7 this page Network Device Type Connect to FSIU Port Nu System Time items Tab Form with the Edgetech FSIU the Network tab will only display the FSIU Derive ping Timestamp and Set 56 May 2001 for version 2 1 Network1 J Device Active Inactive Networked Device Type EdgeTech FSIU FI Network IP Address 194 70 215 130 J Lock Test Connection Connect to FSIU Port Number 1600 Reset FSIU Sidescan SS 75 Sidescan SS 410 Sub bottom SB 0512 Bathymetry J Subsystem Active Inactive Pulse Type Information Pulse Type 75 3k 5k Centre Frequency 75kHz Al Pulse Bandwidth 7 5kHz Trigger Internal Pulse Length 13ms Trigger Divisor 1 Trigger Delay us S Range m 50 M Nav Decode Use FSIU Values Y Derive ping Timestamp from FSIU System Time Set FSIU System Time FSIU System Time A EngeTech Figure 5 8 The Network Tab Form of the Open Acquisition Window showing the set u
41. It takes longer if you are generating screen dumps on floppy disk when the system is scrolling Pausing the screen display allows the screen dump operation to complete more quickly Note The Printer option applies only to Postscript images TIFF images cannot be dumped to a Postscript printer e Floppy When prompted insert a blank DOS formatted floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter a filename for the screen dump When entering filenames bear in mind that DOS expects filenames to be a maximum of 12 characters long including the character some packages expect Encapsulated Postscript files to have the EPS extension some packages expect TIFF files to have the TIF extension Click on the OK button The system automatically dumps the image to floppy disk and the Screen Dump pop up disappears e Printer Click on the Printer Setup button In the Printer Setup pop up select the printer port the format of the page portrait or landscape and the type of file ASCII or Postscript then click on the OK button In the Screen Dump pop up click on the OK button This sends May 2001 for version 2 1 139 Using the DA System 9 2 1 the screen dump to the printer The image dumped to disk or printer will include any overlay features such as tags or fix lines as well as the image data Any image enhancement or processing techniques applied to the waterfall display will also be reflected in the du
42. Operating System 14 3 DA System Software and GUI 14 4 Data Flow in the DA System 14 5 File Structure of the DA System DA System Specifications 15 1 Trigger Input 15 2 Trigger Output 15 3 Analogue Input 15 4 Parallel Output 159 161 161 162 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 166 166 166 166 166 166 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 170 171 171 171 171 171 172 172 172 172 172 172 173 173 173 173 174 175 175 175 175 179 179 179 179 179 181 183 183 183 183 183 May 2001 for version 2 1 9 15 5 Serial Input Output 183 15 6 GPIB Output 183 15 7 Monitor Output 184 IV Getting Help 16 Getting Help 187 16 1 The Help Menu 187 16 1 1 Key Shortcuts 187 16 1 2 Technical Support 188 16 1 3 Product Information 188 16 1 4 Coda Technologies Info 188 16 1 5 DA System Version 188 16 2 24 Hour Technical Support 188 16 3 Troubleshooting the DA System 189 V Appendices As Example Acquisition Setups 195 A 1 Default Setups 196 A 2 Description of Sidescan Parameters for Custom Settings 196 A 2 1 Example Sidescan Setups 198 A 2 1 1 Typical Sidescan Sonar 50m True Range 198 A 2 1 2 Typical Sidescan Sonar 100m True Range 199 A 2 1 3 Ultra Widescan 50m True Range 199 A 2 1 4 Ultra Widescan 100m True Range 200 A 2 2 Default Sidescan Setups 201 A 2 3 Default Widescan Setups 201 A 3 Description of Shallow Seismic Parameters for Custom Settings 202 A 3 1 Shallow Seismic Custom Settings
43. Setup files were successfully restored to tape drive I Optical Menu This menu item will bring up a sub menu as follows Format Optical Disk This menu item formats optical disks for use with the CODA system and creates the necessary directory structure on the optical disk Repair Optical Disk This menu item audits the optical disk and repairs inconsistent conditions on the disk It is possible for the data on the disk to become inconsistent if there is a power failure to the CODA system In such cases the Repair Optical Disk function should be used Unmount All Disks Clicking on this menu item unmounts optical disks in both drives Disks must be unmounted before they can be ejected This option should only be usedif the disk cannot be unmounted from the viewer Before using this menu item check that the disk is not mounted for Playback or for tagging in the Manage Tag Files menu option Backup Setup Files When Backup Setup Files is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the following prompt appears Which optical drive do you wish to copy setup files to default 1 1 2 Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt A prompt appears asking for a disk to be inserted into drive 1 Insert the optical disk into Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt to continue The setup files are then save
44. Sidescan Port SS Port or Sidescan Starboard SS Stbd provides three options in the Sonar Type field Standard SS Widescan SS or Custom SS Standard Sidescan True Range m This spin box is used to define the across track swathe size for the data channel The actual true range of the sidescan is dependent on its altitude the true range selected will be correct for any fish altitude from 0 to 40 of the true range The DA System will automatically calculate the sample frequency and the number of samples per ping required for the given range If your DA System is a DA200 different sample frequencies can be selected for each trigger If you re using an external trigger it is necessary to ensure that the range settings on the DA System are compatible with the sonar processing unit If you set the range on the DA System to be the same as that on the sidescan processing unit you may find that the outer edges of May 2001 for version 2 1 49 Wa skS va ou usn Using the DA System 5 2 1 3 the sidescan swathe are not being digitised or more critical for your data quality that the Coda system is digitising for so long after each trigger that it misses the next trigger effec tively halving your along track resolution To get range settings which match the trigger rate of your sidescan processing unit set the range on the processing unit then increase the range setting on the Coda system until the ping rate which is displayed i
45. System should only be powered up when the printer has been connected to the appropriate port of the DA System see Section 4 3 The printer must be switched on before the DA System has been powered up J 2 1 Configure the Printer It is recommended that the manufacturer s manual is used in conjunction with the following instructions 238 May 2001 for version 2 1 To print successfully from this device the printer must first be configured correctly before selecting the EPC 1086 2 printer from the DA System s list of available printers Configuring the printer is only necessary when first setting up the DA System and the EPC printer or after a hard reset of the printer that is switching the power on while the ON LINE button is pressed The settings can then be saved for future use Configure the printer using the following settings Shades 64 data input parallel Medium Film or Paper sweep reverse Scale Lines 10 message user 1 repeat cal 2 margin 0 0 contrast 0 10 char size 2 Lpi 20 0 Background data event solid Auto event off width 2048 signal single data type 8 bits key rate 0 125 line repeat 1 scan rate 0 1 slope rising delay 0 000 J 2 2 Select the Hardcopy Device Hardcopy Output is described fully in Section 94 1 Switch on the DA System The DA System should be switched on after the printer is switched on Select File Hardcopy Output From the scrolling list of printers plotters which appe
46. acquisition parameters Number of Samples the total number of samples that have been acquired for this ping This is defined while setting up the acquisition parameters see Section 5 2 Input Voltage Range the voltage setting defined in the acquisition parameters Nav Data whether raw or corrected navigation data is being used see Section 5 4 4 This is 132 May 2001 for version 2 1 8 9 only relevant in playback mode e Nav Clock Sync whether the DA System clock is synchronised with the RS232 nav input clock see Section 5 4 4 e Fish Height Source whether it has been manually entered Fixed or it has come from the nav data Auto or from Telemetry see Section 5 5 Input Position Ref whether Fish or Ship is being used see Section 5 4 4 e Speed of Sound in Water either the speed of sound entered by the RS232 nav string or the default value of 1500m s e Water Depth the depth of water obtained from the nav string You can keep the pop up open so that you can monitor changes in the parameters as data scrolls down the screen To prevent the pop up from obscuring part of the Data Display Area you can move it about the screen To do this press and drag on the title bar Ping Data Ping Number 46488 UTC Time 878731933 020 Date 05 11 97 Time 12 12 13 Sample Number 1010 Intensity FSV 57 10 True Range m 10 50 Fish Height m 18 47 m Figure 8 10 The Ping Data Pop up Window This pop up gives
47. an item of electrical equipment the procedure to be observed when turning on the mains voltage to an item of electrical equipment allowing one program running in a multi tasking operating system to cause other programs to be suspended and only restarted once the pre empting program has completed its tasks press down the appropriate mouse button and without releasing it move the mouse so that the pointer is in the desired position on the screen then release the mouse button see corrected navigation data Power Supply Unit converts mains AC voltage to the lower voltages required by computer equipment a menu which appears when a Menu Bar option is selected items within a pull down menu are selected by pressing and dragging to the required menu item a format for the storage of sonar data to tape obtaining data from a file or memory in an order which is not the same as the order the data was stored in occurring at the speed of data acquisition or faster cause a computer system to completely re initialise itself as though the power had been turned off then on again the time from the start of recording data to the cessation of recording relative resolution ROTV RS 232 sampling sampling frequency saturation screen dump scroll bar scrolling SCSI 2 SDEF format SEG Y format seismic select serial port shortcut key sidescan sonar signal processing single tape slant range
48. and Offset Adjustment 7 2 2 Manual Scale and Offset Adjustment 7 3 Setting Time Varying Gain 7 4 Choosing Which Part of the Trace To View 7 5 Enhancing the Image 7 5 1 Contrast Adjustment by Gamma Correction 7 5 2 Colourmap Selection 7 53 Inverting the Colourmap 7 5 4 Manipulating the Image Enhancement Graph 7 5 4 1 Changing the Image Enhancement Graph 7 5 4 2 Choosing a Straight Line or Spline Fit 7 5 4 3 Adding a Grip Point 7 5 4 4 Deleting a Grip Point 7 5 4 5 Resetting the Graph 7 5 4 6 A Practical Example Rectifying the Data 7 5 4 7 A Practical Example Setting a Black Level 7 6 Refreshing the Display 7 7 Processing Sidescan Data 7 7 1 Removing Noise 7 7 1 1 Cross Track Smoothing 7 7 2 Eliminating Sonar Distortions 7 7 2 1 Slant Range Correction 7 8 Processing Shallow Seismic Data 7 8 1 Frequency Filtering 7 8 2 Swell Filtering 7 8 2 1 Swell Filtered Output 7 8 3 Changing Sub bottom Velocity 101 101 101 101 102 103 105 106 107 107 108 108 108 108 108 108 108 109 110 111 111 111 111 112 112 112 112 118 118 121 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 7 84 Trace Mixing and Anti Mixing 121 7 8 5 Seismic TVG 122 7 8 6 Colour Maps 122 7 8 7 Swell Filter Hints 123 8 General Display Tools 125 8 1 Displaying Event marks Scale Lines and Fix Marks 125 8 1 1 Displaying Fix Information 125 8 2 Overlay Data 125 8 3 Scale Lines 125 8 4 Displaying Fix Information 127 8 4 1 Fix Data Setup 128 8 5 Zooming on Screen Feat
49. and Section 4 4 4 2 DA50 Hardware 4 2 1 The Front Panel as Power LED HDD LED Power Switch Mouse Socket Keyboard Socket Glide Pad Figure 4 4 The DA50 Front Figure 4 4 this page shows the typical layout of the DASO s front panel Read this whilst examining your system noting the location of the following parts Power switch Do not turn off the power until the DA50 has been shut down correctly see Section 13 2 On some systems the Power switch is located to the left of the Reset switch Display screen Integral to the system Keyboard and mouse connections These connections should be made by removing the cover at the back of they keyboard and plugging int he two connectors stored under the cover Keyboard and Glide Pad Integral to the system 40 May 2001 for version 2 1 4 2 2 The Side Panel 4 2 2 1 The Side Panel of the DA50 Network Card Trigger amp Channel BNCs Figure 4 5 The DA50 Side Panel Showing Interface Connections Figure 4 5 this page shows the typicallayout of the DASO side panel Read this while examining your system noting the location of the following parts e COM2 is a male D type RS 232 serial port and is used for connecting the navigation data input to the back panel For most applications a simple two wire connection data in at pin 2 and signal ground at pin 5 if a 9 way connector is fitted or data in at pin 2 and signal ground at pin 7 if a 25 way connector is fitted
50. and printer port select OK in the Screen Dump window The image is then dumped to theprint r Depending on the speed of the attached printer this may take between a few seconds and several minutes If the image is to be dumped to Floppy click on the Floppy toggle first ensuring that a disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive A dialogue box appears asking for the name of the file to be dumped When the name has been entered and OK selected the image is dumped to disk This takes several minutes Note The process of dumping the screen image to floppy disk takes much longer ifthe system is being used for playback or acquisition at the same time as an image is being dumpeds It is notiadvisable to carry out screen dumps in acquisition mode a loss of data to the screen may result owing to the time taken for the screen dump to complete in playback mode pausing the display allows the screen dump to be completed more quickly The action buttons at the foot of the pop up include the option to Store the chosen settings for future use or to use the Factory setting see Section 3 3 9 Printer Setup Window Coda DA200 Printer Setup Printer Port Format Portrait i Landscape i Type v ASCII A PostScript Figure 9 5 The Printer Setup Pop up Window Selection of the appropriate printer port is made by clicking on the port to which the printer is connected If the port is a serial port th
51. and word Load Save Command Summary e Load Batch loads the batch file recorded at the current tape position e Load Remote allows a tag file to be loaded from another DA System system on the same Ethernet network Contact Coda Technologies for further information Figure 10 5 The Load Remote Tag File Pop up Window May 2001 for version 2 1 149 e List Batch lists the batches on a tape before loading Before using this option the tape must be rewound When the tag file details have been checked the pop up is dismissed by clicking on the Dismiss button at the bottom of the pop up e List Previous Batch displays details of the previous batch of tag files on the tape relative to the current tape position e List All Batches displays details of all the batches of tag files on the tape e Save Batch Overwrite saves a batch file overwriting any data already on the tape The tape is automatically rewound to the beginning before saving the batch e Save Batch Append saves a batch file to the end of existing data on the tape The tape is ft mouse button and multiple selections by either lt Control gt held down Once the selection process has files will be deleted Any tags currently on the screen which e automatically removed from the screen 10 9 2 5 10 9 3 Figure 10 6 Tag Database Management Pop up Window If you are using an optical disk system selecting the Manage Tag Files menu item produces the Tag Dat
52. appropriate port of the DA System see Section 4 3 The printer must be switched on before the DA System has been powered up The printer should NOT remain connected to the DA System if it is powered off Configure the Printer The printer has a set of internal DIP switches which control the printer setup parameters These switch settings must be set correctly in order to optimise the printed output when connected to the Coda system For the HSP 100 to be in GSP 1086 emulation mode 6 BIT it is necessary to have the internal Dip Switch Number 8 turned ON Changing to Digital Mode Ultra 120 195 or 200 Printer The DAaSystem can output data in real time during acquisition to the Ultra 120 195 or 200 printer via a parallel interface The following example describes the setup of the Ultra 120 printer the instruction for the setup of the Ultra 195 and the Ultra 200 are very similar The DA System can outputdata in real time during acquisition to the Ultra 120 195 or 200 printer via a parallel interface Note Before connecting the printer to the DA System both the printer and the DA System must be shut down and the power supplies to both switched off see Section 13 4 The DA System should only be powered up when the printer has been connected to the appropriatesport of the DA System see Section 4 3 The printer must be switched on before the DA System has b en powered up The printer should NOT remain connected to the DA System if it is
53. are given in Appendix D 5 4 3 Setting Up Navigation Input Selecting the File Raw Nav Input menu item brings up the Raw Nav Input settings pop up and the Nav String Decode tab enables the appropriate RS 232 navigation string and serial input port to be selected see Figure 5 9 page 58 To initialise navigation input 1 Check that the RS232 port is set up correctly and that the incoming navigation string has the expected format see Section 5 4 1 above 2 Select the appropriate navigation library format from the list and QC it to ensure it is being decoded correctly see Section 5 4 2 above 64 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 If necessary set the Clock Synchronisation The Clock Synchronisation setting defaults to Use nav string This allows the system to use the date and time obtained from the navigation computer as a time stamp for its data this is essential when generating corrected navigation data see Section 6 6 If no time infor mation is available from the nav string or if it is not desirable to synchronise with the navigation computer set the Clock Synchronisation to Use system time The Coda system s time can be set via the Maintenance Menu see Section 12 3 If Turn nav input on is selected and Nav is set in the Clock Sync when the DA System time has synchronised a Nav clock Synchronised OK message appears on the message bar and the clock face in the General Information Area turns from red to green If
54. be altered via a text entry box The default sample frequency of 40 000Hz 40KHz per data channel can be altered by clicking on the text entry box and edited using the keyboard It is very important to ensure that the sampling frequency is high enough to prevent aliasing or undersampling Typical suggested sample frequencies are given in Appendix A The minimum sampling frequency is 14KHz the maximum sampling frequencysis 160KHz overall in other words if four channels are being used the maximum frequency for each channel is 40KHz e Samples Ping is the number of samples used for each ping return It can be altered via the associated text entry box This setting affects the time over which the signal is sampled and hence the sampled range of the input sidescan signal or the sampled depth for a seismic signal For example with a sampling frequency of 40KHZ and 2560 samples per line this gives a sampling time of a 0 064 seconds For a typical speed of sound in water of 1500m s this will give a distance of 0 064 x 1500 96 metres The slant range is therefore 2 48 metres Note If samples per ping is set too high it may take so long to collect the required number of samples that the next trigger is missed This will result in the beginning of the next pulse being displayed as a continuation of the current ping The sampled ping rate indicated by the lines per second in the General Information Area will also appear to halve as every s
55. be prompted to double the roll off magnitude Band stop and band pass filtering can be implemented by combined low pass and high pass filters A low pass filter that is combined with a high pass filter that has the higher cut off frequency will result in a band pass filter whereas a low pass filter that is combined with a high pass filter that has the lower cut off frequency will result in a band stop filter May 2001 for version 2 1 225 seolpueddy 226 May 2001 for version 2 1 G Data Formats G 1 Tapes can be recorded in both the Coda format and the SEG Y format however we strongly recommend that they are recorded in the Coda format This is because the Coda format stores a greater amount of information than the SEG Y format all of which is necessary if the Coda processing modules are to be applied to the data with complete success Note Recording in SEG Y is unavailable for multi trigger data due to the restriction in the SEG Y format It is possible however to record in SEG Y format when you are acquiring more than one trigger provided that you record only one trigger s worth of information If you try to record the channel with another trigger the system will pop up a warning and reset to Coda format Four tape formats Coda SEG Y Q MIPS and SDEF can be played back through a DA System system ifrecorded or copied on a DA System system However not all DA System functions and features canbe guaranteed to wo
56. be selected by pressing the key for the underlined letter of the required menu item s name A list of other keyboard shortcuts can be displayed on screen by selecting Help Key Shortcuts see Figure 3 27 this page The number of shortcut keys available however depends on the module of the DA System being used May 2001 for version 2 1 33 uoljonposjuy 34 May 2001 for version 2 1 Part Il Using the DA System 36 May 2001 for version 2 1 4 The System Hardware 4 1 DA100 200Hardware 4 1 1 The Front Panel 4 1 1 1 Grill Power Switch Amber LED Green LED Tape Eject Button System Cooling Fans Green ower LED Re itch edia Drive Bay Red SCSI LED Green Floppy Disk LED Disk Eject Button Figure 4 1 The DA200 Front Panel DAT tape version Figure 4 1 this page shows the typical layout of the DA System s front panel when a DAT tape system is installed Read this whilst examining your system noting the location of the following parts Floppy disk drive The drive s LED is lit while the system is using the drive Do not remove a floppy disk or turn off the system when the LED is on Doing so may damage the data on the disk Power switch Do not turn off the power until the DA System has been shut down correctly see Section 13 2 On some systems the Power switch is located to the left of the Reset switch Soft Power switch On older DA Systems only This switch can be used to turnon
57. been entered as a fixed fish height e If the automated bottom tracking is not following the bottom correctly either reset the search area using the automatic tracking pointer see Section 3 6 or redefine the automatic tracking parameters see Section 5 5 If the automated tracking continues to May 2001 for version 2 1 189 djeH Buje Getting Help perform badly it may be that the combination of seabed and water column characteristics are such that it cannot follow the seabed return accurately In this case switch to a fixed towfish height or use the telemetry input The message No nav updates for xxx seconds appears e Check that the navigation computer is producing output by switching to Nav input off but view unformatted serial input in the Navigation Input menu see Section 5 4 If no data is visible check that the navigation computer is working correctly and that the serial interface setup of the DA System is compatible with that of the navigation computer e Check that both ends of the RS 232 cable are properly connected e TIfcorrectly formatted ASCII raw nav strings can be seen when Nav input off but view raw serial input menu item is selected reselect the Nav input on option and the Nav Format QC window see Section 5 4 If the values appearing in the QC window are not correct it is probable that the incoming string of serial data is not being interpreted correctly Either change the format of the incoming seria
58. characters If no name or description is entered and no name is available from the RS232 Nav String the Survey Name in the Survey Data pop up is shown as Unknown Line Name is used to mark specific parts of a survey with a name of up to 16 characters in length This is most useful in acquisition mode to mark on the data which sections were within specific survey run lines Usually tis more convenient if this is available as part of an RS232 navigation string Setting Towfish Layback and Offset When Layback andFish Cross Track Offset are entered in the text entry boxes the DA System is able to use the ship s position to estimate the position of the towfish Ship Position X Towfish Position Figure 5 20 Diagram showing Cross Track Offset and Layback The Layback value is the along track distance in metres from the ship position to the fish position and the Fish Cross Track Offset is the distance also in metres cross track from the ship position to the fish position see Figure 5 20 this page A positive offset indicates an offset to the right starboard and a negative offset indicates the offset is to the left port Setting the UTM Zone The Settings Navigation Parameters UTM Zone selector can be used to enter the UTM zone number for converting positions from Eastings and Northings to lat long co ordinates The value can either be taken from the nav string by clicking on the Input via nav string item or it can be ente
59. continuous record insert tapes or disks in both drives Click on the Recording On toggle in the Data Control Area In the Record Set up pop up select continuous record if required the channels to be recorded the recording format and the drive on which to start recording Click on the Recording On toggle of the appropriate drive to switch it on then click on the OK button e To stop recording click on the Recording Off button in the Data Control Area In the Record Set up pop up click on the Record toggle to switch it off then click on the OK button Eject the tape if the system has not already done so or eject the optical disk and write protect it Label the tape or disk using the start and stop recording times and fix information from the information window May 2001 for version 2 1 19 uol onpoju Introduction 2 1 3 Playing Back Survey Data 1 2 3 Insert a previously recorded tape or optical disk into the appropriate drive Select File gt Open Playback or click on the Open Playback icon to initialise playback mode In the Open Playback pop up click on the appropriate drive s tab form if it is not selected already Then do one of the following e Ifyou are using a tape system check the File Information window to make sure that you have the correct file and recorded channels If not use the appropriate action buttons to find them Then click on the OK button e If you are using an optical disk system select
60. default location Clicking on the Factory button will restore the database location to Hard Disk Copy Tag Files Coda DA200 Copy Tag Files Copy selected files to Hard Disk OK Cancel Figure 10 7 Copy Tag Files Pop up Window The Copy Tag Files pop up lets you select the target drive for the tag files that you wish to copy and to direct the system to copy those files from the source database location to the target drive To copy tag files you must first have selected the source drive Database Location of the tag files that you wish to copy and haverhighlighted the relevant tag files from the list in the Tag Files window Clicking on the Copy Tag Files button produces the Copy Tag Files pop up The target drive for the tag files can be selected using the Copy selected files to option selection button the options available are Hard Disk Optical 1 and Optical 2 in a dual drive system When you click on the OK button the system automatically copies the files from the source database location to the target drive To check that the tag files have been copied to the new location you can select the new database location and see that the tag files appear in the Tag Files window Copying Tag Files The optical disk system has a Copy Tag Files option selection button instead of a Load Save button You can use the copying option to copy tag database files from the hard disk to an optical disk and vice versa or from disk
61. display screen It provides the following information e pings s the rate in pings per second at which the display lines scroll down the screen In acquisition mode the rate is determined by the Open Acquisition Triggers Trigger Period settings see Section 5 2 e ping no the number of the ping being displayed in the top line of the Data Display Area It is continuously updated while data is scrolling The ping number is assigned to the data during acquisition and is reset to zero only when the system is restarted This means that consecutive tapes or optical disks used during data acquisition have sequential ping numbers e date time the date and time at which the data was recorded The date is displayed as dd mm yy During acquisition if Navigation Input Sync with Nav Time has been set the date 134 May 2001 for version 2 1 and time displayed are those supplied by the RS232 navigation data otherwise the current date and time on the DA System are displayed If the system is not able to synchronise with the external navigation clock the time label changes colour from cyan to red e fish height the height the towfish is from the seabed e cursor pointer the position directly under the cursor on the screen expressed as Eastings Northings and Kp The position is fully geo corrected and is calculated using the navigation data stored with each ping If the fish height is known the position is automatically slant range cor
62. example SDEF however some of the information needed for playback is found at the start of each file recording session on the tape Tapes of such formats are rewound automat ically to the beginning of the current file to retrieve this information If the tape that you wish to access is in the lower drive of a twin tape system click on the Tape 2 tab Locate the file that you want to open A file is defined by the beginning and end of a data recording session The file name and details appear in the File Information window e If you can t immediately locate a file you can use the Goto File spin box in the Open Playback pop up to search for it Enter an absolute value either by typing a number in the text entry box or by using the up and down arrow buttons The number of the file relates May 2001 for version 2 1 85 to its place on the tape for example type 3 to go to the third file on tape Alternatively enter a relative value in the text entry box by prefixing a number with or for example type 3 to go forward three files or 3 to move back three files from the current position 6 2 2 Starting Playback on an Optical Disk System When this menu item is selected the system automatically begins to read the selected disk and the Open Playback pop up appears The pop ups for the single drive system and the dual drive system are almost identical with a File Information window a Files se
63. frequently as possible though updates at greater than the pulse repetition rate will be ignored The output ofan accurate system time is vital if the instantaneous navigation data is intended to be updated with corrected navigation data The time input allows the Coda system to synchronise with the DGPS nav computer clock allowing for easy correction of the navigation information stored with each sonar ping It should be noted that this time must be the time of transmission of the navigation string fromthe nav computer to the Coda system rather than the time of the fix A separate field is provided to allow the delay between obtaining a navigation update and its transmission to the Coda system to be entered It is important that the clock source used for the system is as reliable and consistent as possible the reliability of the system may be adversely affected if theincoming time is unreliable or inconsistent Two Coda String Formats exist Coda Date which uses a date time format for the date and time and the Coda Format which usesa UTC format for time Coda Format The Coda string format is an ASCII string which is started with the key CODA followed by floating point values and strings separated by the ASCII space character and terminated by a carriage return and line feed as follows CODA Easting Northing Kp DCC Depth Altitude Speed Heading Line Fix Soundspeed Delay Time lt CR gt lt LF gt The floating point format allows an
64. from the Processing menu produces a pop up which can be used to define the trace mixing mode the trace mix fold and the trace mix run off Mixing mode can be used tosenhance infor mation that persists in the along track direction Anti Mixing mode in contrast can be used to suppress noise that persists in the along track direction To use trace mixing 1 Select Processing Trace Mixing The Trace Mixing pop up appears 2 Inthe appropriate Channel tab click on a one of selection switch to choosethe mixing mode Mixing or Anti Mixing 3 Do one of the following e If using the mixing mode use the arrow buttons to input a Trace Mix Fold value and a Trace Mix Run Off value or type the value in the text entry box e Load previously saved settings 4 Click on the OK or Apply button May 2001 for version 2 1 121 Channel 1 A Channel2 N Channel3 N Trace Mixing Mode Of 2 Mixing v Anti Mixing Trace Mixing Parameters Trace Mix Fold b off f al Trace Mix Run Off 0 3 kat Figure 7 24 The Trace Mixing Pop up Window In trace mixing an input signal value is replaced by the sum of weighted values of itself and the corresponding signal values in the neighbouring traces In mixing mode the sum of these weighting coefficients is defined to be one whereas in anti mixing mode this sum is defined to be zero The number of traces thatare combined is defined by the trace mix fold Equal numbers of traces are
65. height The pre defined status from highest to lowest is Corrected Navigation Fish Height Record File and Keep Existing Therefore a Corrected Navigation file which contains fish height will be used in preference to all other inputs If this is not available then the system will check for the availability of the Fish Height File If this is not available the system will revert to reading the acquired fish height value from the data file The Fish Height file can be switched off by deselecting the Remember Use Previous Bottom Position toggle This will prevent a Fish Height file being created or from being accessed in playback mode In this condition the system will revert to reading the acquired fish height value from the data file The fish height record files are stored in home dp100 fish_alt and each recorded data file has a directory of fish altitude files which has the same name as the tag files for that recording this will be the data and time f the start of the recording If you are transferring fish altitude files between machines be sure to copy the appropriate directory and all its contecnts rather than isolated fish altitude files Fish Height Additional options 1 Preview Settings Automatically Copy Settings To Display Bottom All Channels Position Line Figure 5 35 Fish Height Additional Options Preview Settings Automatically allows the user to monitor real time the effect on Fish Height Seabed Tracking of cha
66. icon pops up a window displaying various survey data parameters as shown in Figure 8 9 page 132 The parameters are continuously updated as new sonar pings are displayed to the screen The information displayed in the Survey Data pop up corresponds to the last sonar ping drawn to the top of the display and for the channel being displayed in the left display channel usually the Port channel for sidescan sonar data The DA System should be scrolling data otherwise no data will appear in the Survey Data popup May 2001 for version 2 1 131 Wo s S va ou Buisn Using the DA System Survey Name Unknown Heading 0 00 Ground Speed m s 2 00 Fish Height mx 19 98 Ping Rate Hz 5 43 Line Name Fix No 9100 Kp 0 000 DCC m 0 00 Layback m 5 00 Fish Cross track Offset m 0 00 Along track Resolution m 0 37 Cross track Resolution m 0 02 Slant Range m 53 85 Sample Frequency Hz 35654 Number of Samples 2560 Input Voltage Range 1 25V Nav Data Raw Nav Clock Sync On Fish Height Source Auto Input Position Ref Ship Speed of Sound in Water m s 1500 000 Water Depth m 0 000 Done Figure 8 9 The Survey Data Parameters Pop up Window Heading directional information obtained from the nav input see Section 5 4 4 Ground Speed obtained from the nav input see Section 5 4 4 Fish Height the height of the towfish from the seabed This may either be obtained automat ically from the nav
67. is available only in the PI100 or GeoKit Managing Event Database Files During a long survey a number of tag database files are created these can easily be tens or even hundreds of megabytes long To cope with this the DA System provides ways to manage the tag database files they enable you to load save copy and delete tag database files May 2001 for version 2 1 145 The system automatically updates the list of files in the Tag Management pop up after a Load Save Copy or Delete operation has been carried out it also updates the display of the amount of hard disk space available The Rescan option which forces an update of the list of tag database files and hard disk space is only needed when changes are made to the tag database files without the use of the Load Save Copy or Delete options For example if you change the data tape or disk that you are playing back a tag file for the new tape or disk is created if it doesn t exist already The new file however will not automatically appear on the list of the tag database files if the Tag Management pop up is on screen press the Rescan button to make it appear D l Each tag database entry fix or user defined tag uses about 2KB of file space Keep a check on the amount of disk space available to ensure that the hard disk does not fill up in mid survey 10 9 1 Loading Saving and Copying Tag Files Each recording session produces its own tag database file which is named
68. is not being recorded 2 Select Tagging Manage Tag Files The Tag Database Management pop up appears 3 Select the file or files currently on the hard disk to be save to tape For one file click on the tag file name for several files either press and drag the pointer to highlight a group of tag files or hold down lt Control gt while clicking on the tag file names to make multiple selec tions If necessary scroll through the list of tag files to find the correct files The selected files are highlighted in black 4 To save the selected tag files collectively called a batch click on the Load Save button The Load Save Tags to Tape pop up appears 5 Inthe Save frame of the pop up select Save Batch Overwrite or Save Batch Append either to overwrite the data on the tape or to add the current batch at the end of the previous data on the tape 6 When prompted to load a tape into the appropriate tape drive do so if a tape is not already loaded and click on the OK buttons The system tells you when all the selected files have been saved to tape and rewinds the tape to the beginning whensthe save is completed 7 When the tag file has been written to tape click on the Done button to dismiss the Load Save Tags to Tape and Tag Database Management pop ups 8 Remove the tape and write protect it by sliding along the plastic tab 9 Mark the tape clearly with the tag file name or names For single tape systems a similar procedure
69. istall that is required for trouble free setup and operation e LPTI This port is a 25 way D type female interface It is compatible with a wide range of printers An additional GPIB Centronics type interface is also available for compatibility with thermal printers e Monitor signal connector By using the VGA splitter cable provided with your DA System a monitor can be connected to the unitas well as the integral screen 4 2 2 2 The Side Panel of the DA50 with Magneto Optical Drive Floppy Drive Shes Rs Eject Button Media Status LED Drive Status LED Magneto Optical Drive Eject Button PRS Figure 4 6 The DA50 System Side Panel Showing Magneto Optical Drive Bay Figure 4 6 this page shows the typical layout of the DA50 side panel when a Magneto Optical drive is installed Read this while examining your system noting the location of the following parts May 2001 for version 2 1 41 Using the DA System e Optical Disk drive Two LEDs indicate the status of the disk the status of the drive and fault reporting Eject button this button has no affect when the disk is still mounted To remove a cartridge from the drive first click on the Unmount button in the appropriate pop up and then press the eject button Optical Disk Eject tool Some non Star optical disk drives have a small hole through which a manual ejection tool can be inserted to force ejection of the disk in the event of a problem with the driv
70. manual nstructions brief we refer to clicking or pressing a MOUSE button rather than a RACKBALL button If your system comes with the optional trackball click or ropriate button If no button is specified use the left button for the single trigger systems DA50 and DA100 are identical to those of the May 2001 for version 2 1 17 18 May 2001 for version 2 1 2 Quick Start 2 1 This section includes a quick start procedure which summarises the basic instructions for operating the DA System in data acquisition and playback modes It also contains a list of tips and shortcuts to help you work more quickly and efficiently If you have used the DA System before use this section to remind yourself about the operating procedure If you are new to the DA System read through the list of tips and shortcuts as they will save you time but work through the operating instructions in Part II before referring to the quick start procedure Quick Start Procedure Setting up the DA System 1 2 Remove the system from its packaging Connect the power supply monitor keyboard and mouse or trackball cables to the system if using a printer also connect the printer cable and power on the printer For data acquisition connect the sonar data trig ger and navigation data inputs to the system Power up the system and wait for its user interface screen to appear AcquiringSurvey Data 1 Select File Open Acquisitio
71. mouse button over the appropriate bottom position in the data display Clicking again on the button causes the pointer to revert to its previous mode Clicking on the Copy Settings to All Channels button copies the settings from the current channel Clicking on the Display Bottom Position button produces the Display Bottom Position pop up Figure 5 36 page 75 The action buttons at the bottom of the pop up include the option to Load previous settings or Save current settings so that they can be used in future The name of the settings file appears at the top of the pop up If an asterisk appears at the same time it means the settings have been altered from those saved to the hard disk 5 5 2 3 Automatic Tracking Hints Seismic If the data is prone to noise particularly in the water column the automatic tracking will performless well 1 Select Display gt Bottom Position Line to display the bottom tracking line 2 In the Fish Height Settings pop up click on the tab of the appropriate channel and then click on the Automatic Tracking toggle For best results try the various detection modes in the follow order Thresholding 1 Toggle the Thresholding button Click on the Method Set up button and select the Limits tab Select the Adaptive toggle and set the Search Window width to 10 of the line length Click on the Tracking tab and select the edge you with to track Be ee Ss Set the Threshold Value to just above the mean
72. no effect on ad Multi Node Tags no effect on a database created by DA System Sort Order This option allows you to choose whether to sort by Time or by Kp and whe appear in increasing or decreasing order in the report Text Strings You can select either to Enclose text in double quotes or to Replace spaces with under scores This can be used to ensure that columns whose output contains spaces are not created as several columns when input to another computer package You should choose the output best suited to the software the report will be used with 156 May 2001 for version 2 1 Report Setup Contents This pop in whi ey should ap Fix Lines from the repo tag types should be included in the report and the order e 10 14 this page For example you may wish to exclude g list of the active S slete All Tags b be added or de This form contains a scro Tag Add All Tags ar below Before tags scrolling list by clic required tag s name m and User tags as well as Add Tag Delete nctions of these buttons are described buttons they must be selected from the ections can be made by clicking on the e using a point and drag action on the names the bottom of the pop up is pressed Add Tag Clicking on this button adds the currently selected tag to the list of tag types which reports produced using the current tag database Delete Tag Clicking on this button removes the currently selected tag f
73. of the display window The position is fully geo corrected and is calculated using the navigation data stored with each ping If the fish height is known the position is automatically slant range corrected Similarly if corrected navigation data mode is available this can also be used to provide a further stage of correction Positions that are off track are calculated using the geographical ping position heading and across track distance from the position as shown in Figure 6 9 page 83 For accurate off track positions it is essential that the heading is correct Note To calculate an off track position lat long is converted to UTM the position is calculated and then this position is converted back from UTM to lat long The format in which the cursorinformation is displayed can be changed from eastings and northings to lat long and vice versa by clicking on the appropriate one of selection button in the Display Nav Basis Type frame of the Nav Data Settings pop up 6 11 The Application Specific Area Devices in Playback Mode Devices Channels Fast Tags x l Analog Chi Port MosaicLineS cod Corrected Nav correction off Analog Ch2 Stbd MosaicLineS cod Corrected Nav correction off m Analog Ch3 Seismic MosaicLine5 cod Figure 6 16 The Application Specific Area Channels Tab in Playback Mode tape version Devices S Channels Fast Tags x Optical 1 El Optical 2 F MosaicLine5 cod 15 93 MB Figure
74. on the Delete button then deletes the files from the database 10 9 3 4 Rescan deleted Hard Disk Opti of tag files available Select the files to be deleted Click the left a ake an individual selection press and hold the lt Control gt ke iple i press and drag to select a block of tag files The selected files are highlighted in bla Click on the Delete button and press lt y gt whe Figure 10 8 The Tag Setup System Tab 152 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 10 1 Fr F F 2 format from the contents of tag database files this is necess e e gt stored in binary machine readable but not human readable output to the screen or a requires a blank DOS formatted fliser disk to be present in the flov disk drive and report to the disk which enables it to be imported by charting CAD database spr wordprocessing packages To generate a tag database report in ASCII format 1 Select Reporting Report Setup The Report Setup pop up appears 2 Click on the Format tab and select the format required for the report or load a previously saved setup When finished click on the OK button This tab form allows you to change the columns reported and their order from the default 3 Click on the Options tab and select the options required for the column separators report labels sort order and text string The options for dual tags and multi node tags do not apply to the DA System 4 Click on t
75. or disks have been lett ifthe drives Failure to do so may result in damage to the tapes or disks or to the drives The correct procedure for powering down the system is given below 1 Select File gt Shutdown 2 When the prompt Are you sure you wish to Shutdown the System appears click on Yes The shutdown procedure begins If you are using a tape system any tapes in the tape drives are automatically ejected 3 If necessary remove any diskettes from the floppy drive 4 When the message Press lt CTL gt lt ALT gt lt DEL gt to reboot your computer appears turn off the system power Note The correct sequence for powering down should be followed however in the event of an unexpected power loss no damage should result to the system No data previously recorded to tape or disk by the system will be lost 13 3 Preparing the System for Transportation The following steps should be taken to prepare the DA System for transportation between worksites Caution Before packing the DA System make sfire that no tapes of di Sks have been left in the drives Failure to do so may fesult iafdamage tothe tapes ofdisks or to the drives 1 Remove any data tapes or disks from the drives 2 Unplug all cables and connectors including the keyboard from the back of the system 3 Store the cables and the mouse or trackball in the monitor flight case The trackball should be placed in a padded bag before being stored in the fli
76. possible to delete single files from a tape however a tape or disk s entire contents can be erased see Appendix H and Appendix I The General Information Area in Playback Mode The General Information Area which lies near the bottom left of the display screen is shown in Figure 6 14 page 96 and Figure 6 15 page 97 There are two modes selected by the button in the bottom right hand corner of the area and they provides the information listed below for which ever window is selected on the tab bar See also Section 5 2 The General Information in Playback Mode 1 Dualvert 1 N Horiz t X Figure 6 14 The General Information Area in Playback Mode 1 e Position The position of either the fish or the vessel in either Lat Long or UTM appears at the top of the display and shows the position of the newest ping in the window see Section 96 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 6 3 A symbol of a fish or a vessel appear in the middle of the position to indicate the position reference point e date time the date and time at which the data was recorded The date is displayed as dd mm yy e Nav Sync A clock face displayed between date and time shows green when the navigation date is in sync and red when it is not e fish alt shows the distance of the towfish above the seabed when the data was acquired e heading shows the direction in which the vessel or towfish was heading when the data was acquired e line the line name wh
77. powered off Note If the Ultra 120 fails to work and using the power off on and reset buttons does not work there is a reset button hidden under the unit which must be pressed to get the printer working again Configure the Printer It is recommended that the printer manual is used in conjunction with the following instructions To print successfully from this device the printer must first be configured correctly before selecting the Ultra 120 195 or 200 printer from the DA System s list of available printers Configuring the printer is only necessary when first setting up the DA System and the Ultra printer or after a hard reset of the printer that is switching the power on while the ON LINE button is pressed The settings can then be saved for future use To prepare the printer the following steps are necessary e Put printer in Digital mode e Select the Centronics option e Place the printer in Run mode This is achieved as follows Power up the Ultra printer The following settings will be displayed as in Figure J 1 page 241 240 May 2001 for version 2 1 120 138 MODE ANALOG SBY TKUP ON Figure J 1 Ultra 120 Standard Display The first line of the display gives an indication of the printer mode the 120 138 MODE is a standard output to the display and will not change The description after the mode will be ANALOG or DIGITAL The second line contains details of the mode
78. s programs to run e g Unix Windows DOS a form of switch on the DA100 DA200 which selects one from a number of possible options where all the options except the one selected are hidden the pulse of sound energy which is reflected to form sonar images visible on recorded sonar data as the bright stripe at the beginning of each line additional coloured graphics which can be displayed on top of sonar data thesemay be switched on and off without affecting the displayed data record another set of data over the first making the first data set unrecoverable equivalent to lookup table a form of interface which allows a computer to interchange data with the outside world in parallel form that is passing all 8 bits of a byte simultaneously a form of error checking for each byte of data transferred for example through a serial or parallel port a collection of letters and numbers which uniquely allows access to a computer or a set of programs on a computer Peripheral Component Interconnect an advanced high speed bus system used by PC compatible computers Coda Technologies Pipeline Inspection system which allows complete pipeline surveys to be undertaken without the use of thermal recorders a single sonar scan resulting in a line of data being acquired PI100 the slant distance from the sonar transducer fish to the front of the pipe P1100 the angle made between the ensonified pipe the trans ducer and the
79. s software Most_users will not need to use this set of options for those who do Appendix A gives some detailed examples To view the incoming data on the channels selected click on the Play button in the Data Control Area When you press the Play button the Scale Display Data pop up appears on screen and can be used to optimise the display Note Make sure that all parameters are selected correctly as they determine howsthe data is recorded Incorrect parameters may reduce the quality of the data and the accuracy of auxiliary information such as position and fish height Acquiring Analogue Shallow Seismic Data The File Open Acquisition pop up selects data acquisition mode andyallows the acquisition parameters to be set Select the Analogue tab form to set up analogue acquisition Figure 5 3 page 48 This is the only menu that has a direct effect on the quality of digitised data therefore it is important to make sure that the correct options and values are selected e Active is used to select the channels to be digitised by the system A channel is selected by clicking on the on off switch beside its number Activating a channel changes its on off switch from grey to green and makes its parameters available for selection The parameters are unavailable greyed out for channels that are not active The default active channels are data channels and 2 for single trigger systems or 1 2 and 3 for the dual trigger systems e Trigger s
80. see Appendix H eject the tape ensuring it is labelled correctly and replace with a blank unprotecteds tape e This error message can also be caused by using a non DDS tape in DAT tape systems See Appendix H for details ofthe correct tape type to use Caution The status or the whitesprotect tab on the tapelmust not be changed while the tape is in the tape drive Doing so can leaddo damage to the tape or to the tape drive The system fails to display the Coda screen when first switched on e Ensure that the mouse or trackball is connectedito the correct port COM1 see Section 4 3 Fix number speed of sound and time date have spurious values when Coda nav format is used for the nav string e Make sure that the line name given to the Coda nav string contains no spaces Use for example underscore instead see Appendix B 192 May 2001 for version 2 1 0 xe Q Q lt x gt ee S Q 194 May 2001 for version 2 1 A Example Acquisition Setups Owing to the constraints of the A D hardware some combinations of acquisition settings which have been selected may not be configurable by the system If this is the case two warning pop ups will be displayed the first will warn you that the current settings are not possible and the second will tell you which particular setting is invalid Detailed descriptions of valid example acquisition setups can be found in Appendix A The constrain
81. seismic data in an along track direction The swell filter used is a configurable digital Butter worth band reject filter The Swell Filter Setup pop up is accessed from the Processing menu however the pop up can be accessed only if there is an active seismic channel The pop up is similar in look and feel to the Fish Height Settings pop up Channel 3 Swell Filter Source 4 None Keep Existing Value Playback Only wy Copy Swell Value From Other Channel From Channel tl s y Bottom Flattening sg Along Track Averaging Constant Altitude Compensation Az Swell Filter Copy Settings To Display Swell All Channels Filtered Data OK Apply Load Save Cancel Figure 7 20 Swell Filtering Setup Window The Channel tab forms are used to select which data channel or channels to apply the swell filter settings to None is the default setting and no swell filtering is performed The Keep Existing Value option can be selected only in playback mode and causes the previ ously recorded swell filtering to be used If however swell filtering was not used in recording mode then no swell filtering will take place Copy Swell Value From Other Channel allows the swell filter value to be copied from another channel using the option selection button Selecting the Bottom Flattening causes the system to assume that the seabed is completely flat It averages the bottom position over a number of pi
82. set to around 33 5ms but can be adjusted to ensure that the outgoing pulse of the starboard data channel is aligned with the beginning of the acquired data for the starboard channel This is because the delay for the first data channel is 0 but about half the sweep period for the second data channel The line reversed field will be set by default for the Port data channel as this channel is received backwards The line reversed field for the Starboard data channel is not set The range setting for both channels is 100m to ensure that the DA System can calculate measurements correctly in spite of the fact that the distance of a sample from the start of the line is not proportional to the speed of propagation of sound through water The trigger will be trigger A and is set to external The voltage range output by the Ultra is 0 5V so the DA System should be set to its 5V range Note As the Ultra produces output on a single composite channel the output analogue output of the Ultra should be connected to both H1 and CH2 BNC connectors Default Sidescan Setups The following table shows the settings used by the DA System system for a Standard Sidescan data channel True Range Slant Trigger Trigger Sample Samples m Range m Period Rate pings Frequency Channel msec per sec Hz 25 27 38 26 3 42 784 1536 50 54 74 135 35 654 2560 100 108 146 6 8 19 609 2816 150 162 218 4 6
83. signal level for a positive edge or just below the mean signal level for a negative edge 78 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 5 3 5 5 3 1 5 5 3 2 5 5 3 3 6 Ifthe water column is noisy enter Filter characteristics to enhance the signal 7 If the bottom lock is jittering apply enough Smoothing to compensate starting with a low level 8 Remember to use the Apply button to confirm the changes before dismissing the pop up Power Density 1 Set up is similar to Thresholding but Sensitivity not Threshold Value is applied in Tracking A high sensitivity will enable detection of faint bottom returns but will be more sensitive to noise 2 Use the Offset Bottom Position spin box to adjust the track to the beginning of the bottom return Edge Detection 1 This is very similar in application to Power Density but detects the largest edge rather than peak power in the search window Improving Bottom Tracking The systems described above are very versatile and with practice can be a very powerful tool to track automatically the bottom in a wide variety of conditions and circumstances If the bottom tracking line deviates from the true bottom position try one of the following 1 1 Redirect the automatic tracking using the Reset Bottom Position button or the key shortcut lt b gt 2 If the bottom tracking is persistently positioned ABOVE the true bottom position REDUCE the automatic tracking Sensitivity or use Offset Bo
84. slantrange correction 112 Smoothing 72 software copying update package 169 installing update 167 restoring previous version 168 Starting playback on a local disk 86 Static Limits 70 Status Bar 30 Store button 26 Sub Bottom Profiling 74 Sub bottom profiling 79 sub bottom velocity changing the value 121 sub sampling 105 survey data displaying 131 Swell Filter Hints 123 swell filtering 118 displaying swell filtered data 118 switches See particular switches System Maintenance and Testing 165 T tab forms 25 X pu Index tag database files deleting from the hard disk 152 loading files from tape 147 managing tag files 145 saving tag files to tape 146 tag database reports generating reports 153 using a corrected nav data file 157 tag files managing optical system copying to from disk 151 database location 151 deleting files 152 rescanning directo ry 152 selecting files 151 unmounting disks 152 managing tape system database location 146 161 deleting files 150 listing batches 149 loading batches 149 rescanning directo ry 150 saving batches to tape 148 selecting files 147 tagging 143 tags annotating 145 creating see adding deleting 144 deselecting 144 displaying 125 143 fast tag setup 145 inserting 145 moving 144 replaying 145 selecting 144 tags setup 145 tape control buttons Fast Forward Cue 80 96 Goto 80 93 Pause 80 93 Play 79 93 Record 79 Rewind Review 80 96 Stop 79 93
85. sub menu ash va eu fuisn Erase Tape tape system Note Before selecting this item make sure that the tape drives are not in operation If you are unsure about the status of the tape drives but wish to continue with maintenance restart the DA System by selecting Restart from the File menu This menu item enables you to erase tapes and is only available for tape systems Do not attempt to do this if the data on the tape is valuable as ALL data will be lost Write protected tapes cannot be erased When this item is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly a prompt appears asking for the number of the tape drive from which the tape is to be erased Which tape device do yowwish to use when erasing default 1 1 2 Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt A prompt asks for the tape that is to be erased to be inserted into tape drive 1 Insert the tape intoTape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt A prompt appears asking for confirmation Are you sure you want to erase the tape in Tape Drive 1 default n y n Press lt y gt to erase all the data on the tape Backup Setup Files This menu item is used to store to tape all of the setup files for example tag setup files When Backup Setup Files is selected the systemasks for the install password If the password i
86. tag file system full appears this indicates that the DA System file system hard disk is full and that it is not possible to add more tags to the tag database To cure this use the Tag Management item in the Tagging menu to delete some of the tag files on the system see Section 10 9 This error will only occur if there are either a very large number of tag files on the system a very large number of navigation correction files on the system or the tag files on the system are very large Problems loading Corrected Nav files e The file system may be full See the comments under Problems saving tags above No tapes detected for playing error 190 May 2001 for version 2 1 e The DA System system has been unable to find any tape devices on the SCSI bus and will be unable to playback or record data If this message appears contact Coda Technol ogies Technical Support in Section 16 2 Unauthorised Software Contact Coda Technologies Ltd e The copy protection mechanism has detected that the software being used is not an authorised copy If having first rebooted the machine and attempted to restart this warning continues to appear and the software was obtained from Coda Technologies or their recognised agents contact them for rectification of this problem e Ensure that the Coda system is NOT connected to a printer which is powered off Unrecoverable medium error This error may appear if a sequence ta
87. the default setting Clicking on the Factory button restores the source disk drive to Optical 1 and the target disk drive to Optical 2 162 May 2001 for version 2 1 maximum value Data files are copied fi s navigation files corrected nav files report files and proj To copy an optical disk 1 Select File Copy Media The Copy Media pop up appears 2 Select the source disk drive and the Files can be copied to Hard Disk 3 Click on the OK button The Store action button at the bottom of the pop up gives you the option of storing the c selected source and target disk drives as the default setting Clicking on the Fac restores the source disk drive to Optical 1 and the target disk drive to Optical 2 May 2001 for version 2 1 163 164 May 2001 for version 2 1 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 1 3 12 1 4 12 2 System Maintenance and Testing Off line Testing When mobilising the DA System on board a vessel it may be useful to carry out some or all of the off line tests described below they allow the system to be checked for sane operation without the use of external inputs from sidescan units or navigation computers A minimal amount of equipment is needed to carry out these tests The flow chart below indicates the recommended order for completing the off line tests Test Incoming Data Using A D Internal Triggering Set upithe DA System for acquisition using the internal trig
88. the following e Select Tagging Add Tag Node s The ARROW pointer changes to a PENCIL pointer which indicates that the system is in add mode Move the pointer to the required part of the display screen and click with the left mouse button This marks the event with an Unknown tag an orange box Repeat the procedure as often as required When you have finished or when you want to change to select mode so that you can delete or move a tag select Tagging Add Tag Node s again This switches off add mode and the pointer reverts to the arrow type e Move the pointer to the required part of the display screen and click the right mouse button a much faster method of creating tags Tags can also be added without the use of the Tagging menu by positioning the mouse pointer as required in the display area and pressing the right mouse button Selecting and Deselecting Tags A tag must be selected and made the current tag before it can be moved or deleted e To select a tag click on it with the left mouse button The selected tag flashes between orange and light blue and the pointer changes from a PENCIL to an ARROW which indicates that the system is in select mode The selected tag can then be moved or deleted e To deselect a tag click on it with the left mouse button or click on another tag The tag stops flashing and is no longer the current tag it must be reselected before it can be moved or deleted The current tag ca
89. the system It should only be used to turn off the system after the system has been shut down correctly Reset switch Do not use this switch unless the DA System has been shut down correctly it can then be used to turn on the system again System cooling fans The DA System has two system cooling fans It may be worth checking occasionally to see if dust has built up on the grill in front of the fans which might impair performance If the grill needs cleaning remove the two screws from the front of the grill pull off the grill and remove any dust or dirt When you have done that put back the grill and secure it in position with the two screws Tape Drives Figure 4 1 this page shows the front panel of a 4mm DAT tape drive In a twin tape system upper tape drive unit is Tape 1 The units usually have two LEDs one green and one amber though 8mm Exabyte tape units have three The left hand green LED should flash periodically when data is being recorded or played May 2001 for version 2 1 37 back from tape The right hand amber LED should not come on during normal operation and indicates a fault status See Appendix H for further information on interpreting the DAT drive LED display and for information on interpreting the LEDs of 8mm Exabyte tape units 4 1 1 2 Magneto Optical Disk Drives Shutter Door Eject Disk Button Figure 4 2 Close up of Magneto Optical Disk Figure 4 2 this page shows the front panel of
90. the type of filter the range of samples over which the filter is to be applied and the filter s parameters When you have selected the type of filter you can select a range of samples over which the filter is to be applied and the filter s design parameters respectively To use frequency filtering 1 Select Processing Time Varying Filtering or click on the Setup TVF Functionality icon The Time Varying Filtering pop up appears 2 Click on the input channel that you wish to apply the filter to 3 Click on Filter 1 tab 4 Click on the Filter Active toggle This sensitises the rest of the tab form 5 If required click on the Continuously Time Varying Filter button This Option is available only with low pass filtering and high pass filtering 6 Select a type of filter LP HP3BP BS or ZAP The contents of the Frequency Design Parameters 3dB Hz box change according to the filter type selected 7 Select which part ofthe ping you want the filter to apply to for example from Sensor to Seabed If seabed is selected you must ensure that a valid bottom position is available to the system 8 Specify cut off frequencies and filter order for the filter type specified 9 Repeat steps 3 to 8 for the number of filters you require for that channel The maximum number of filters per channel is four 10 Repeat steps 2 to 8 for every input channel 11 Click on the OK or Apply button The input channel tab and the filter
91. the update is from optical disk similar messages and prompts appear When Copy Update Package is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly a prompt appears asking for the source update tape to be inserted into the tape drive Which tape device do youwish to copy from default 1 1 2 Insert the update tape into the tape drive Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt Insert a cartridge into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt to continue The system informs you that the update package is being transferred Transferring lt UdpToCurr gt Package instance to lt Viome instal spool gt in file system format The package details then appear on screen Insert the target update tape into a tape drive NOW then press any key to continue Insert a blank tape into the tape drive Which tape drive do you wish to copy to default 1 1 2 Select the tape drive to be used to copy the tape to and press lt Return gt The following message appears on screen Insert a cartridge into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt The system transfers the package to the drive specified and exits when it has finished Change IP Address This menu item is used to change the IP address of the system
92. to a specific point in the data using one of the options explained below 6 7 4 1 Goto to a Position on a File or Tape A file is defined bythe beginning and end of data recording sessions If you are using the optical disk system only the firsttwo options are available the other four options are greyed out e Beginning of File moves the tape or disk to the start of the current recording session End of File moves the tape or disk to the end of the current recording session e Next File moves the tape to the start of the next recording session e Previous File moves the tape to the start of the previous recording session e Beginning of Tape rewinds the tape to the beginning e Start of Blank Tape moves the tape to the end of the last recorded data block Data can then be written to a blank section of tape assuming the tape is not write protected during the next recording session 6 7 4 2 Goto to a Specific Tag e Next Tag finds the next tag in the recording session The tape or diskmoves to a point about 4 seconds before the time the next tag will appear at the top of the screen This is to ensure that the tag is visible in the first full screen of data after the goto command If the tag is within 4 seconds of being displayed when the command is used or if the tag is already visible on screen the message Next tag is just off screen appears and no goto is performed e Next Tag Node moves the tape or disk to the next tag n
93. top of the pop up If an asterisk appears beside the name it means that the settings have changed from those saved to disk Changing Sub bottom Velocity The Settings Sub Bottom Parameters Popup is used to change the sound velocity for measurement in sub bottom data When using a sub bottom profiler it is important to have an accurate prediction of the speed of sound in the seabed medium otherwise on screen distance measurements will be in error You can change the default value 1600m s using the Settings menu Sub Bottom Parameters Setup Average Sub Bottom Velocity 1600 0 Km mis Sub Bottom Velocity OK Apply Store Factory Cancel Figure 7 23 TheSub Bottom Sound Velocity Pop up Window Note In calculations this velocity is used throughout the ping including the water column Trace Mixing and Anti Mixing Trace mixing of shallow seismic data either enhances or removes features with a strong along track trend by averaging the raw data in neighbouring pings It has two modes mixing mode also known as stacking which enhances features which persist between neighbouring pings and anti mixing mode also known as anti stacking which removes features such as noise You can control the extent of mixing or anti mixing The trace mixing option mixes the signal amplitudes from neighbouring pings of data that is trace mixing also known as stacking performs along track smoothing Choosing this option
94. used from either side of the input trace hence a fold of three uses the input trace and those traces immediately before and after it With mixing mode and fold set the weighting coefficients are determined by the trace mix run off This value is defined as the absolute difference in value between two neighbouring coefficients Hence for a fold of 3 and a run off of 0 25 the weighting coefficients are 0 5 and 0 25 respectively The Channel tab forms can be used to setthe parameters for each channel The action buttons at the bottom of the pop up can be used to Load previous settings or the Save current settings This processing is only applied to the displayed data The data being recorded or replayed is not affected by trace mixing 7 8 5 Seismic TVG TVG can be used for seismic data to amplify the return of a signal with depth The sub bottom will tend to attenuate the signal much more than the water column so itmay be necessary to use a higher maximum gain setting than you would normally use for sidescam data The geophysicist is normally only interested in sub bottom features so the Apply TVG from Seabed option is a useful feature to avoid having to amplify noise in the water column Depending on the quality of your data it may not be appropriate to use the Auto TVG function Strong multiples or horizons can result in an Auto TVG function that can make the image appear banded It is best to experiment and if the results are not as expect
95. using a local frame of reference for example time or distance measurements as an offset from the current time or distance see also absolute the level of detail which may be extracted from a set of data Remotely Operated Towed Vehicle Subsea vehicle on which a sidescan sonar or sub bottom profiler may be mounted an international standard for the interchange of serial data between computers to convert analogue data to digital form it is necessary to measure its amplitude at regular intervals this is known as sampling the signal the frequency at which an analogue waveform is sampled to allow it to be converted to digital form of colours the depth of a given tint or shade producing an image of the screen display and either printing it or saving it to disk the means by which all the items in a list appearing in a menu or pop up window may be examined moving gradually up or down the display one line of data must move out of the bottom of the display for every new line which appears at the top Small Computer SystemsInterface version 2 an improved version of the SCSI standard for connection of peripheral devices such as tape drives disks and scanners to computers Sonar Data Exchange Format sonar interchange format devel oped by Meridian Sciences and US Geological Survey Society of Exploration Geophysicists Y format obsolescent standard for seismic and sonar data storage using vibrations to obtain an unders
96. using the time that the recording session started Tag files tend to be very large so they are stored on tape or disk as used for sonar data storage We strongly advise you to have a strict set of procedures for recording sonar data and tag database files For example for a dual drive system we recommend that Tape 1 or Optical 1 is used to record data whereas Tape 2 or Optical 2 is used to store database tag files using the procedure listed below If a large amount of data is produced by Trackplot Mosaic or Corrected Nav the hard disk file will eventually become full A pop up warning will appear warning you that your system is running short of free disk space If this warning appears the hard disk needs to be cleared either by backing up data to DAT or MO drives and then deleting the files from the hard disk or by deleting the files without backing them up Data which is deleted without backing up will be lost 10 9 2 Manage Tag Files on a Tape System The Manage Tag Files menu item allows you to organise the many tag files which are created during a survey If you are using a tape system selecting this menu item produces the Tag Database Management pop up shown in Figure 10 2 this page If you are using an optical disk system see Section 10 9 3 Tag Database Management lt default gt Database Location Hard Disk Tag Files 41197 144708 LX Tape LoadiSave 51197 121949 Delete 51197 122742 51197 12452
97. you information about the data under the current pointer position Moving the pointer around the Data Display Area will cause the pop up to be updated in real time The values displayed are the current Ping Number the Time of the ping in UTC and date time format the Sample Number within the ping and the Intensity expressed as a percentage of the full scale value FSV of the analogue input in addition to True Range and Fish Height both in metres May 2001 for version 2 1 133 Using the DA System 8 10 Nav Data QC Raw Easting Raw Northing Nav date Nav time Raw Kp Raw Heading Raw DCCim SMG mis Water Depth m Fish Height cm Pitch 9 Roll 9 Yaw Heave m Layback m E 05286313 28 N 00881470 07 02 11 00 10 51 21 52 610 29 92 15 90 6 47 155 88 17 33 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 00 1490 23 RPTG 997 2308 UTC UTM Close Figure 8 11 The Nav Parameters QC Pop up Window Speed of Sound m s Line Name Fix No Time Basis Nav Basis This option can be selected when testing the navigation input with a new RS 232 navigation string or when checking that navigation equipment is delivering a correctly formatted navigation string see Section 5 4 2 8 11 General Information Area m gt Figure 8 12 The General Information Area e ule The General Information Area see Figure 8 12 this page lies near the bottom left of the
98. you press the Play button the Scale Display Data pop up appears on screen and can be used to optimise the display Note Make sure that all parameters are selected correctly as they determine how the data is recorded Incorrect parameters may reduce the quality of the data and the accuracy of auxiliary information such as position and fish height Other Channels When Other is selected there is no valid Sonar Type Do not use this setting except for signals which you do not wish to view on the scrolling display May 2001 for version 2 1 51 Wo s S va eu usn Using the DA System 5 2 2 Acquiring Data from a Digital Sonar 5 2 2 1 Edgetech DF1000 Dist N Dit O Edgetech DF1000 or Bom y ka ml This option should only be selected if the user wishes to perform diagnostics with the DCI card r Figure 5 4 The Digital Tab Form of the Open Acquisition Window Do o the setup for an Edgetech DF1000 towfish Figure 5 4 this page shows the Open Acquisition Digital Tab Form for an gt Fach DF1000 digital towfish First select the Sonar Range for which the date willbe ected This is the true range foreach channel or swathe over which the sonar will collect data The available ranges are 25m amp 75m 100m 150m 200m 300m 400m and 600m The channel selection option gives the choice of frequencies to be acquired by the fishy Each channel can operate at either 100kHz or 500kHz It is possible to gather data for all
99. 0 51197 124924 1197 130116 70695 162816 51197 124024 Rescan Free Disk Space 997 164 MB OK Store Factory Figure 10 2 Tag Database Management Pop up Window DA System automatically names tag files according to the date and time when recording data began that is ddmmyy hhmmss The file system layout for DA System is discussed in Section 14 The Database Location option button allows you to select the drive on which to locate the tag files you wish to save load or delete only Hard Disk is currently available 146 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 9 2 1 10 9 2 2 When the Tag Database Management pop up is opened the default tag file selection is the current tag file and this is the file highlighted on the list The scroll bar can be used to move up or down the list of Tag Files A tag file can be selected by clicking on it with the left mouse button To make a multiple selection either press and drag the pointer to highlight adjacent files or hold down lt Control gt while clicking on specific file name The pop up also displays the amount of space available on the hard disk Each tag database entry uses about 2KB of file space The Store and Factory buttons currently have no function in the tape system Saving Tag Files to Tape Use the following procedure to save tag database files that are on the hard drive to tape l Load a blank tag file tape intoTape 2 or the tape drive to which the sonar data
100. 0 Raw Heading 23 58 Raw DCC m 7 96 SMG mis 3 39 Water Depth m 161 50 Fish Height mx 12 01 Pitch 0 00 Roll 9 0 00 vaw 0 00 Heave m 0 Layback m 0 00 Speed of Sound m s 1491 93 Line Name RPTG 997 Fix No 2307 Time Basis UTC Nav Basis UTM Done Figure 5 17 The Nav QC Pop up Window e Ifthe data being read in from the serial port by the DA System is not recognisable as the data sent by the navigation system the serial port setup is incorrect The parity number of data bits number of stop bits handshaking and baud rate for the navigation interface may all be changed using the Serial Setup item in the Raw Nav Input pop up The hardware specifi cation for the RS 232 navigation interface is given in Section 14 e Ifthe data displayed in this window matches that sent by the navigation system the data is being passed through the RS 232 port but it is being interpreted incorrectly The problem is likely to be caused by an incorrect navigation format being selected in the Raw Nav Input pop up If the wrong format has been selected from the list of navigation library entries make another selection from the list if the incoming format is not compatible with any of the navigation library entries then a new navigation library entry is required Edit Nav Format can be selected to add a new navigation library entry or to rectify faults in an existing one Full details of the syntax for library entries
101. 00 a point in the data which the user wishes to mark using a database entry 8mm magnetic tape drive unit based on 8mm video tape technol ogy used for storage of digital computer data DA100 DA200 a TTL trigger which originates outwith the DA100 DA200 used by the system to initiate the acquisition for each ping PI100 GeoKit colour coded keys for accelerated marking of events during pipeline inspection file filtering first return fish fish height fix fix tag floppy disk flow chart flow control forced measure full resolution gamma gamma correction GB General Information Area GeoKit goto GPS graphical user interface greyed out greyscale a set of data which exists as a distinct entity on tape file extents are defined by end of file markers on disk they are defined by the operating system the alteration of the frequency content of a signal usually the removal of unwanted noise frequencies in sonar data the first echo which rises above the noise level of the water column the first point of contact of the outgoing pulse with the seabed abbreviation for towfish P1100 the true height of the sonar transducer fish above the seabed a reference point in time and space for navigation purposes the database entry for a given fix see also tag portable magnetic media Usually refers to 3 inch double sided high density disks with a capacity of 1 44MB formatted m
102. 1 To help to spot such problems during mobilisation we have created a checklist which will ensure that when you arrive on site you re ready to collect the data of the best possible quality This checklist is presented in Part VI and should be followed for every mobilisation The key issues dealt with in the mobilisation checklist include Ensuring that each item of equipment the DA system will be connected to is fully operational e Checking that the sonar data can be acquired correctly with satisfactory noise performance e Checking the correct operation and updating of online navigation e Checking that the system records correctly and that enough disks or tapes are available to complete the survey High Quality Data Step 2 Data Acquisition Figure 5 2 The Open Acquisition Pop up Window showing the Channels Tal Triggering Analogue Data Acquisition Select File Open Acquisition to bring up the Acquisition Setup popup then select the Analogue tab and the Triggers tab to show the trigger setup window Figure 5 3 page 48 The DA200 System has two independent triggers which can be set to either internal or external while other Coda acquisition systems have a single internal or external trigger An external trigger is one which is derived from another piece of equipment a sub bottom profiler or sidescan sonar for example The internal trigger can be used when no external trigger is available or if the DA System is to be us
103. 1024 2048 3072 or 4096 samples e The required sample frequency is at least 40KHz so that would imply that at least 40000 0 D 4000 samples would be required Therefore use 4096 samples per line e Allow a dead time of at least 2ms before each trigger No start delay or line reversal is required Range will be on Auto unused by Seismic type data in any case The trigger will be trigger A The trigger setup is straightforward an internal trigger with a period of 0 1 seconds is required The voltage range selected will depend on the magnitude of the incoming signal in this instance a signal which varies between 1 25 and 1 25 volts is assumed 204 May 2001 for version 2 1 A 3 3 Approximate Sound Velocities Table As mentioned earlier the sweep time determines the range of the shallow seismic sonar system For convenience the following table can be used to convert between sweep time in seconds and range in depth m A 3 4 The range of the shallow seismic profiler is defined in terms of seconds rather than depth Some rough calculations can convert this time to depth for different seabed types as follows Material Velocity of Sound approximate Clay 1600 Soft Mud 1500 Rock 1800 Gravel 1700 For example sound travels through soft mud at a rate of 1500ms so in 25ms it must be reflected and travel back to the rec iver it would travel a distance of 0 25 x 1500 37 5met
104. 10m and the true range is 100m then the slant range required by Pythagoras will be 11100 10 100 500m Thus the towing altitude and the desired true range are used to define the slant range which the user can control by altering the number of samples per ping and the sampling frequency 2 and 3 above Note that changing the towing altitude fora given slant range will affect the true range to some extent raising the towfish decreases the true range When automatically deriving the slant range and thereby sampling frequency and number of samples per line the DA System assumes a towing altitude of up to 40 of the true range This has the effect that if the fish is at 10 of the true range the actual true range obtained is greater than the required true range For example a minimum true range of 100m gt 40m maximum towing height So the required slant range 1002 402 107 7m If the actual towing altitude is 10m with a slant range of 107 7m the actual true range of swathe data 107 72 102 107 2m Example Sidescan Setups Typical Sidescan Sonar 50m True Range Requirement The DA System is required to digitise the two analogue channels of data Port and Starboard from a sidescan sonar operating at a true range of 50 metres An external trigger is to be used Explanation Two channels 1 and 2 in this case will be active and will be labelled Sidescan Port and Sidescan Starboard The sample frequency is dete
105. 16 2 The Key Shortcuts Pop up Wi allows span heights to be measured when usi position the pointer in the display area if it is not there already and then press the a key or keys May 2001 for version 2 1 187 16 1 2 Technical Support provides brief details for contacting Coda s Technical service can be found in Technical Support inside the 6 ected to pop up a window describing the modules em These are also listed on the inside of the back cover of this Selecting this item from dow providing contact information for Coda Technologies 16 1 5 DA System Version Selecting this menu item pops up a window lis the DA System 16 2 24 Hour Technical Support Coda Technologies operates a 24 hour telephone support service for users with techni or problems Should you need to use this service call one of the numbers below calls are diverted to mobile phones to ensure a swift response USA tel I 888 340 CODA Rest of the World tel 44 131 553 7003 When you call please have the following information available 1 Your contact telephone and fax number 2 The Coda system serial number This is stamped on the tamper proof label at the rear of the DA System 3 The version of the software currently running on your DA System This is listed in the Help menu under DA System Version see Section 16 1 3 Your call will be logged and allocated a technical support reference number which you should not
106. 20m DDS2 tape stores twice as much data 4GB as a 90m DDS tape 2GB When recording two channels of sidescan data a 120m tape will last for at least 8 hours a 90m tape will last for a minimum of 4 hours The system is unable to read from or write to non DDS tapes DATMtapes which have been recorded using instrument recorders for example TEAC and Sony recorders cannot be replayed directly using the DA System These tapes have not been recorded in a computer compatible digital format and must be re digitised to replay them using the DA System The instrument recorder outputs can be connected to the BNC input channels on the DA System see Section 4 1 2 However navigation information will inevi tably be missing resulting in many of the on screen measurement and location functions being unavailable e As with all other types of magnetic tape it is recommended that DAT tapes are passed completely through the tape drive once a year to prevent sticking Exabyte Eliant820 8mm Tape Units Head Cleaning The tape drive should becleaned regularly When the tape drive needs cleaning the top amber and bottom green LEDs flash As soon as posible after the LEDs start flashing the tape drive should be cleaned using an approved Exabyte cleaning cartridge cartridges for 8mm video recorders are unsuitable LED Interpretation The tape drive uses three LEDs to indicate its status The top amber LED flashes when the tape drive has an erro
107. 3 2808 metres Mod Survey Feet 0 3048 122530 3 2807 metres Clarkes Survey Foot 0 3047972651 3 2809 metres Indian Survey Feet 0 3047876058 3 2810 metres Conversion factors for the nautical mile and hence for the knot are based on the Interna tional Nautical Mile Temperature Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion Centigrade Celsius Fahrenheit ii cox 32 F 32 x2 5 9 Time Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion GMT date amp time see Appendix C see Appendix C UTC seconds UTC seconds see Appendix C see Appendix C GMT date amp time 264 May 2001 for version 2 1 Velocity Speed Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion knots 1 688 0 5925 feet per second knots 30 87 0 0324 metres per minute knots 0 5145 1 944 metres per second knots 1 1508 0 869 miles stat per hour metres per minute 3 281 0 3048 feet per minute metres penminute 0 06 16 67 kilometres per hour miles per hour 0 4469 2 2374 metres per second miles per hour 88 1 136 x 102 feet per minute miles per hour 1 609 0 6214 kilometres per hour Nautical miles per hour Weight Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion kilogram
108. 4 JF Filter Active Filter Type 4 VN 5 amp SE a f 3 1 Continuously Time Varying Filter VIBE Daa vu vive Ac Apply Filter Limits From To gt Sensor 4 End of Data al al a Seabed 0 0 m vy Seabed po ms v Time 0 0 ms v Time 30 0 ms m Frequency Design Parameters 3 dB Hz Zefa es oe 24 al Vises Cut Off fe 14 p 2 RE te Filter Order 4 Figure 7 14 Low Pass Filtering e LP Low pass filtering removes high frequency information from the data You can specify both the cut off frequency in Hertz and the order of the filter The cut off frequency defines the 3dB point at which frequencies in the data start to become significantly attenuated The cut off frequency must always be less than half of the sample frequency of the input the Nyquist frequency If too high a cut off frequency is selected a warning message appears giving the maximum frequency that can be used The order of the filter governs the rate of attenuation of the filter after the cut off frequency that is the roll off rate A higher order gives a steeper roll off rate The maximum allowable filter order is four A low pass filter can be continuously varying with time Figure 7 14 this page shows the Data Display Area with the Low Pass Filtering pop up window settings for the data displayed on the screen The bottom half of the display shows data
109. 4 27 61 157 244 14 888 14 510 21 21 RPT6 997 00230 copa 5286052 31 881011 40 63 95 27 71 157 698 15 820 13 916 21 10 RPT6 997 00230 Coda 5286054 21 881013 36 63 93 27 00 160 733 13 920 12 947 22 36 RPT6 997 00230 156 946 to allow data to scrolling data though Select the Nav Input Format by scrolling through the list of formats available The format chosen should match that of the navigation data which will be input to the DA System The list may be scrolled to allow those items off the bottom or top of the display window to be seen Edit should be selected if the format you need is not in the list and a new navigation library entry is required description of the format for navigation data is given in Appendix B To check that the navigation variables are being updated and what their current values are click on the Nav input on button the Apply button and then the Nav QC This option can be selected when testing the navigation input with a new RS 232 navigation string or when checking that navigation equipment is delivering a correctly formatted navigation string If May 2001 for version 2 1 63 the output of the Nav QC is unsatisfactory with variables updated incorrectly or not updated at all click on Nav input off and Apply and view the raw navigation data being delivered to the system see 5 4 1 Raw Easting E 05286285 56 Raw Northing N 00881394 75 Nav date 12 12 00 Nav time 18 21 39 Raw Kp 66 46
110. 7 eDA Using th 6 4 The default display window is a vertical scrolling dual channel display and the system will pick the most appropriate channels to play back In Figure 6 5 this page the system has picked Analogue Ch1 and Analogue Ch2 Starboard Sidescan channels This is indicated by the icon next to these channels showing a pair of spectacles Analogue Ch 3 Seismic is not selected indicated by its icon showing an open window To view more channels in another window simply click on the non displayed icon The system will open an appropriate window in the display In the above example clicking on the Analgue Ch3 Seismic icon would open a horizontal single channel window Setting Offset and Gain As the system acquires 12 bit data but must use 8 bits for display you must select which part of the data range to see The system offers a number of mechanisms for doing this see Section 7 butat this point all you need to do is ensure that the data looks correct without any fine tuning of the display To do this 1 Press the Play button in the Tape Disk controls area this has the same graphic as a Video or Tape recorder play button 2 In the window of interest choose Settings Scale Display Data The Scale Display Data pop up will appear it will automatically adjust the offset and gain applied to your data using different defaults for sidescan and shallow seismic data Click on Done in this pop up to dismiss it
111. 7 7 2 Eliminating Sonar Distortions Geometric factors can distort the sonar image for example in sidescan sonar the height of the sensor towfish from the seabed gives a slanted view of the seabed in seismic sonar the effect of swell on the sensor produces swell on the image There are two tools for eliminating these distor es tions slant range correction for sidescan sonar and swell filtering for seismic sonar 2 E Before applying these options make sure that the system has a valid bottom position otherwise p you will introduce further distortions You can display the bottom position line either by clicking gt a on Bottom Position Line in the Display menu or by clicking on the Display Bottom Position D button in the Fish Height Settings pop up see Section 5 5 The bottom position line can be displayed in either channel or both channels The settings can be stored by clicking on the Store button or reset to the factory defaults using on the Factory button 7 7 2 1 Slant Range Correction Slant range correction maps the incoming data samples to their actual across track range from the sonar transducer rather than their slant range It assumes that the seabed is flat and performs a geometric correction of the position of each incoming data sample placing it at the correct across track range from the transducer This has the effect of stretching the samples nearest the transducer as there are fewer samples per unit distanc
112. Analog Mode Display SBY Standby The printer is in standby and will not print data RUN Run The printer is ready to receive data TKUP Take Up ON OFF When ON the paper will be wound onto a takeup roller A typical Digital mode display is shown in Figure J 2 this page 120 138 MODE DIGITAL 232 200 SBY L R Figure J 2 Typical Ultra Printer Digital Mode Display The display in Figure J 2 thisspage represents Interface Lines per Inch Standby Run L R Takeup These settings are described in the following table Digital Mode Display 232 Interface 232 CEN Either RS232 or Centronics 200 Lines per Inch 100 150 200 Number of Lines per inch to be printed SBY Standby Run Whether in Standby or Run mode Start Stop printing L R Always Left and Right channel for digital T Takeup T or blank If T is present then roller will take up paper Changing to Digital Mode Place the printer in Digital Mode The first line of the display show the current mode of the printer If the mode shows Analog then put it into Digital mode by pressing lt CTRL RS232 ANALOG gt The printer will restart and will now be in digital mode The display will be similar to the following figure 120 138 MODE DIGITAL 232 200 SBY L R Figure J 3 Typical Display for Ultra Printer in Digital Mode May 2001 for version 2 1 241 saoipueddy Appendices Changing to Centronics Interface T
113. At the shell prompt type exit This will exit su mode 7 Now edit the ethernet txt file by typing usr bin textedit home bottom ethernet txt 8 The first line of this specifies the Coda host to connect to Enter this appropriately 9 The second line specifies the port to connect to Set this to 49999 10 Save this file and quit the editor 11 Reboot the MIDAS XSTAR Type shutdown 0 at the prompt you may need to su to do this At the boot prompt type boot You should now be able toping the Coda system from the MIDAS XSTAR You should also be able to output data using the ethernet option from the MIDAS Menu It is advisable to output raw data to the Coda sotthat the data is retained at its full resolution Note The ethernet output button must be clicked twice for data to be sent to the Coda system Networking to an Edgetech FSIU Interface System Both the Coda system and the FSIU system must have the same network address the first three entries in an IP address The simplest way to do this is to change the Coda system s IP address to the FSIU network as follows 1 Choose a free IP address and obtain the sub net mask on the FSIU s network 2 Select the Change IP Address option from the Coda system s Maintenance Menu and use this free IP address and sub net mask see Section 12 3 4 When finished your system will reboot 3 On the Network tab of the of the Acquisition pop up seeFigure 5 7 page 56 enter in Network
114. EG Y format tape Note that DAT tapes recorded on commercial DAT data recorders are not compatible with the DA System DAT tapes don t last as long as expected 10 hours for conventional sidescan e Check that 120m DDS2 DAT tapes are being used rather than 60m or 90m DDS DAT tapes Although a 90m tape is three quarters of the length of a 120m tape it has only half the capacity On screen measuring gives inconsistent unreliable results e Check that the system is using the correct fish altitude value by turning on the Bottom Position Line option in the Display menu see Section 6 5 e Check that the vessel speed and heading are correct by checking the Survey Data display in the Display menu see Section 8 8 e If there are problems with either of these in acquisition mode then there may be a problem in interpreting the navigation data coming into the DA System Slant Range Correction doesn t work correctly e Check that the system is using the correct fish altitude value by turning on the Bottom Position Line option in the Display menu see Section 5 5 Bottom tracking line not visible or in wrong place e Check the fish height value coming into the system by looking at the Survey Data window see Section 8 8 If this value is incorrect the incoming telemetry value from the navigation string is being read incorrectly or the automated bottom tracking has mistaken where the first bottom return is or a nonsensical value has
115. I Text l ASCII Number Binary Integer this defines whether the entry is ASCII text or value or a binary integer 212 May 2001 for version 2 1 width_entry Variable 0 9 0 9 0 9 lascii_string either the word variable to show that the field width is variable or the number of bytes in the field Binary fields may not be of variable length An ascii_string is a set of printable ASCII characters enclosed by quotes if it contains spaces for example CODA DATE An ascii_string is used to define the contents of a field as well as its width for example for the key field Offset and gain allow the conversion of the incoming values from one set of units to another e g conversion of speed made good from metres per second to knots The offset value in the value_entry is added to the incoming value this operation is defined only if the interpretation_entry contains is ASCII Number or Binary Integer it is permissible to set an offset value if the interpretation_entry contains ASCII Text but it will be ignored The gain entry is multiplied by the incoming data value before the offset is added again the operation is not defined for character strings but a gain entry for character strings is legal The list of value_field_names is given in the following table value_field_name Incoming Value Interpretation Units altitude altitude of towfish above seabed metres cable out length of cabl
116. IB Timeout frame enables the time out value used for communications between the DA System and the GPIB hardcopy device to be set The default is 3 seconds and is satisfactory for most devices If however printing to a device stops repeatedly with the error I O Operation Was Aborted the timeout value should be increased Valid values are 1 3 10 or 30 seconds Screen Dump The screen dump menu item allows the current waterfall display window either to be saved as an image to disk or printed out directly on a connected printer When the menu item is selected from the File menu the following pop up window appears 138 May 2001 for version 2 1 Image Format TIFF PostScript Colour Style gt Colour w Greyscale Dump To Hard Disk File Type Filter C momeicip 1 OOAmagest Fiter N 2 Delete lt Files 2 4 D Ey 3 CD J gt D RE File Name momerpt OOimagesd OK Store Factory Cancel Figure 9 3 The Screen Dump to Hard Disk Pop up Window gt TIFF PostScript Colour Style 4 Colour Az Greyscale Dump To Floppy Disk Insert a DSHD disk in drive A and enter a DOS filename and then press OK DOS Filename f Figure 9 4 The Screen Dump to Floppy Disk Popup Window Screen dumping must be carried out only in playback mode it should not be attempted in acqui sition mode because it may cause loss of data It is also a comparatively slow process
117. If the value entered is greater than the along track nyquist frequency a warning will appear inthe display There must be sufficient periodic swell in the search range for theysystem to detect a swell frequency If there is not the system will report that it cannot detect a swell frequency within the given range If Automatic Swell Filter fails try to specify a manual filter around the swell frequency For example a Low Cut Off of 0 1 Hz and a High Cut Off of 1 0 Hz will attempt to filter out frequencies in this range 1 second to 10 seconds period For deep water seismic operation it may not be feasible to use a frequency based approach as the effective nyquist frequency in the along track direction will be very low In this case the Along Track Averaging function may be more appropriate This function will smooth the data in the along track direction effectively performing a crude low pass filter May 2001 for version 2 1 123 124 May 2001 for version 2 1 8 8 1 8 1 1 8 2 8 3 General Display Tools Displaying Event marks Scale Lines and Fix Marks The DA System has an overlay plane which displays a set of coloured screen markings that indicate tag marks and fixes these markings are displayed over the sonar image without affecting the displayed data You can toggle the display on or off For details on tagging see Section 13 To display tags 1 Select the Display menu 2 Click on the Overla
118. Nav is set in the Clock Synchronisation but synchronisation has been lost then clock face in the General Information Area turns from green to red to indicate that the DA System s clock is not synchronised with the navigation data Note that the time displayed in the General Information Area may not match the current time on the navigation computer or GPS receiver This is because the time displayed in the GIA is the time for the ping at the top of the display if data has been buffered for any reason this ping will have a time somewhat later than the GPS or nav computer time If required click onthe Auto Fix Line tab and set the time interval between fix marks By default this setting is off and the DA System takes in fix marks via the navigation input For the DA System to generate fixmarks automatically select the Auto fix marks on toggle and set the timedinterval in seconds between the fix marks Fix marks are numbered from one by default but can be set to a preferred number as can the increment rate Fix marks are reset to one each time the navigation input is restarted The Nav position reference scrolling option list on the Nav String Decode tab allows you to select either Fish reference or Ship reference When Fish is selected the Coda system expects the position received over the nav stringsto be the towfish position and layback and offset settings in the Settings Parameters window have no effect When Ship is selected layback and c
119. No Go to Open Aquisition Play en back see Chapter 6 Initialise 5 Playback Yes Corrected Navigation Data No Set Up Display Sections 7 8 9 Advanced Interpretation Tool s w modules Geokit Pipeline Inspection P1100 TrackPlot Mosaic Report Section 10 10 Generation View Data Hardcopy Ouput to Printer Section 9 1 Screen Dump Section 9 2 to Printer Prepare for Transportation Figure 6 1 Flow Chart of DA System Operations 84 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 2 Playing Back Data Step 1 Starting Playback To play back data you must first put the system in playback mode This is done by selecting the Open Playback menu item You can then use the appropriate data controls and adjust the settings such as the speed of playback as required Note Playback mode cannot be started whilst a recording session is active The recording session should be stopped via the Recording Popup If previously in acquisition mode a confirmation prompt will appear when opening playback Clicking Yes will open playback and terminate the current acquisition session 6 2 1 Starting Playback on a Tape System 1 Insert a tape of previously recorded data into the tape drive Ima twin tape system the upper drive is Tape 1 the lower drive is Tape 2 Tape 1 Tape 2 m File Information Coda format version 1 21 Reopen Tape Line Name 0 7 6 95 16 34 20 K
120. OT be continuously varying with time Figure 7 16 this page shows the Data Display Area with the Band Pass Filtering pop up window settings for the data displayed on the screen The bottom half of the display shows data before low pass filtering was applied while the top half of the display shows the data with the illustrated Band Pass Filtering settings applied May 2001 for version 2 1 115 CODA DA200 Time Varying Filtering Channel 1 AChannel2 Channels N Channel 4 AMEA Fiter2 Fiter3 Filter 4 V Pr Filter Active Filter Type te vt LP vl het vil fy BP i ms A _ ZAP m Apply Filter Limits From To gt sensor gt End of Data v Seabed bo ms Seabed po ms Ar Time 0 0 ms ar Time foo ms r Frequency Design Parameters 3 dB Hz a 7 al i f al Low Cut Off 150 High Cut Off 400 mal Filter Order ing the DA em syst Us Viewing Range gt Input y Screen Figure 7 17 Band Stop Filtering e BS Band stop filtering suppresses a range of frequencies in the data The band stop filter is set up in much the same way as the band pass filter with two cut off frequencies and a filter order These cut offs must be less than the Nyquist frequency and the order of the filter must be between one and four inclusive A band stop filter CANNOT be continuously varying with time Figure 7 17 this page shows the Data Display Area with t
121. Project Document Type Coda Part Number Document ID Confidentiality PF CODA TECHNOLOGIES CODA DA System User Manual CODA DA System User Manual I Manuals DA System Version 2 04 DA System pdf General Distribution Distribution MASTER Author Date Summary Manual Version DKR 29 04 97 Document Created 1 00 IMM 14 09 98 Updated 2 00 DKR 17 03 99 Updated for software version 1 34 x 2 01 DKR 29 02 00 Updated for software version 1 40 2 02 DKR 21 11 00 Updated for software version 1 42 2 03 DKR 08 03 01 Updated for software version FSIU 2 04 DKR 14 05 01 Updated for software version 2 1 3 00 Approved for Release Date 14 May 2001 Approved for Release Date 14 May 2001 Document is For Information Only unless it has original signatures above Copyright Coda Technologies Ltd 2001 All Rights Reserved Printed in UK No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means graphic electronic electrical mechanical or chemical including photocopying recording in any medium taping by any computer or information storage and retrieval system etc without prior permissions in writing from Coda Technologies Ltd Coda Technologies Ltd Admiral House 29 30 Maritime Street Edinburgh EH6 6SE UK March 2001 Important Note to Users While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of all information
122. RES Update Warning 30 separator ASCII TEx key ASCII Text CODA easting ASCII Number variable 0 1 northing ASCII Number variable 0 1 kp ASCII Number Variable 0 1 dec ASCII Number Variable 0 1 depth ASCII Number Variable 0 1 altitude ASCII Number Variable 0 1 smg ASCII Number Variable 0 1 heading ASCII Number Variable 0 1 Line Name ASCII Text Variable 0 1 Fix Number ASCII Number Variable 0 1 Speed of Sound ASCII Number Variable 0 1 Data Age ASCII Number Variable 0 1 Nav Time ASCII Number Variable 0 1 Note time offsets in seconds for UTC these can be used as offsets for the Nav Time string e g Nav Time ASCII NUmber Variable 820368000 1 would add the offset to the seconds since start of year for 1996 00 00 00 1 1 96 820368000 00 00 00 1 1 97 851990400 00 00 00 1 1 98 883526400 00 00 00 1 1 99 915062400 00 00 00 1 1 2000 946598400 00 00 00 1 1 2001 978220800 218 May 2001 for version 2 1 Nav Termination Binary Integer 1 10 endnav May 2001 for version 2 1 219 220 May 2001 for version 2 1 E 1 Coda Data Information Table E Coda Data Format Summary The following data is stored along with the data from each ping by the DA System s
123. Reports Using a Corrected Nav Data File 157 10 10 2 Report Generation 158 8 May 2001 for version 2 1 11 12 13 Il 14 15 10 10 2 1 Printer Setup Window Making Backup Copies 11 1 Copy Media on a Tape System 11 2 Copy Media on an Optical Disk System System Maintenance and Testing 12 1 Off line Testing 12 1 1 Test Incoming Data Using A D Internal Triggering 12 1 2 Navigation Loopback 12 1 3 Record Playback 12 1 4 Off line Noise Test 12 2 The Title Bar Menu 12 2 L Start Nav Loopback Test 12 2 2 End Nav Loopback Test 1223 Restore 12 2 4 Minimise 12 2 5 Lower 12 2 6 Restart DAx00 12 3 The Maintenance Menu 12 3 1 Install Update 12 3 2 Restore Previous 12 3 3 Copy Update Package 12 3 4 Change IPAddress 12 3 5 Load Navigation Lib 12 3 6 Save NavigatiomLib 12 3 7 XTerminal 12 3 8 Toggle Video Resolution 12 3 9 Tape Menu 12 3 9 1 Erase Tape tape system 12 3 9 2 Backup Setup Files 12 3 9 3 Restore Setup Files 12 3 10 Optical Menu 12 3 10 1 Format Optical Disk 12 3 10 2 Repair Optical Disk 12 3 10 3 Unmount All Disks 12 3 10 4 Backup Setup Files 12 3 10 5 Restore Setup Files 12 3 11 Network Disk Menu 12 3 12 Make Clean 12 3 13 Change Time 12 3 14 Change Password 12 3 15 Screen Saver Option Powering Down amp Packing Up 13 1 Shutdown 13 2 Powering Down the System 13 3 Preparing the System for Transportation DA System Technical Details Technical Description of the DA System 14 1 DA System Hardware 14 2
124. Scan pop up see Section 8 7 The range of the window is set to the full input voltage range as selected in the acquisition parameters when in acquisition mode or to the range over which the signal was originally recorded when redisplayed in playback mode May 2001 for version 2 1 101 WaSAS va eu Buisn Using the DA System ul Shift Reset Auto Done Viewing Range Input wy Screen Apply To vy Left Fight 7 2 2 Figure 7 2 The Scale Display Data Pop up Window showing the Input Range Setting the Viewing Range to Input causes a blue rectangle to be displayed in the Scale Display Data window see Figure 7 2 this page This rectangle shows the current range of the DA Systemdisplay Without automatic scaling the rectangle is typically at the bottom of the range is very narrow and does not cover any of the input signal In this instance the data displayed to the screen is almost white To alter the effective range of the input data displayed to the screen use the Shift arrow keys on the screen to move the blue rectangle over to the bottom of the green oscilloscope trace Alternatively click on Auto and the rectangle shifts to cover the input signal When the DA System is started in either acquisition or playback modes the display data is scaled automatically as the data begins to scroll Auto scaling uses a statistical analysis of the energy of the signal to ensure that the display range coincides with the range of the imp
125. Selecting any of the options causes a pull down menu to appear this button selects and applies the settings or options selected and dismisses the pop up window from the screen an option selection menu with a specific user alterable value or parameter a general term applied to a window that automatically appears when a menu item or control function is selected it may be a text entry box in which you type your requirement or an area of information which requires no action on your part In this manual this phrase is abbreviated to pop up 32 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 8 3 9 press and position the pointer over an object press the left mouse button and hold it drag down while you drag the object to the desired position then release the mouse button If no button is specified the left button should be used pull down a pop up that appears directly beneath an option in the Menu Bar when that menu option is selected scroll bar the means by which all the items in a list appearing in a menu or pop up window may be examined select click the left mouse button on the appropriate item such as a menu item toggle or value selection select a click the left mouse button on a Menu Bar option and then release the menu item mouse button over an item in the pull down menu that appears below the Menu Bar option tab form a form that contains a number of related items of information or selections and has a labelled tab at the top
126. Setting Up Bottom Tracking 5 5 1 1 Fish Height Source Selection 5 5 1 2 Fish Height Source Method Properties 5 5 1 3 Fish Height Alarms 5 5 1 4 Fish Height Recomputed File 5 5 1 5 Fish Height Play Back Fish Height File 5 5 1 6 Fish Height Additional options 5 5 2 Setting Up Sub Bottom Profiling 5 5 2 1 Showing the Seabed Position 5 5 2 2 Setting Up Bottom Tracking 5 5 2 3 Automatic Tracking Hints Seismic 5 5 3 The Tape Disk Controls in Acquisition Mode 5 5 3 1 The Record Button 5 5 3 2 Play 5 5 3 3 Stop 5 5 3 4 Pause 5 5 3 5 Goto 5 5 3 6 Fast Forward Cue 5 5 3 7 Rewind Review 5 6 Tips for Recording High Quality Data 5 7 The Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 5 7 1 The Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 1 5 7 2 The Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 2 5 8 The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 5 8 1 The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 1 5 8 2 The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 2 Playing Back Survey Data 6 1 Summary of the Playback Procedure 6 2 Playing Back Data Step 1 Starting Playback 6 2 1 Starting Playback on a Tape System 6 2 2 Starting Playback on an Optical Disk System 6 2 3 Starting Playback on a Local Disk 6 3 Playing Back Data Step2 Viewing the Data 6 May 2001 for version 2 1 43 44 45 46 47 47 47 49 50 51 52 52 53 54 54 55 59 60 60 61 62 62 63 64 66 67 67 67 67 68 68 70 73 73 74 74 74 74 75 78 79
127. Six of the areas Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Data Display Area General Information Area and Data Control Area are identical for all Coda systems and software modules The Application Specific Area however changes according to the application being used The functions of all six areas in the DA System are explained in the following sections a Title Bar Display Settings Tagging Reporting Applications Processing File Menu Bar Tool Bar Data Display Area General Information Area Application Specific Area Status Bar Settings Button Data Control Area y Status Bar g Towfish Tape 1 File Information r 4 ra f m Line Name 4 E00000000 00 N 00000000 00 CODA 5 11 97 12 11 56 Kp 0 000 LLRA Fix Number 8370 miss 1 A Sidescan Port Channel 1 2 3 4 Coda 2 A Sidescan Starboard Left vvv Technologies 3 B Seismic Fight VY vov DA200 gt 6 il sense System started Figure 3 1 The Main Display in Playback Mode The Title Bar The DA System provides additional commands through its Title Bar menu You use this pull down menu when you want to test navigation loopback data change the size of the main display and restart the programme see Section 12 2 zl Figure 3 2 The DA System Title Bar The Menu Bar Figure 3 3 The Menu Bar May 2001 for version 2 1 21 uononpo u Introduction
128. Tape Copying pop up 161 Tape Drive Units 229 tape drive units Exabyte Eliant 820 231 HP C1533 C1599A 229 Tape Menu 171 tapes copying data tapes 161 erasing 171 recommended tapes 229 replaying data tapes 85 96 tape formats 227 tapes recommended brands 3 tear off menus 22 Technical Support 188 technical support 188 terminology commonly used terms 32 33 Text Window option reports 158 The Maintenance Menu 166 The Title Bar 21 The User Interface 21 time varying filtering 112 Title Bar 21 165 toggle video resolution 171 Tool Bar 22 trace mixing 121 Tracking 71 Trackplot Mosaic 22 triggers trigger input 183 trigger output 183 Triggers tab form 47 troubleshooting 189 TVG 103 U Ultra 120 195 or 200 Printer 240 Ultra Printer Changing to Centronics Interface 242 Ultra Printer Changing to Digital Mode 241 Ultra Printer Configure the Printer 240 Unmount button 152 Using Optical Media 234 UTC time offsets 209 Welcome 15 Window Polling 24 X X Terminal 170 Z zoom zooming on screen features 128 290
129. Values pop up 288 131 Measuring Setup pop up 129 Menu Bar 21 Menu Bar Options 23 menu features 24 25 menus See also particular menus detaching from Menu Bar 22 Message Window 29 Method Properties smoothing 72 Minimise command 166 mobilisation checklists for GeoKit PI100 253 255 for the DA200 251 253 for the PI100 255 for TrackPlot Mosaic 256 monitor output 184 Multi Windows Colour Coding 23 Multi Windows Window Polling 24 Multiple Windows Menu Bar options 23 Multiple Windows opening display 23 Mutiple Windows 22 N Nav Data QC 134 Nav Data Settings pop up 91 Nav Data Format of Incoming 63 nav loopback test 166 navigation input Nav Input Settings pop up 66 Navigation Input Setting Up 64 navigation library adding strings 211 examples 218 interpretation lists 212 loading 170 navigation groups 215 saving 170 Navigation Library Explained 215 Navigation Parameters Settings pop up 66 92 Network Disk Menu 173 Networking to Edgetech FSUI Interface System 55 Networking to Reson Seabat 8125 Interface 59 Noise Reduction 72 Numerical Text Field Spin Box 24 O Off line Testing 165 off line testing navigation loopback 165 of data using A D internal triggering 165 off line noise test 165 tape record playback 165 OK button 26 on off switch 24 one of selection switch 24 on line checklists loading tag files 257 saving tag files 257 Open Tape Playback pop up 85 Opening a Data Display Window
130. a file from the Files window Check the File Information window to make sure that you have the correct file and recorded channels Then click on the OK button Click on the Play button in the Data Control Area to view the selected channels If required select Processing Fish Height and configure the fish height If required select Settings Playback Speed and set the rate at which the system replays the data In the Seale Display Data pop up configure the display scale and range Do this either by clicking on the Auto button or by using the Shift and Scale arrow buttons to make adjust ments manually The blue band range of screen values should cover the green trace incoming data Setup thedisplay using the Processing menu options such as TVG Enhancement or Slant Range Correction and use the appropriate data control buttons such as Fast Forward or Goto 20 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 The User Interface Coda s systems use menus pop up windows text entry boxes icons key shortcuts and so on in a similar way to other windows applications If you are familiar with Microsoft Windows or the X Windows system you will immediately find the operation of Coda s systems familiar If you are not familiar with other windows applications you will find the main features and terms explained below The Main Display The main display has seven areas as shown in Figure 3 1 this page
131. a magneto optical disk The upper optical disk drive is referred to as Optical 1 Eject disk button This button hasino effect while the disk is still mounted To remove a cartridge from the drive first click on the Unmount button in the appropriate pop up and then press the eject button LEDs The left LED shows the media status and the right LED shows the status of the drive e Optical Disk Eject tool Some non Star optical disk drives have a small hole through which a manual ejection tool can be inserted to force ejection of the disk in the event of a problem with the drive This tool hangs with the system keys from a strap which is attached to one of the handles It may be used in the last resort to remove a cartridge which the drive has failed to eject However this should only be attempted after the system has been shut down Use only gentle pressure tosattempt to remove the disk as the ejection mechanism is easily damaged Star series optical drives can be manually ejected It is firstessential to make sure the power to your DA System is switched off Remove the rubber ejectbutton and turn the inside shaft counter clockwise with a flat bladed screwdriveruntil the disk is fully ejected 38 May 2001 for version 2 1 4 1 2 The Back Panel Input amp Output Triggers Analogue Input Com 1 PSU Cooling Fan Channels BNC Com 2 Network AC In to Monitor SCSI Socket Card Figure 4 3 The DA System Back Panel and Cable
132. a piece of elec tronic equipment to start a sequence of operations for example the digitisation of sonar data an icon which if selected causes a sequence of operations to take place on the interface for example the inversion of the display see corrected navigation data computer programs sound navigation and ranging the use of sound underwater to detect objects or make measurements the analogue signal output by a sonar processing and control unit for example EG amp G 260 which can be accepted as an analogue input by the DA 00 DA200 P1100 section of pipe that is unsupported by the seabed a function which smoothes the line of a graph through a number of points see trace mixing right see also port of RS 232 interfaces the number of bits following the data bits before the start of the next byfe transmission of ASCII data a collection of valid ASCII alphanumerical characters a low frequency sonar device for obtaining seismic information about the geology under the seabed the practice of missing out data samples at regular intervals allowing a signal to be represented by fewer samples the material which makes up the seabed or sub bottom the area of the seabed covered by a sidescan sonar trace a form which contains a number of related items of information or selections and has a labelled tab at the top As tab forms overlap the required tab form may have to be brought to the front of the pile by clicking
133. abase Management pop up shown in Figure 10 6 this page It allows you to organise the many tag files which are created during a survey DA System automatically names tag files according to the date and time when recording data began that is ddmmyy hhmmss The file system layout for DA System is discussed in Section 14 150 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 9 3 1 10 9 3 2 The Database Location option selection button displays the drive on which the tag files will be created A list of files on that drive is displayed in the Tag Files window It is also the drive from which files will be deleted and the source for files to be copied In Figure 10 6 this page Database Location is set to Optical 1 Clicking on the option button displays the other options available Optical 2 in a dual drive system and Hard Disk The Tag Files window displays all the tag files that appear on the selected database location A tag file can be selected by clicking on it with the left mouse button To make a multiple selection either press and drag the pointer to highlight adjacent files or hold down lt Control gt while clicking on specific file name The scroll bar can be used to move up or down the list The pop up also displays the amount of space available on the hard disk Each tag database entry uses about 2KB of file space The Store action button at the bottom of the pop up gives you the option of storing the currently selected database location as the
134. abilities of an S3 graphics card using 2MB or 4MB of video RAM Analogue data acquisition and A D conversion is handled by a high bandwidth A D converter which uses the ISA bus Ancillaries such as the RS 232 and parallel interfaces are available directly on the PC mother board System expansion is straightforward benefiting from the open architecture of the PC standard Ethernet or Token Ring interfaces are available as options and provide the capability of broad casting full resolution raw digitised data to the network with almost no CPU overhead The DA System may be supplied with either one or two 4mm DAT DDS2 or 8mm Exabyte SCSI tape units Both use high speed SCSI 2 interfaces and both DAT and Exabyte drives are capable of data rates up to 500Kbytes sec Or the systememay be supplied with either one or two Maxoptix optical disk drives They use high speed SCSI 2 interfaces and are capable of data rates of 2 4MB s The DA System system and keyboard are supplied in 4 and 1U 19in Rackmount chassis and drawer These are enclosed in a SU floating frame flight case The system comes with a choice of trackball or mouse A free standing 17in monitor is also supplied with flight case Operating System The DA System uses SCO UnixWare a vendor specific implementation of Unix System VR4 2 Unix is a true multi tasking operating system with real time extensions allowing pre emptive scheduling of real time processes It also has support for th
135. ad Cleaning Headicleaning should be carried out weekly if the system is being used continuously The tape drive indicates that head cleaning is necessary by low flashing of the right amber LED on the tape front panel as detailed below Only a DDS head cleaning cartridge should be used head cleaning cassettes for audio DAT recorders will not work The cleaning can be carried out at any time during the acquisition or playback process Inserting the head cleaning cartridge in the tape drive initiates the automatic head cleaning process When cleaning is completed the head cleaning cartridge is automatically ejected from the tape drive LED Interpretation The front panel of the tape unit hastwo LEDs the Tape LED left and the Clean Attention LED right The left hand green Tape LED shows tape activity as follows e Slow flashing green when the tape is being loaded or unloaded e Steady green when the tape is loaded e Fast flashing green during read write operations The right hand amber Clean Attention LED shows the following conditions e Slow flashing amber the Media Caution signal to indicate head cleaning necessary or that the tape cartridge is at the end of its useful life e Steady amber to indicate a hardware fault see Part IV Figure H 1 this page shows all the possible combinations for the LEDs Clean Tape Attention Meaning Key W Ac
136. ality data When acquisition has started it is worth examining the Scale Display Data oscilloscope trace to ensure that the voltage range is set appropriately No useful information is usually held in the outgoing pulse of sidescan sonar or sub bottom profilers the outgoing pulse may be clipped allowing a smaller input voltage range to be selected than would otherwise be the case For sidescan sonar Operations it is best not to finalise the input voltage range until the towfish is positioned at a typical survey altitude from the seabed so that the voltage range of the received signal can be assessed Description is used to select the source of the input data The description is changed by clicking on the option buttons for the active channels The options available are Sidescan Port SS Port Sidescan Starboard SS Stbd Seismic and Other Each sonar type has its own set of input fields Neighbouring sidescan channels which share the same trigger which are of the same sonar type for example standard sidescan and which are in the order SS Port followed by SS Starboard are linked and the word linked will be printed between the Active on off switches for the two channels This means that changes in one channel s true range are automatically copied to the other channel Sonar Type is used to set the type of input sonar The options available depend on the Description setting see above Setting Description to either
137. also want to change the recording from Coda format to another format This section describes how to make copies of data tapes and disks To make a copy of a data tape or disk you must have a dual drive DA System Note that when copying tapes or disks the raw navigation data is always copied regardless of the presence of corrected navigation data On a tape system you can select the format in which the target tape is to be copied that is you can copy a tape recorded in Coda SEG Y SDEF or Q MIPS compatible format onto another tape in any of these formats Bear in mind however that multi trigger data cannot be copied Coda format into other data formats and that copying from Coda format to another data ways results in loss of navigation information int to bear in mind If you choose to copy the target tape in Coda format the data is copied in the current version of Coda format This means that the target tape may be recorded in ersion than the source tape if the latter was also in Coda format ical disk systems only Coda format is available Figure 11 1 The Tape Copying Pop up Window The File Copy Media menu option allows you to make backup copies of data copy the data on tape to a different format however it is only possible if yo DA System a dual drive Note When copying tapes the raw navigation data is always copied regardle e presence of corrected navigation data You can reapply corrected navigati
138. and click the MIDDLE mouse button to paste the tag s number The tape or disk moves forwards or backwards to a point about 4 seconds before the tag will appear on screen so that the tag is visible in the first full screen of data after the goto command e Anomaly ID can be used as an alternative to Tag Node ID but moves the tape or disk forwards or b ackwards to a specific anomaly Goto a Specific Time Sometimes particular points of interest in the data may not have a tag associated with them in me Enter an absolute time as a 24 hour clock value by typing six digits without punctuation in the box for example type 053400 to search for the time of 05 34 00 This command is restricted to times in the same day as the current time on the data being replayed For example at 23 35 57 you cannot goto 01 13 00 on the following day the system would search for 01 13 00 on the same day probably resulting in a failure of the goto command Enter a relative time by prefixing the time with or without punctuation for example type 031712 to move 3 hours 17 minutes and 12 seconds ahead in the data This command allows you to move from one day to another If the system is unable to goto the time requested it goes to the nearest time it can find on the file If that point is more than5 seconds from the time specified a warning pop up appears Goto a Specific KP Chainage Click on Attribute and select Raw Kp kilometre post in the
139. anges to the CROSSHAIR pointer to indicate measuring mode To measure the distance between two points on the screen press and drag the left mouse button from the starting point to the end point A blue line is drawn representing the distance being measured When the mouse button is released a pop up window appears displaying the distance measured see Figure 8 7 page 131 Measurement Method Measuring Setup Measurement Method A Speed x Time Difference in E N pair ok Apply Cancel Figure 8 6 The Measurement Method Pop up Window The DA System allows the on screen measurement of features Distances can be calculated using one of two methods Speed x Time or Difference in E N pair The default setting is Speed x Time calculated using the relative time between pings and the ship s speed When this method is used the start point is calculated from its geographical ping position then using time ship speed and speed of sound the along track and across track distances are calculated and used to May 2001 for version 2 1 129 wash va eu Buisn Using the DA System determine the measurement distance When Measurement Method in the Settings menu is set to Difference in E N pair both start and end points are calculated from their geographical ping positions and ping heading using corrected navigation data if necessary The measurement distance is then calculated from the difference in the Easting and Northing pair
140. anging binary image data see TVG of the DA 100 DA200 the area at the top of the DA100 DA200 screen which holds copyright information a form of switch which if pressed once is on and if pressed again is off the IBM Token Ring protocol for local area networking a set of tools or functions accessed through a single pop up window the shape of a surface the vehicle towed by a surface vessel in which the sonar trans ducers are mounted adding or subtracting the data from succeeding sonar pings to remove along track noise also known as stacking the path of the vessel or towfish over theseabed a pointing device for use with computers movement of the track ball moves the screen pointer see also mouse Coda s software module for displaying vessel and towfish track information a version of Trackplot which allows the user to modify the tagging carried out in a given survey area a mechanism which transforms energy from one form into another for example a sonar transducer converts electrical energy to sound energy either an input which causes a piece of electronic equipment to start a sequence of operations or an output generated by one piece of equipment which others will use in this way see also slave trigger and master trigger the piece of electronic equipment from which the trigger pulse originated May 2001 for version 2 1 279 SUOISI AUOD 3 Aresso 5 Glossary amp Conversions TTL TVG TVG en
141. appropriate button Load settings from a previous file The name of the current setup file is displayed at the top of the Swell Filter Setup pop up The settings from the current channel can be copied to other active channels by clicking on the Copy Settings to All Channels button 3 Click on the Display Swell Filtered Data button and in the pop up that appears select the channels to apply the swell filter to 4 Click on the OK or Apply button 7 8 2 1 Swell Filtered Output Display Swell Filtered Data m Display Swell Filtered Data On JT Left Channel HT Right Channel EDA OK Apply Store Factory Cancel Figure 7 19 The Display Swell Filtered Data Window 118 May 2001 for version 2 1 This menu item allows the Swell Filtering options of the Processing menu to be applied to the display of sub bottom data see Section 7 8 2 1 This option has no effect on sidescan data Swell filtered data may be displayed in either data channel by clicking on the appropriate toggle The toggle beside the selected channel label is green to indicate the selection Alternatively both channels display swell filtered data if both the Left Channel and the Right Channel toggles are selected The pop up action buttons include the option to Store the chosen selection for future use or to use the Factory setting see Section 3 3 9 The swell filtering option can be used to eliminate unwanted periodic noise from acquired
142. arch pattern area and four action buttons at the bottom of the pop up however the dual drive system has two tab forms instead of one see Figure 6 3 this page Optical 1 Optical 2 N Unmount Coda format version 1 21 File Type Filter Line Name RPTG 997 3 19 9 00 13 21 41 Kp 55 460 optical atas cod Fiter Fix Number 2299 Delete Fes ets foptical1 data big file cod 4 B Seismic NEN Pe File Name optica data 190900 132139 cod Figure 6 3 Open Playback Pop up Window 1 Insert a disk of previously recorded data into the disk drive In a twin tape system the upper drive is Optical 1 the lower drive is Optical 2 2 Select FileOpen Playback The system automatically begins to read the disk or the last accessed disk in a dual drive system and the Open Playback pop up appears It displays information about the files recorded to that disk e If the file details indicate that the wrong disk has been inserted click on the eject icon for the drive in the Application Specific Area anddnsert another disk 3 If the disk that you wish to access is in the lower drive of a dual drive system click on the Optical 2 tab 4 Select the file that you want to open by clicking on the name of that file in the Files window Use the scroll bars if necessary to move through the list of files until the name of the file that you want to open is visible The name of the selected file appears in the File Nam
143. ard depending on hardware USBs Some systems are fitted with two USB connectors however they are not currently supported COM2 is a male D type RS 232 serial port and is used for connecting the navigation data input to the back panel For most applications a simple two wire connection data in at pin 2 and signal ground at pin 5 if a 9 way connector is fitted or data in at pin 2 and signal ground at pin 7 if a 25 way connector is fitted is all that is required for trouble free setup and operation COM1 is a 9 way D type male RS 232 serial port which is used for connecting the mouse or trackball to the back panel The mouse or trackball is an integral component of the DA System system and should always be connected before powering up the system May 2001 for version 2 1 39 LPTI This port is a 25 way D type female interface It is compatible with a wide range of thermal printers An additional GPIB interface is also available as an optional extra for compatibility with those thermal printers which use a GPIB interface Contact Coda Technol ogies for further information Monitor signal connector The monitor signal is available from a 15 way high density D type connector as widely used in PC compatibles The monitor used must be capable of an 80Hz refresh rate whilst displaying 1040 x 780 non interlaced pixels For instructions on how to connect the system components together and how to power up the system refer to Section 4 3
144. ars select EPC GSP 1086 2 Select the appropriate parallel port LPT1 or LPT2 depending on which port the printer is attached to see Section 4 3 Select tag colour from the one of options of Black or White Toggle Output on Click on Apply or OK This starts printer output To switch the output off toggle the Output On button off and press either Apply or OK J 2 3 Troubleshooting see also The manufacturer s manual No output e Check the printer is on line and ready e Check the parallel cable connection Note that both the printer and the DA System must be switched off before removing or connecting a parallel cable e Check that the correct printer port has been selected from the DA System File Hardcopy Output menu item and that the Output On toggle is activated in the Hardcopy Output pop up Ensure that either the OK or Apply button has been clicked at the bottom of the pop up Error message appears when the DA System is powered up May 2001 for version 2 1 239 seolpueddy Appendices J 3 J 4 e Shut down the DA System ensure that both the DA System and the printer are powered off Switch the DA System on after switching on the printer EPC HSP100 Printer Note Before connecting the printer to the DA System both the printer and the DA System must be shut down and the power supplies to both switched off see Section 13 1 The DA System should only be powered up when the printer has been connected to the
145. art delay or line reversal is required the line reversal toggles are all off and the range will be calculated from the elapsed time since the trigger pulse so range should be set to Auto The trigger should be trigger A which should be set for an external trigger The choice of voltage range will depend on the voltage produced by the sidescan which will in turn depend on the towing altitude input gain TVG curve and so on A setting of 1 25 or 2 5 volts is usual Ultra Widescan 50m True Range Requirement The DA System is required to digitise data from an Ultra Widescan sonar operating at 50m true range The sweep period of the output from the Widescan is 67ms An external trigger is to be used May 2001 for version 2 1 199 seolpueddy Appendices A 2 1 4 Explanation Channels and 2 will be digitised and are labelled Sidescan Port and Sidescan Starboard The sampling frequency is arrived at as follows e The sweep time is 67ms so it is necessary to capture as many samples as possible in that time The sweep time allows 33 5ms per data channel over which the minimum effective sample rate should be 20KHz to avoid aliasing of the signal this implies a minimum actual sample rate of 40KHz as 67ms of data per channel has been compressed into 33 5ms per data channel e The number of samples per data channel should be a multiple of 512 to allow each data channel to occupy half the width of the data display area of t
146. ation Toolkit provides a suite of on screen and on line interpretation tools for site survey route survey search and recovery and target detection The user configurable on line event marking tools are enhanced to allow interactive marking of target objects seabed features and sediment types in real time The database facilities allow flexible comprehensive reports detailing locations dimensions seabed and target type surveyors comments and automatic calculations to be printed on screen via a printer or output to a DOS format floppy disk for integration into a windows based charting package GIS database spreadsheet or word processor Pipeline Inspection The PI100 Pipeline Inspection module is designed as a tool for surveying sub sea pipelines It carries out_automated pipeline tracking and span and burial detection as well as offering a comprehensive set of database annotation tools This allows pipeline surveys to be conducted without using thermal paper printouts of the survey TrackPlot This module provides route planning and coverage information of the vessel and towfish positions during hydrographic survey displayed inteal time Mosaic This module produces real time mosaicing of the seabed from sidescan sonar image data Mosaic includes annotation and manipulation tools and canbe used to any scale and include a built in tracking system May 2001 for version 2 1 99 WwW 19 S S va eu Buisn 100 May
147. automatically displays the start and end Eastings and Northings of the line start and end Kp and DCC of the line start and end sample numbers across track pings cross track slant distance and line length distance and height in metres If a measurement is made in sub bottom data the cross track distance and the height are not reported as they have no meaning Raw A Scan This area can also display an A scan trace of the sample data when the Raw A Scan toggle on the Display menu is on Any adjustments to the main waterfall display are reflected in the A scan trace for example switching to single channel mode causes the Raw A Scan window to display only one channel across the full screen width Selecting the Raw A Scan menu item produces a pop up window that displays an oscilloscope or waveform trace of eachdine as it is displayed to the screen see Figure 8 8 this page The oscilloscope trace is for the top line of data in the Data Display Area The trace is only updated when a new line of data is displayed to the screen therefore the DA System must be scrolling data before the trace becomes visible Note The presence of the Raw A Scan pop up can slow the rate of scrolling in playback Figure 8 8 The Raw A Scan Oscilloscope Trace The Raw A Scan pop up shows the current position of the bottom tracking line as an orange vertical line Displaying Survey Data Display Survey Data or clicking on the Display Data for the Survey
148. available If it is not Automatic tracking should be used This setting gives additional options for influencing the automatic bottom tracking algorithm these options enable you to enter minimum and maximum fish height alter the sensitivity of the algorithm and interactively reset the tracking algorithm if necessary On occasion however the characteristics of the seabed or water column result in unpredictable performance by the automated bottom tracking algorithm in which case the Fixed Fish Height setting should be used The Channel tab forms are used to select which channel or channels to apply the fish height setting to May 2001 for version 2 1 75 Using the DA System From Telemetry Data is available only in acquisition mode and causes the height to be read from the nav string this setting can be used if an altimeter is fitted to the towfish and the altitude is being sent from the towfish to the navigation computer If no height is entered via the nav string fish height will be set to 0 The option Keep Existing Value can only be selected in playback mode and causes the previ ously recorded fish height to be used Selecting Fixed Fish Height causes the fish height to be set to a user defined height The height can be entered in metres milliseconds or samples using the option selection button It remains fixed at this value until you choose a different fish height setting or change the value of the fixed fish height Copy Fi
149. ave heave velocity float heave velocity in metres second gdop float general dilution of precision pdop float position dilution of precision hdop float horizontal dilution of precision vdop float vertical dilution of precision tdop float time dilution of precision cable_out float number of metres of cable deployed survey_line_name 16 bytes the line designation as ASCII characters flags byte flags defining the following 1 presence absence of anti aliasing filtering 2 navigation correction 3 Start delay value to be used not used in cal culating distances 4 towfish altitude source altimeter fixed height automated bottom tracking 5 DA System clock synched not synched with nav computer 6 Position datum towfish or towing vessel 222 May 2001 for version 2 1 Storage classes byte 8 bit integer short integer 16 bit integer long integer 32 bit integer float 32 bit IEEE floating point number double 64 bit IEEE floating point number May 2001 for version 2 1 223 224 May 2001 for version 2 1 F Filters F 1 Both the low pass and high pass filtering options use time domain implementations of digital Butterworth filters see T W Parks and C S Burrus Digital Filter Design Wiley 1987 Since the Butterworth filter is an infinite impulse response IIR filter it has the advantage of using relatively few filter coefficients an
150. ave velocity up is positive metres sec hours hour of day 0 to 23 hours not required if nav_time is set interrogate dolphin string binary sequence with which to ask for a none nav time update interrogation interval between requests for nav time updates seconds period junk string data to be discarded ASCII kp kilometre post value kilometre layback distance from vessel to towfish metres line name string containing survey line description maxi ASCII mum 15 characters milliseconds number of milliseconds since last integer milliseconds second milliseconds in number of milliseconds from the start of the milliseconds minute last minute minutes minutes of hour 0 to 59 minutes not required if nav_time is set minutes in day number of minutes since 00 00 minutes month month of year 1 to 12 months not required if mav_time is set nav time UTC time in seconds since Ist January 1970 seconds nmen valid string to match if nav string is valid ASCII northing northing if nav_basis is UTM metres latitude if nav_basis is LATLONG degrees northing minutes not required if nav_basis is UTM minutes of latitude if nav_basis is LATLONG minutes of arc north switch string to match if latitude is North otherwise ASCII latitude is South not required if nav_basis is UTM pdop positional dilution of precision none pitch instantaneous pitch value forward rotation is degrees positive position fish source of position
151. ay 2001 for version 2 1 The display will now show 120 138 MODE DIGITAL CEN 200 RUN L R Figure J 8 Ultra Printer Set up for Centronics Interface The printer is now setup to receive data over the Centronics port and can be selected as the Printer in the Hardcopy Output pop up see Section 9 1 e Ultra printer has to be powered down or disconnected from the DA System ensure that the is disconnected first The printer can the be safely powered down without affecting the DA May 2001 for version 2 1 243 244 May 2001 for version 2 1 K A D Card DOS Diagnostics Test K 1 Test Procedure If a problem occurs with data acquisition and a hardware fault is suspected the following instruc tions should be followed 1 Shut down the system using Shutdown in the File menu 2 Insert a DOS boot floppy disk into the DA System floppy disk drive 3 Press lt Control Alt Delete gt to boot from the DOS boot floppy disk and allow the machine to 31 gt at the command prompt A gt and press lt Return gt 34 EZ menu item using the lt Return gt key eps ignore the question about the loop test eject the the Reset button Otherwise note the acceptance test May 2001 for version 2 1 245 246 May 2001 for version 2 1 L Multiple Windows May 2001 for version 2 1 247 248 May 2001 for version 2 1 Yp 0 Xx S O gt
152. ay define some or all of the following parameters for each column in the report e Label allows you to define the label for each column in the report e Width allows you to specify the width of each column e Precision allows you to define the number of figures after the decimal point for non integer numbers in the report Examples of a number of the available column types are listed below 154 May 2001 for version 2 1 Anomaly Number the client anomaly ID entered in the Annotate Tag Node pop up e Tag Name the tag type selected Tags created using the DA System are always Unknown e Kp the geo corrected Kp position of the event tag e Easting Northing the geo corrected position of the event tag If the nav input used is UTM then Easting and Northing are given if the nav input used is lat long then latitude or longitude is given Length Height and Width the dimensions of the anomaly entered either using the Annotate Tage Node pop up or by automated measurement by the PI100 module e Tag ID the system s tag ID This field can be used with Goto Tag ID to goto this specific tag on the data tape or disk see Section 10 7 1 e Description text entered in the Annoate Tag Node pop up of the Tagging menu A complete list of the reportable items available with a brief description of each of them can be found in the GeoKit User Manual Add Item ru um Figure 10 12 The Add Item Pop up Window Clicking on
153. before low pass filtering was applied while the top half of the display shows the data with the illustrated Low Pass Filtering settings applied Time Varying Filtering 4 Channel 1 Channel2 Channel3 Channel 4 N Fittest Filter2 N Fiter3 N Filter 4 JT Filter Active Filter Type _ Continuously Time Varying Filter SE Le oi vl j BP win v ZAP m Apply Filter Limits From To gt Sensor gt End of Data x x xx Seabed po ms wy Seabed po ms Time Time ms v 0 0 LA 30 0 gt m Frequency Design Parameters 3 dB Hz a al Cut Off 1000 7 2 Filter Order 4 Viewing Range gt Input v Screen Figure 7 15 High Pass Filtering 114 May 2001 for version 2 1 HP High pass filtering removes low frequency information from the data The high pass filter is set up in much the same way as the low pass filter with a cut off frequency and filter order Again the cut off must be less than the Nyquist frequency and the filter order must be between one and four inclusive A high pass filter can be continuously varying with time Figure 7 15 page 114 shows the Data Display Area with the High Pass Filtering pop up window settings for the data displayed on the screen The bottom half of the display shows data before low pass filtering was applied while the top half of the display shows the data with the illustrated High Pass Filtering settings applied Ti
154. buttons on the Scale Display Data pop up see Figure 7 1 page 01 are altered after setting the TVG The toolkit is similar to that of Image Enhancement see Section 7 5 both contain an inter active graph and several smart icons Any processing applies to the incoming data at the top of the screen only rather than the whole Data Display Area To apply TVG changes to the whole image select Display gt Refresh Display The Scale Display Data pop up can also be used to see the effect TVG Enhancement has on your data on a per ping basis see Section 8 8 Note This processing is only applied to the displayed data The data being recorded or stored on tape or optical disk is not affected by any processing As with the Image Enhancement pop up changes to the graph are applied immediately to the display data although the graph settings are initially stored on a temporary basis To cancel the changes and dismiss the pop up click on the Cancel button To save the changes click on Apply or OK OK will dismiss the pop up as well as saving the changes 104 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 4 Choosing Which Part of the Trace To View Left Right N Single V Dual Pan AG Panky 50 00 21 of Screen Width a Magnify by 20 00 21 of Screen Width EE _ Keep Seabed Interface on Screen Keep Seabed Within 5 00 241 of Screen Edge Display Sampling Display starts at foo a Samples Y 2 Display to end of trace y Display ends at D 00 l
155. ccording to the mode being used acquisition mode or playback mode Playing the Tape or Disk During playback this button controls the reading of data from tape or optical disk and its display on screen Stopping the Tape or Disk During playback this button stops the screen display scrolling and stops data being read from tape or disk into the display buffer it also stops Fast Forward Cue and Rewind Review operations Pausing Replay key shortcut lt Spacebar gt T During playback this button stops the display from scrolling allowing other operations zooming tagging or making on screen measurements to be carried out more easily it does not stop data being read from the tape or disk into the display buffer Clicking on the Pause button again also starts the data scrolling Alternatively if the pointer is in the Data Display Area the space bar can be used to pause and release the data Goto e Clicking on this button brings up the following window May 2001 for version 2 1 93 File Tape Tag v Beginning of File wv Next Tag 7 End of File wv Next Tag Node w Next File Previous Tag em v Previous File az Previous Tag Node A bearing or Tpi az Attribute frag Node ID ET Syst y Start of Blank Tape f Using the DA Position v Time i w Attribute Faw Kp rl i OK Apply Cancel Figure 6 13 The Goto Menu tape version This menu allows you to move
156. cess A prompt appears asking for the source of the update Do you wish to install the update from diskette tape or optical default d d t o Press either lt d gt lt t gt or lt o gt and then press lt Return gt Note The following example is for installation from a tape If the update is from floppy disk or optical disk similar messages and prompts appear When tape is selected the following prompts appear May 2001 for version 2 1 167 wayskS va eu usn Using the DA System 12 3 2 Insert the update tape into a tape drive NOW Which tape device do you wish to install the update from default 1 1 2 The default is to install from tape drive 1 Insert the update tape into a tape drive Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt The system informs you that the previous DA System software is being saved Saving previous DAx00 A prompt appears asking for the update tape to be inserted Insert a cartridge into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt Do not attempt to eject the tape until the update has finished The installation process then lists the packages on the tape The following package s are available 1 UpdToCurr Coda Technologies DA System Update Package i386 Tue Jul 02 13 05 41 1998 Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default al
157. cquisition this button stops the display of data not the recording of data Recording of data is started and stopped using the pop up accessed from the Record button described in Section 5 5 3 1 Thus when this button is selected incoming data from the acquisition system continues to be read and recorded but it is discarded without being displayed May 2001 for version 2 1 79 5 5 3 4 Pause key shortcut lt Spacebar gt ii During acquisition this button has no effect on recorded data it simply pauses the display of data on the screen If however the pause is so long that the display buffer fills up the display automatically starts scrolling again This auto pause release feature ensures that all incoming data can be seen on the display Clicking on the Pause button again also starts the data scrolling Alternatively if the pointer is in the Data Display Area the space bar can be used to pause and release the data 5 5 3 5 Goto This button has no effect during acquisition 1 is shown in Figure 5 44 this pageand Figure 5 45 thi Di i selecting the appropriate tab See also Section 5 3 5 7 1 Figure 5 44 The Application Specific Area Channels Tab in Acquisition Mode When the DA System is in Acquisition mode the Channel tab in the Application Specific Area shows information on the number and type of channels open and whether the channel is being recorded has Nav Input applied and has Bottom T
158. d for each data set the tag files can be stored to the tag database and replayed with the accompanying data channel as required Add Tag Node 3 Delete Tag Node s Move Tag Node 5 Tia i 22 Annotate Tag Node 5 Manage Tag Files Setup Tags Fast Tag Setup Figure 10 1 The Tagging Menu A tag must be selected and made the current tag before it can be moved or deleted A tag is selected by clicking on it The selected tag flashes between its normal colour and light blue It can then be moved or deleted To Turn on Tag Display The DA System has an overlay plane which displays a set of coloured screen markings that indicate tag marks and fixes these markings are displayed over the sonar image without affecting the displayed data You can toggle the display on or off using the Display Overlay Data option You should also turn off the scale line option Creating Tags Selecting this menu item causes the mouse pointer to change to a pencil see Section 3 6 If the pencil is moved within the display area and the left mouse button pressed a tag is marked If the menu item has been selected but no tagging is required or if no further tags are to be added re selection of the Add Tag Node s menu item causes the pencil pointer to be replaced by the usual mouse pointer the tagging operation is abandoned May 2001 for version 2 1 143 Using the DA System 10 3 10 4 10 5 To create a tag do one of
159. d on however by switching the overlay plane off data can be recorded or played back without displaying tags or fix lines This item does not affect the storing of tags that is if overlay data is Off and a tag is marked using the right mouse button the tag is not be drawn to the screen but is saved to the database Scale Lines Scale lines are displayed as vertical red lines on the data representing either distance or time These provide a visual guide to the travel time either one way or two way travel time or distance either true range or slant range as the survey data is displayed When the scale lines are displaying distance this is either true range or slant range depending on the toggle selected If True Range is selected a valid Fish Height value must be available to the system see Section 5 5 Scale lines can be displayed over sidescan data or sub bottom data Note Scale lines are not recorded with the data they are only visible in the DA System waterfall display or on hardcopy output May 2001 for version 2 1 125 Figure 8 2 The Scale Lines Settings Window Setup using time msecs 126 May 2001 for version 2 1 8 4 Setup Annotation N JF Annotate Scale Lines HT Fill Annotation Background OK apply store Factory Cancel Figure 8 3 The Scale Lines Settings Window Annotation This pop up window allows the scale lines options to be set e Draw Scale Lines This button is used to t
160. d on disk The following prompt appears Finished backing up Setup files Restore Setup Files This menu item is used to restore setup files from an optical disk to the hard drive Note Existing setup files with the same name on the hard disk will be automatically overwritten When Restore Setup Files is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the following prompt appears Which optical drive do you wish to copy setup files from default 1 1 2 Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt 172 May 2001 for version 2 1 12 3 11 12 3 12 12 3 13 12 3 14 A prompt appears asking for the disk to be inserted into drive 1 Insert the optical disk into Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt to continue The setup files are then copied from the disk to the hard drive The following message appears Finished restoring Setup files Network Disk Menu This option allows the use of a network disks with other unix systems Contact Coda Technol ogies before using this option Make Clean This menu item is used to remove all user specific files from the system When Make Clean is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the following set of questions appear in the cleaning window Do you wish to clean tag directory default n
161. d therefore consumes less computing power The Butterworth filter also has the advantage of a monotonic frequency response that is smooth over the complete range of frequencies Butterworth Filter The digital Butterworth filter is completely specified by three parameters the sampling frequency of the data the cut off frequency and the roll off rate Whilst the sampling frequency is obtainedfrom the survey data the values for both the cut off and roll off may be selected by the user The cut off frequency marks the transition between the filter s pass band and stop band From analogue filter theory the cut off frequency is defined as the point at which the frequency response is 3dB down and as such indicates the point at which the frequency attenuation or suppression starts to become significant The cut off frequency must always be below the Nyquist frequency that is less than half the sampling frequency The roll off rate is a measure of the rate at which frequency attenuation increases after the cut off frequency For high pass filters the roll off rate is always expressed as a positive value whereas for low pass filters this value is always negative A roll off rate with a higher magnitude results in greater degrees of attenuation for those frequencies closest to the cut off Occasionally the magnitude of the roll off rate requested by the user is not sufficient to allow the required filter to be realised In this case the user will
162. d while the tape is in the tape drive Doing so can lead to damage to the tape or the tape drive ance If the drive does not operate properly do not ontact Coda ologies 4 May 2001 for version 2 1 Read This First l Introduction 1 Welcome The DA System 1 1 1 2 About this Manual 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 Conventions Used in this Manual 2 Quick Start Quick Start Procedure Setting up the DA System Acquiring Survey Data Playing Back Survey Data 3 The User Interface 3 1 The Main Display 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 3 3 1 4 The Title Bar The Menu Bar Tear off Menus Tool Bar Trackplot Mosaic 3 2 Multiple Windows 3 2 1 Opening a Data Display Window 3 2 2 Menu Bar Options 3 2 3 Data Display Window Identification 3 24 Colour Coding 3 2 5 Window Polling 3 3 Menu Features 3 3 1 One of Selection Switch 3 32 On Off Switch 3 3 3 Option Selection Button 3 3 4 Spin Box 3 3 5 Scrolling Option List 3 3 6 Scroll Bar 3 3 7 Tab Forms 3 3 8 Pop up Selector 3 3 9 Pop up Action Buttons 3 3 10 File Selection Window 3 3 11 Load Settings 3 3 12 Save Settings 3 4 Message Window 3 5 Status Bar Settings 3 6 Pointer Types 3 7 Terminology 3 8 Restart 3 9 Key Shortcuts ll Using the DA System 4 The System Hardware 4 1 DA100 200Hardware 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 4 1 2 The Front Panel Tape Drives Magneto Optical Disk Drives The Back Panel 4 2 DA50 Hardware 4 2 1 4 2
163. data is derived from an ASCII file downloaded onto the DA System see Section 5 4 Selecting Corrected navigation data in this pop up has no effect if the file selected to correct the data in the Corrected Nav Input window see Section 5 4 contains data which is in an incorrect format or which does not correspond to the data being read from tape or optical disk In either of these cases the raw navigation data continues to be used and this fact is displayed in the Survey Data window If Corrected Nav Data Type is selected in playback mode the DA System uses corrected navigation data This is displayed in for example the Survey Data pop up and the General Information Area in addition to being stored to the tag database To apply the corrected navigation data select Settings Nav Data Type click on the Corrected one of selection button and then click on the OK button The system uses the most recently selected file of corrected navigation data either from hard disk or floppy to correct the navigation information in the data being read from tape or disk e If the corrected navigation file does not correspond to the data on the tape or disk for example if the times do not match an error message appears stating that no correction of the navigation data from the tape or disk canbe performed e To check if correction of the navigation data is being carried out on data from a tape ordisk that is being played select Display Survey Data a
164. desired number of samples per ping For high resolution digital data it is desirable to have a high number of samples per ping The screen can display a maximum of 1024 pixels at any time but using the flexibility of the channel settings of the zoom function data can be displayed processed and interpreted at much higher resolutions We recommend that data be acquired and recorded in multiples of 512 for example 1024 samples ping or 2560 samples ping Continuing with our example if we have a 50m slant range survey and therefore a ping rate of 15 pings second and we decide on 2560 samples ping we can calculate the minimum sampling frequency according to the expression SamplingFrequency gt Sweeptime x SamplesPerPing as described above Therefore the minimum sampling frequency is SamplingFrequency 2 x 2560 0 067 SamplingFrequency gt 38400Hz May 2001 for version 2 1 197 seo pueddy Appendices A 2 1 A 2 1 1 This is 38 4KHz which can be increased to 40KHz to allow for very short gaps between the sampling of successive triggers 5 True Range The true range of a sidescan swathe is defined by the slant range and the altitude of the sidescan towfish Generally the towfish is towed at an altitude of 10 of the true range as illustrated below Sig Nt R ang e lt True Range gt Figure A 1 Calculation of True Range lt Altitude gt If for example the towing altitude is
165. down arrow They provide a flexible method of om a list of available options Click on the down arrow to display the list of options arrows on your keyboard Each option will be highlighted as you scroll onto it chlighted option either press the space bar or lt Enter gt or click on it with the your selection use either the left or right arrow on your keyboard You can then selection again To scroll directly to your chosen option click in the text box The scroll bar appears at ome pop ups and indicates that only part of a list of items is cu er items in the list click on the arrows in the scroll bar or p oll bar up or down or to the left or right 3 3 7 Tab Forms a Figure 3 13 A Tab Form Some pop ups have several tab forms for example the Tag Setup pop up from the Tagging menu has eight tab forms see Figure 3 13 this page A tab form contains a number of related items of information or selections and has a labelled tab at the top they are arranged so that they overlap each other To select a tab form click on its tab This brings the form to the front of the pile the information can then be read and changes made to it When a tab label is greyed out it cannot be accessed May 2001 for version 2 1 25 3 3 8 Pop up Selector Figure 3 14 Pop up Window Selectors The three point ellipsis is appended to some menu items and indicates that selection of the item will cause a pop up window to appear the window will contain
166. e This tool hangs with the system keys from a strap which is attached to one of the handles It may be used in the last resort to remove a cartridge which the drive has failed to eject However this should only be attempted after the system has been shut down Use only gentle pressure to attempt to remove the disk as the ejection mechanism is easily damaged Star drives can be manually ejected It is first essential to make sure the power to your DA System is switched off Remove the rubber eject button and turn the inside shaft counter clockwise with a flat bladed screwdriver until the disk is fully ejected Floppy disk drive The drive s LED is lit while the system is using the drive Do not remove a floppy disk or turn off th system when the LED is on Doing so may damage the data on the disk 4 2 2 3 The Side Panel of the DA50 showing DAT Drive Bay Figure 4 7 Side Panel of the DA50 Showing DAT Drive Bay Figure 4 7 this page shows the typical layout of the DA50 side panel when a DAT drive is installed Read this while examining your system noting the location of the following parts COM2 is a male D type RS 232 serial port and is used for connecting the navigation data input to the back panel For most applications a simple two wire connection data in at pin 2 and signal ground at pin 7 if a 25 way connector is fitted is all that is required for trouble free setup and operation LPTI This port is a 25 way D type fe
167. e Analogue tab form to set up analogue acquisition Figure 5 3 page 48 This is the only menu that has a direct effect on the quality of digitised data therefore it is important to make sure that the correct options and values are selected Select the parameters for each of the data channels to be digitised Active is used to select the channels to be digitised by the system A channel is selected by clicking on the on off switch beside its number Activating a channel changes its on off switch from grey to green and makes its parameters available for selection The parameters are unavailable greyed out for channels that are not active Trigger shows the triggers to be used with specific channels The triggers available are shown in the Triggers tab form see Figure 5 3 page 48 Trigger defaults to Trig A where the selected Description is SS Port or SS Stbd and defaults to Trig B when the Description is Seismic Voltage is used to elect the voltage range of the active channels Each channel can have a different voltage range The voltage range is changed by clicking on the option buttons of the active channels and selecting a new value The options available depend on the digitisation option purchased but the typical range is 1 25V 2 5V 5V and 10V Selecting the voltage range thatmost closely matches the range of the input signal is the best option The setting for the input voltage range is crucial to the acquisition of high qu
168. e Serial Setup button should be clicked to set up the serial line parameters see next section 140 May 2001 for version 2 1 Either Portrait or Landscape Format may be selected for PostScript images by clicking on the appropriate toggle For screen dumps the image is scaled to fit the page landscape format therefore produces a larger printed image Where a screen dump is being saved in TIFF format this selection does not apply and is therefore ignored Type allows a choice of ASCII or PostScript printer Only PostScript is available for screen dumps selecting ASCII produces an error message When the appropriate selections have been made clicking on the OK button applies the settings and dismisses the pop up Apply uses the settings without dismissing the pop up and Cancel dismisses the pop up ignoring any changes made Note The printer should be connected to the required port of DA System before OK or Apply is clicked see Section 4 3 and Appendix J to those of the printer plotter computer etc to which this seria connected When the serial setup has been completed select OK May 2001 for version 2 1 141 142 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 10 1 10 2 Tagging amp Using the Event Database The DA System enables you to place tags on the display data in order to mark features of interest known as events on screen This is done either by using the Tagging menu or by clicking the RIGHT mouse but
169. e X Window system and the Motif 1 2 3 GUI TCP IP networking is available as an option The DA System uses the Unix SVR4 2 VERITAS vxfs file system this has significant advan tages over the file systems used under earlier versions of Unix and those used by Windows or MS DOS The major benefit is that the file system s integrity is ensured if there isa power failure or if the power to the system is inadvertently switched off DA System Software and GUI The DA System is written in C and C and uses the Motif 1 2 3 GUI for the X Window system A device driver for the A D acquisition system has been developed specifically for this product by Coda Technologies Data Flow in the DA System The DA System uses the multi tasking capabilities of the Unix operating system to process data as shown in Figure 14 1 page 180 May 2001 for version 2 1 179 DA System Technical Details RS 232 Analogue Navigation Sonar Data Signal Input Output Sub system Media IO Sea Tape 1 Tape 2 Geokit or or P1100 Optical 1 Optical 2 TrackPlot TrackPlot Plus Mosaic Media Sub system TVG Correct Display Sub system 12 bit data TVG applied Sub sampled Scale Display Data re Oscilloscope Trace bit data sub sampled A Scan 8 bit data sub sampled Colour Map colour mapped 8 bit data Printer Screen Figure 14 1 Data Flow in the
170. e across track in this region and compressing the samples furthest from the transducer as there are more samples per unit distance across track in this region This also has the effect of shifting the data samples to removesthe water column For sidescan data slant range correction can be used to get a true range visualisation of the seafloor It removes the water column from the image This can be particularly useful for mosaicing sidescan imagery Processing gt Slant Range Correction can be turned on or off by clicking on this menu item The on off toggle beside the option changes to green indicating that the processing has been switched on Slant range correction is only effective ifa valid fish height is available Fish height can be recorded with the data or can be recalculated during playback see Section 5 5 Note The use of slant range correction cannot add information about the scene being surveyed but modifies the data being displayed The use of slant range correctiontis largely superseded by the provision in the DA System of measurement tools which give true across and along track dimensions Slant range is usually turned on only in those situations where the DA System output is to be used by other devices which need slant range corrected imagery for example hardcopy output devices 7 8 Processing Shallow Seismic Data 7 8 1 Frequency Filtering Frequency filtering can be used to remove or preserve certain frequencies
171. e button with the pointer over a line selects the complete line of text Quadruple clicking selects all the text in the file Clicking the left mouse button while textis selected deselects the text e Adding Text Text may be added by clicking the leftamouse button at the desired cursor location Typing text then inserts the text at that point e Deleting Text Text may be deleted by using the Backspacekey to remove text before the pointer or the Delete key to remove text after the pointer Selected text see above may be deleted by pressing the Backspace key or the Delete key to remove the highlighted selection e Copying Text To copy text select the text to be copied as detailed above and_click the middle mouse button when the pointer is at the position where the selected text is to be inserted Clicking the middle mouse button inserts the text e Moving Around the File The screen may be scrolled in the desired direction by selecting the appropriate arrow in the scroll bar on the border of the screen Clicking and dragging the rectangle between the arrows scrolls the screen interactively A further alternative is to click the left mouse button in the area between the rectangle and the arrows This causes the screen to be scrolled either up or down by a page Using the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard provided the pointer is in the window produces the same effect A further option enables a percentage position in the file to be
172. e connected to both CH1 and CH2 BNC connectors Ultra Widescan 100m True Range Requirement The DA System is required to digitise data from an Ultra Widescan sonar operating at 100m true range The sweep period of the output from the Widescan is 67ms although the actual time to capture a channel of data is 134ms An external trigger is to be used Explanation Channels 1 and 2 will be digitised and are labelled Sidescan Port and Sidescan Starboard The sampling frequency is arrived at as follows e The sweep time is 67ms so it is necessary to capture as many samples as possible in that time The sweep time allows 33 5ms per data channel over which the minimum effective sample rate should be 20KHz to avoid aliasing of the signal this would imply a minimum actual sample rate of 60KHz as 134ms of data per data channel has been compressed into 33 5ms per channel e The number of samples per data channel should be a multiple of 512 to allow each data channel to occupy half the width of the data display area of the DA System e A line width of 1024 samples per data channel requires a sample period of 67ms 1000 ae x 1024 0 0327ms or a sample frequency of 0 0327 7 30 56KHz Similarly 2048 200 May 2001 for version 2 1 A 2 2 samples implies a sample frequency of 61 2KHz Therefore choose a sample frequency of about 61 2KHz e Allow a dead time of at least 2ms at the end of each line The discarded signal should be
173. e deployed to towfish metres cep heading heading of major axis of the CEP 0 to 360 degrees cep major length of the CEP major axis metres cep minor length of the CEP minor axis metres course course 0 to 360 degrees data age time from receipt of GPS position data to trans seconds mission of RS 232 string from navigation com puter day day of month days not required if nav time is set dec distance cross course defined to be positive if h metres towfish track is to the starboard of the survey centreline depth depth from sea surface to seafloor metres easting easting if nav_basis is UTM metres longitude if nav_basis is LATLONG degrees easting minutes not required if nav_basis is UTM minutes of longitude if nav_basis is LATLONG minutes of arc east switch string to match if longitude is East otherwise ASCII longitude is West not required if nav_basis is UTM fix number fix number none fix valid string to match if this is a valid fix ASCII gdop geometric dilution of precision none hdop horizontal dilution of precision none h flap ROTV horizontal flap Starboard positive degrees heading towfish or vessel heading in degrees 0 to 360 degrees heave instantaneous heave up is positive metres May 2001 for version 2 1 213 s Ipu ddy Appendices value_field_name Incoming Value Interpretation Units heave velocity instantaneous he
174. e for future reference Less urgent Technical Support matters can also be addressed by e mail to 188 May 2001 for version 2 1 support coda co uk or support coda technologies com The following list of common problems should first be reviewed before contacting Coda Technical Support 16 3 Troubleshooting the DA System Image lacks contrast has too much contrast e In acquisition mode check that the input voltage range selected in the Channels 1 4 tab of the Open Acquisition menu is correct see Section 5 2 e Select the Scale Display Data item in the Settings menu Proceed as outlined in Section 5 3 to ensure the incoming signal is converted to displayed intensities correctly Use the Image Enhancement toolkit under the Processing menu to set a gamma value which optimises the displayed data greyscale or select and manipulate the colourmap used or modify the graph mapping incoming intensities to colourmap intensities see Section 7 5 Image too dark or bright across the whole line of data e see Image lacks contrast has too much contrast above Unable to writetto a data tape e Check that the data tape is notwrite protected see Appendix H Unable to replay data tape Does the Open Tape Playback selection produce a meaningful contents list See Section 6 2 If so the tape should play back without difficulty unless it is physically damaged If not check that the tape you are trying to play is a valid Coda or S
175. e settings withoutdosing your original settings Contrast Adjustment by Gamma Correction This smart icon pops up a text entry box to input gamma enhancement values A a gamma function is an exponential function that is its values increase in a non linear fashion Its effect is similar to a television s contrast control To decrease the contrast making the Data Display Area brighter requires values greater than one whereas to increase contrast making the display area generally darker requires a value of less than one Typing lt enter gt in the text box or clicking on OK causes the curve in the graph area of the toolkit window to be redrawn according to the input value Gamma values are a quick way of config uring the graph without having to move grip points In normal use the best display quality is often obtained by using the Gamma Correction smart icon to set a gamma value contrast value for the data rather than by moving the grip points on the graph If the display is too dark a gamma value of greater than 1 should be used normally between 1 3 and 2 0 A higher gamma value tends to make the display brighter though it decreases contrast If the screen is too light a gamma value of less than should be used normally in the range of 0 5 to 0 9 Colourmap Selection Clicking on the Colourmap drop down gives a choice of 16 different colourmap options These can be used to map the incoming data values to different shad
176. e window and details of that file appear in the Files Information window Note that files recorded in Coda format have a cod extension while those recorded in SEG Y format have a sgy extension 6 2 3 Starting Playback on a Local Disk When this menu item is selected the system automatically begins to read the selected disk and the Open Playback pop up appears The pop up for the Local Disks has a File Information window and a Files search pattern area and there is a separate tab for each Local Disk that is mounted 86 May 2001 for version 2 1 Figure 6 4 O Playback Pop up Window 1 Insert a of previously recorded data into the disk drive In a twin tape system the upper edower drive is Optical 2 ed file appears in the File Name window tion window Note that files recorded in e recorded in SEG Y format have a sgy This section gives a brief summary of he i reen For more complete information refer to Section 6 3 1 Choosing Which Channels to Vi Coda s acquisition systems can collect up to 8 channels of data and display all of these neously depending on the system specification Up to two channels which use the s may be viewed at the same time in the same window Figure 6 5 The Application Specific Area of the DA System showing the Channels Tab The Channel tab of the Application Specific Area displays the channels available from the media being played back May 2001 for version 2 1 8
177. econd trigger will be ignored To remove this effect decrease the number of samples per ping e Start Delay ms the delay in milliseconds between the end of any discarded signal and starting to acquire data This can be used for example to reduce the length of the sampled water column The default start delay is 0 milliseconds but can be increased for each data May 2001 for version 2 1 195 vu ddy 99 1 Appendices A 1 A 2 channel in the appropriate text entry box When a start delay has been entered in the text entry box this will be used in calculations where appropriate e Fixed Sweep Time Sonar a toggle to indicate whether or not the input is from a fixed sweep time sonar If No the default is selected the Fixed Sweep Time Range and Discarded Signal text entry box is greyed out Most sonar inputs are not of the Fixed sweep time type e True Range m when Fixed sweep time sonar is selected this allows the range in metres to be entered for the Fixed sweep time sonar When Fixed sweep time is not selected this displays the calculated range from the sampling frequency and samples per ping e Discarded Sig ms a text entry box which is used to enter a value in milliseconds for the amount of signal to be discarded after the trigger is received The discarded portion of the signal is not taken into account in any calculations see Start Delay Its intended use is for extracting a single channel from composi
178. ed Nav Group Files list A number the system is being used for acquisition ly as possible pause the screen display pop up will appear see Figure 6 9 page window and click on the OK button Make Default Restore Factory as Defaut feu Li bette Figure 6 9 The Save Setup Corrected Navigation Contents Pop up Window 5 Dismiss the Corrected Navigation Contents pop up select the required Corrected Nav Group name from the scrolling list option in the Corrected Navigation pop up and click OK Note The times in the corrected nav file must coincide with the times from the displayed data for nav correc tions to be applied successfully 90 May 2001 for version 2 1 Note Selecting the corrected nav file will not automatically turn on corrected nav for the data set This should be selected from Settings Nav Data Type pop up see Section 6 6 2 6 6 2 Selecting Raw or Corrected Navigation 6 6 3 Nav Data Settings Display Nav Basis Type Use Nav Data Type 4 As recorded 4 Raw UTM w Corrected a Lat Long OK Apply Store Factory Cancel Figure 6 10 The Nav Data Type Pop up Window The Settings Nav Data Type pop up is used to choose whether to use Raw or Corrected navigation information when in playback mode or when producing a report from a tag database files Raw navigation data is the navigation information stored on tape or optical disk with the sonar data corrected navigation
179. ed set a manual TVG curve 7 8 6 Colour Maps In addition to the various continuous tone colour maps provided through the Image Enhancement pop up there are several colour maps that are specifically targeted to seismic and Ground Penetrating Rada GPR processing 122 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 8 7 Image Enhancement Setup F r Input Colourmap GPRI x Orange Grey JE Copy to Boti lgie Green Red Yellow Figured7 25 The Image Enhancement Pop up These colour maps are quantised so that they highlight various sub bottom reflectors and enable you to quickly distinguish and characterise features in the sub bottom layers by simply looking at the colour of the feature We have developed these colour maps in consultation with our customers so the data is shown in a standardised way through a whole suite of seismic processing tools If you have a requirement for a particular colour map that is not currently available please contact Coda Technologies and we will try to include it in atfuture release of the software Swell Filter Hints There must be an accurate Fish Height Value available to the system for swell filter to be effective see Section 5 5 Try to set up an automatic swell filter with minimum and maximum frequencies that are appro priate to the swell experienced swell period can range from 0 5 to 30 seconds period The maximum swell that can be filtered is a function of the along track ping frequency
180. ed to display a section of data at full resolution see Section 8 5 Remember that the right andleft data channels of sidescan data are displayed in from the centre of the screen so data in the right channel appears to shift in the opposite direction to data in the left channel The DA System default settings are to display two channels of data simultaneously and to sub sample the full swathe of the incoming data to fit into the width of the Data Display Area You may however want to View only one channel or to view a Specific section of a channel in more detail This is done by changing the settings in the Display and Settings menus The Display settings control the viewing mode single channel mode displays either the left or the right channel dual channel mode displays both left and right channels The Settings Left Display Channel and Setting Right Display Channel pop ups both contain two options offset and sub sampling which control the position and the resolution of the display data It is worth experimenting with these settings if for example you wish to view only the pipeline within a sidescan sonar swathe you can centre the display channel omthis region allowing the display of the pipeline to use the full digitised resolution Enhancing the Image The DA System s default waterfall display is monochrome and the shades of grey are directly proportional to the data values This may not however be the most useful wa
181. ed to generate the master trigger for use by other equipment May 2001 for version 2 1 47 Using the DA System _Praloque A Network Digital JF Device Active Inactive Channels 1 4 N Triggers Trigger A B Source 4 int Av Ext 4 nt sv Ext Active Edge y ve ve v ve te Auto Period on xy Off On sv Off Pulse Width ms hh Em Pulse Polarity sg Low Le High wv Low 4 High Period ms Figure 5 3 The Triggers Tab Form of theOpen Acquisition Pop Up Window The Triggers tab form can be used to specify the details of the triggers see Figure 5 3 this page The settings can be changed as follows e Trigger Source these can be set to INTernal or EXTernal by clicking on theoption selection button and choosing the appropriate option When external triggering is used sampling starts whenever a pulse is received on the TRIGAN input When set to internal trigger thetext entry box can be used to define the frequency of the trigger produced by the DA System or it can be configured automatically when Auto Period is on No connection to TRIG IN is required The Period of the trigger is set as described below If an internal trigger is selected all subsequent fields will be available When an External trigger is selected only the Active Edge is available the remaining fields will be greyed out e Active Edge a toggle to indicate whether digitisation of the sonar data starts af
182. ed to the screen The input signal is digitised at a resolution of 12 bits 4096 discrete levels whereas the display resolution is limited to 8 bits 256 colours or grey levels therefore the 12 bit input data must be converted to 8 bits for display Note that this conversion applies only to displayed data all data is recorded and all analysis and processing is performed at the full input data resolution The Settings Scale Display Data pop up appears automatically across the screen when you start acquiring data or when you start playing back data It can however can be accessed through the Settings menu whenever the data needs to be rescaled for example when a significant change occurs in the voltage levels of the signal When Scale Data Display is selected a window appears across the Data Display Area showing an oscilloscope trace and a number of controls see Figure 7 1 page 101 Automated Scale and Offset Adjustment The trace is displayed differently depending on which of the two Viewing Ranges is selected The default setting is Viewing Range to Input as indicated by the green one of selection button Viewing Range sv Input Screen Apply To sv Left y Right gt Both Figure 7 1 The Scale Display Data Pop up Window showing the Screen Range When the Viewing Range is set to Input the green oscilloscope trace shows the full resolution of the signals after any processing To view the raw input signal select the Raw A
183. ed to two acquisition channels in a portable and compact form The data acquisition and playback system of the DA System is sophisticated yet easy to use It can be used to acquire data from both sidescan sonar and sub bottom profilers to manipulate and display this data and to record the data to tape or optical disk Previously recorded data can be played back rapidly through the system for later viewing or manipulation The system allows you to record data in a high resolution digital format which does not degrade with time and it can output the data to on line data processing systems Furthermore it provides fast access to data on tape or disk for post processing or data quality assessment Broadly speaking the DA System operates in one of two modes data acquisition mode or data playback mode May 2001 for version 2 1 15 uolonpouu Introduction 1 2 In acquisition mode a number of sonar inputs are connected to the system Each input can be digitally sampled and recorded to tape or disk Sampled data can be manipulated in various ways before being displayed on a scrolling screen Two input data channels can be displayed simulta neously in one window up to four windows of data can be displayed at any one time the channels selected for display may be changed at any time Data recorded to tape or disk consists of all of the original sampled data with no processing applied and any additional information input to the system for exam
184. eight 5 5 1 1 Fish Height Source Selection For selection of fish height source there are eight options on the scrolling options list The first item will be either From Telemetry Data if the system is in acquisition mode or Keep Existing if the system is in playback mode From Telemetry Data acquisition mode only Figure 5 22 Fish Height Source Selection Keep Existing The other standard options are 68 May 2001 for version 2 1 From telemetry data acquisition mode only Fixed fish height Copy fish height from another channel Use fish height setup from another channel Auto tracking Threshold algorithm Auto tracking Power density algorithm Auto tracking Edge detection algorithm Auto tracking Advanced edge detection op Figure 5 23 Fish Height Source Selection Standard Options lt a D Note Advanced Edge Detection is only available for Sidescan 3 e From Telemetry Data acquisition mode only receiving the towfish height as part of the navigation data based on the towfish altimeter reading is usually the best option if data from this source is available If this is not the case an Auto Tracking algorithm should be used This setting gives additional options for influencing the automatic bottom tracking algorithm these options enable you to enter minimum and maximum fish height alter the sensitivity of the algorithm and interactively reset the tracking algorithm if necessary On occasion however the c
185. elected the Trigger Divisor is greyed out The Delay field can also be used for External triggers specifying the delay from the trigger e When Coupled trigger is selected the trigger can be coupled to another subsystem e g SBP Each option for coupling subsystems will be displayed in the list as for example Coupled SB 0512 In Coupled mode the Divisor and Delay fields can be used e In Gated mode the external trigger is used as a trigger inhibit with the time of inhibit being May 2001 for version 2 1 57 Wo s sS va eu Buisn Using the DA System controlled by the value in the Inhibit Time field This field replaces the Trigger Delay field when the Trigger Type is set to Gated The Divisor field acts to subdivide the master coupled trigger The Delay field can be used to further delay this trigger from the master The Navigation Decode scrolling option list allows the following choices When Use FSIU Values is selected the position E N heading heave pitch roll yaw depth fish offset layback speed course and temperature are all set from the FSIU When Use Coda Navigation Values is selected the navigation values from the Coda navigation string are used 5 2 3 2 2 Edgetech FSIU Sub Bottom Sub bottom SB 0512 J Subsystem Active Inactive Pulse Type Information Pulse Type Pulse ID 500 M Min 1000Hz Max 5000Hz i Duration 2mS Ti 3 Internal v 17085 El Jes tie ose pulse 40ms Trigger Divisor unc
186. em specification Up to two channels that use the same trigger can be viewed at the same time in the same window Devices Channels Fast Tags x A Analog Chi Port Recording Nav Input Bottom Tracking 4 63 Analog Ch2 Stbd Recording Nav Input Bottom Tracking HI Analog Ch3 Seismic Recording Nav Input Bottom Tracking Figure 5 11 Application Specific Area Channels Tab The Channels tab of the Application Specific Area Figure 5 11 this page displays the channels that have been activated in the Open Acquisition pop up 60 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 3 2 The default display window is a vertical scrolling dual channel display and the system will pick the most appropriate channels to display In the above example the system has picked Analogue Ch1 Port and Analogue Ch2 Starboard side scan channels this is indicated by the icon next to these channels showing a pair of spectacles Analogue Ch3 Seismic is not selected indicated by its icon showing an open window Author Note not for publication these bullets need checking The Application Specific Area also shows by red or green LEDs the status of recording nav input and bottom tracking as follows e Recording shows green when the channel has been selected for recording and red when not e Nav Input shows green when navigation input has been assigned red when not e Bottom Tracking shows green when automatic bottom tracking has been selected for
187. er Data is usually recorded with more samples per ping than can be displayed in the Data Display Area The number of samples displayed across the width of the screen is limited to a total of 1024 usually 512 samples per display channel however the number of raw data samples is typically much larger than 512 per data channel usually 2560 samples or more By default automatic sub sampling is carried out to allow the whole of the incoming line of data to be displayed by using only one sample to represent the rest of its neighbours If you ve entered an Offset value the automatic sub sample rate will be recalculated so that the whole of the remainder of the line is displayed Manual sub sampling to change the default settings can be selected by editing the text entry boxes To display only every second sample the text entry boxes should read 1 in 2 samples for every sixth sample they should read 1 in 6 samples and so on Manual sub sampling can be used to view the data in more detail To view the data at full resolution set manual sub sampling to 1 in 1 samples However at levels of detail higher than the automatic value the full width of the data cannot be shown on the screen In this case the offset parameter should be used to select the appropriate section of the data line to be displayed Note It is likely that different settings willbe required for single and dual display modes Note Zoom mode can also be us
188. er or plotter is selected this is because a Reset command is being sent to the printer This pause has no effect on the recording of data and the screen display rapidly catches up with the incoming data from the acquisition system tape or disk Before using this option make sure that the printer or plotter to be used is set up correctly and that the cables are connected correctly to the selected output port Hardcopy Output Printer Plotter Output Port EPC GSP 1086 2 EPC HSP 100 Lpt2 HP520 Gpib Ultra Wideline 195 Ultra Wideline 200 GPIB Setup Tag Colour vr Black gt White Reverse Line af Repeat Count fi gt 4 Timeout secs 50 4 Print Line gt Oldest wy Newest 1 Output On Figure 9 1 Hardcopy Output Pop up Window A hardcopy printing device must be connected to the DA System via the parallel port or the GPIB port see Section 4 3 To enable output the appropriate printer or plotter should be chosen from the list in the Printer Plotter window by clicking on its name to match the connected hardcopy device For details of how to set up individual printers see Appendix J The Output Port to which the hardcopy device is connected should also be selected if the GPIB port is selected the GPIB Setup options should be checked see Section 9 1 1 The GPIB Setup pop up appears when the GPIB Setup button is clicked This displays addresses for the DA System and the hardco
189. ered in this manual The sets of instructions and descriptions of the sub systems are grouped together by task Using DA System You should read the following information before using the system The Coda system uses a hardware security device dongle to prevent illicit copying of the system s software The security device is enclosed within the Coda system and under normal circumstances you should be unaware of its presence Notwithstanding any other agree ments the security device is the only proof Coda Technologies will accept of legal software ownership Under no circumstances will a replacement security device be issued unless the originahis returned Loss of the dongle means loss of the software DAT Tapes e Coda systems which are fitted with DAT drives use Digital Data Storage DDS certified Digital Audio Tapes DAT Do not use audio DAT tapes they will not function correctly e Use only DAT tapes with one of the following markings D322 DT Storage ne Media Recognition System e We recommend that you use DAT tapes by the following manufacturers TDK HP Verbatim and Fujifilm Optical Disks e We recommend that you use Maxoptix ISO 14517 rewritable 2 6 GBipolycarbonate disks with 1024 bytes per sector Maxoptix part no 3015385 R W for systems fitted with optical disk drives though other major manufacturers rewritable disks can be used provided that they comply with ISO IEC 14517 Warnings e Do n
190. es voltage_range byte voltage range used to acquire the data fish_height float towfish distance from seabed as samples since trigger event water_depth float total depth of water speed_of_sound float speed of sound in water in metres per second temperature float water temperature time_basis byte whether the time zone is LOCAL or UTC GMT May 2001 for version 2 1 221 seolpueddy Appendices Variable Storage Class Description nav_basis byte whether the navigation data is lat long WGS84 or undefined utm_zone byte the UTM zone number used 0 to 60 speed_over_ground float speed of vessel towfish over ground in knots easting double vessel towfish position E W UTM or lat long northing double vessel towfish position N S UTM or lat long corr_easting double corrected vessel towfish position E W UTM or lat long corr_northing double corrected vessel towfish position N S UTM or lat long course float vessel towfish course heading float vessel towfish heading corrected_heading float corrected vessel towfish heading kp float vessel towfish kp corrected_kp float corrected vessel towfish kp dec float vessel towfish dec corrected_dcc float corrected vessel towfish dec roll float vessel towfish roll pitch float vessel towfish pitch yaw float vessel towfish yaw heave float vessel towfish he
191. es angle 1 745 x 10 2 57 3 radians Area Unit A Unit A Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion acres 4 356 x104 2 296 x 1075 square feet acres 4047 2 471 x 10 4 square metres square feet 9 290 x 10 2 10 76 square metres square miles 3 098 x 106 3 228 10 7 square yards square miles 640 1 562 x 10 3 acres square miles 2 59 0 3861 square kilometres square millimetres 1973 5 067 x 10 4 circular mils Length Distance Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion chain surveyors 66 1 515 x 10 2 feet fathoms 6 0 1667 feet feet 30 48 3 281 x 10 2 centimetres feet 0 3048 3 281 metres inches 2 54 0 3937 centimetres inches 8 333 x 10 2 12 feet May 2001 for version 2 1 263 SUOISISAUON 9 JBSSOJE Glossary amp Conversions Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion inches 1 578 x 1075 6 336 x 104 miles inches 1000 0 001 mils inches 2 778 x 102 36 yards kilometres 3281 3 048 x 10 4 feet leagues 3 0 33 miles approxi mately metres 1 094 0 9144 yards miles nautical 6076 1 1 646 x 10 4 feet miles nautical 1852 5 400 x 10 4 metres miles nautical 1 1508 0 869 miles statute miles statute 1 609 0 6214 kilometres miles statute 5280 1 894 x 10 4 feet yards 3 0 3333 feet US Survey Feet 0 3048006096
192. es and types of pointers as well as the terminology used in Coda manuals If you are new to the DA System we recommend that you read this section before using the system The Quick Start will refresh your memory about operating procedures if you are an experi enced operator of the DA System in data acquisition and playback modes e Part Il Using the DA System contains operating instructions for the DA System They explain HOW TO DO SOMETHING for example image enhancement tape recording through step by step instructions and give hints on how to get the best out of the system These sections are intended for users at any level of experience Is also describes insdetail the external parts of the DA System system the areas of the DA System display and the various menus and menu items available with the system They explain WHAT CAN BE DONE for example the range of adjustment that is possible for TVG correction Reading through these sections reveals the true power and flexibility of the system e Part II Technical Details contains technical information about the DA System system e Part IV Getting Help gives details of our Technical Support service and explains how to solve the most common problems you might encounter using the DA System e Part V Appendices contains information about additional menus Mavigation data and formats provides examples of acquisition setups and explains how to test the DA System It also e
193. es of colour May 2001 for version 2 1 107 7 5 3 Inverting the Colourmap To To invert the data displayed to its negative that is black becomes white and vice kt versa simply click on this smart icon This tool is useful for switching to and from a I paper trace style display 7 5 4 Manipulating the Image Enhancement Graph The Image Enhancement toolkit contains an interactive graph six smart icons left and right output displays and five one of selection switches The graph plots the raw input data signal labelled Input against the brightness of the display pixels labelled Output The icons are used to toggle between round or straight line curves in the graph enter a gamma value for the brightness of the data displayed remove grips points from the graph add grip points reset the graph invert the displayed data to its negative and change the colour mapping of the display 7 5 4 1 Changing the Image Enhancement Graph The Image Enhancement graph consists of lines joined by small square boxes known as grip points There are four on the default version of the graph one at either end and two in the central portion The grip points can be positioned by pressing and dragging on them to alter the shape of the graph 7 5 4 2 Choosing a Straight Line or Spline Fit E This icon is used to either apply a smoothing function called a spline between grip 2 points on the graph or to apply no smoothing re
194. essed e Description is used to select the source of the input data The description is changed by clicking on the option buttons for the active channels The options available are Sidescan Port SS Port Sidescan Starboard SS Stbd Seismic and Other Each sonar type has its own set of input fields e Sonar Type is used to set the type of input sonar The options available depend on the Description setting Setting Description to Seismic provides two options in the Sonar Type field Standard SBP or Custom SBP Standard SBP e Digitised Sweep Time ms a spin box for supplying the time over which the signal is sampled This is two way travel time Start Delay ms the delay in seconds between receiving the trigger and starting to acquire data This can be used for example to reduce the length of the sampled water column The default start delay is 0 milliseconds but can be increased for each data channel in the appro priate spin box e Total Sweep Time ms a label showing the calculated sweep time for the given input values This is two way travel time Custom SBP e This allows you to alter the acquisition settings at a very low level and requires an in depth understanding of the Coda system s software Most users will not need to use this set of options for those who do Appendix A gives some detailed examples To view the incoming data on the channels selected click on the Play button in the Data Control Area When
195. etection amp Advanced Edge May 2001 for version 2 1 71 e Sensitivity this parameter relates the trade off between detection ability and sensitivity to noise When sensitivity is low the algorithm is less sensitive to noise but not as good at tracking weak bottom returns Conversely when sensitivity is high the algorithm is more sensitive to noise but better at tracking poor bottom returns e Offset Bottom Position allows a fixed offset to be applied to the fish height A positive value indicates that the fish height will be increased Method Properties Noise Reduction Smoothing Band Pass bn e low frequency 3dB cut off point for the filter e high frequency 3dB cut off point for the filter Figure 5 30 Method Properties Worksheet Smoothing Threshold Power Density Edge Detection e Smooth Bottom Tracking Over defines the number of pings the bottom tracki smoothed over in the along track direction e Smoothing is not an available option for Advanced Edge Detection Common Functionality Display Processed Data works in the Threshold Power Density and Edge Detection algorithms It displays the characteristics of the detection envelope instead of the bottom return When this option is selected a warning message will be displayed in the Scale Display Data window The Reset Bottom Position button in the Fish Height Seabed Tracking pop up or the Reset Seabed Position icon allows you to reset the bottom posi
196. ethod of breaking down a task into a sequence of actions and decisions in diagrammatic form also known as handshaking following tag operation in PI 00 GeoKit mode a sequence of measurements of the tag s features which may have to be carried out manually rather than automatically by the system The Tag Placement Rules define which measurements are required for a given tag zoom using all the available samples for display no sub sampling of any sort is carried out colour mapping the exponential function used to map incoming intensities to greyscale values the process of redisplaying the image data displayed on screen using anew gamma value Gigabyte approximately 1 000 000 000 bytes DA100 DA200 that area of the screen which holds the current ping number time and cursor position situated above the Data Control Area Coda Technologies software module for geophysical interpreta tion which allows the user to tag events and generate ASCII report output DA100 DA200 a command allowing random access to sonar data stored on magnetic tape or optical disk Global Positioning System a satellite based navigation system the means of interaction of the computer user with the programs running on the computer uses the display the keyboard and the mouseltrackball DA100 DA200 menu items which cannot be selected are greyed out Written in lighter grey text the range of shades from black to white May 2001 for vers
197. f the data the record file if available will be used by the Coda system as the fish height source for data processing in preference to the fish height recorded with the raw data at the time of acquisition Note Fish Height in Corrected Nav will always take precendence Read Write Fish Height Values This controls the automatic reading and writing of the bottom tracked values in Playback mode If this option is on bottom tracked values are read from disk and applied to the data if the method is set to Keep Existing Any other method causes the bottom tracked values to be written to disk If this option is off there will be no reading or writing of bottom tracked values to from disk HT Read write bottom position to from disk Figure 5 33 Fish Height Recomputed File Worksheet To create a Fish Height File select and configure the desired fish height source from the scrolling options list see Section 5 5 1 1 There are seven Fish Height Sources that can be used as inputs to the record file The first fish height source Keep Existing playback mode only is used to retrieve recorded fish height during playback of data see below Fixed Fish Height Copy Fish Height From Channel Use Fish Height Settings From Channel Ayto Tracking Threshold Algorithm Ayto Tracking Power Density Algorithm Ayto Tracking Edge Detection Algorithm Anto Tracking Advanced Edge Detection Figure 5 34 Fish Height Source Selection In additi
198. f the drives but wish to continue with maintenance restart the DA System by selecting Restart from the File menu This menu item is used to restore the previously installed system update returning the system to its state before the update was applied When Restore Previous is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the following set of questions appear in the maintenance window 168 May 2001 for version 2 1 12 3 3 12 3 4 WARNING During update installation the system will be restarted and all playback and acquisition will be aborted Do you wish to proceed with the installation default n y n Press lt y gt to start the installation process The following prompt then appears Do you wish to retain your current navlib default y y n The default is to retain your current navigation library Press lt y gt or press lt Return gt to save this file otherwise press lt n gt Wwa skS va au Buisn A prompt appears asking whether to proceed with restoring the previous DA System as follows Are you sure you wish to restore the previous DAx00 default y n Press lt y gt to confirm the request The restoration proceeds automatically and the operating system of the DA System is rebuilt Copy Update Package This menuitem is used tofcreate a backup copy of an update package on tape or optical disk The following example is for installation from a tape If
199. f the input sidescan signal or the sampled depth for a seismic signal For example with a sampling frequency of 40KHz and 2560 40000 typical speed of sound in water of 1500m s this will give a distance of 0 064 x 1500 2560 samples per line this gives a sampling time of 0 064 seconds For a 96 metres The range is therefore 48 metres Note If samples perping is set too high it may take so long to collect the required number of samples that the nextitrigger is missed This will result in the beginning of the next pulse beingdisplayed as a continuation of the current ping The sampled ping rate indicated by the lines per second in the General Information Area will also appear to halve as every second trigger will be ignored To remove this effect decrease the number of samples per ping Start Delay ms the delay in milliseconds between the start of the trigger and starting to acquire data This can be used for example to reduce the length of the sampled water column The default start delay is 0 milliseconds but can be increased forseach data channel in the appropriate text entry box When a start delay has been entered in the text entry box this will be used in calculations where appro priate Total Sweep Time a label showing the calculated sweep time for the given input values The important parameters for acquisition of shallow seismic data are similar to those for sidescan These parameters are 1 Trigger Pe
200. f voltages which can be digitised by the DA100 DA200 strength brightness magnitude or amplitude of a signal a means of transferring information from one piece of computer equipment to another DA100 DA200 a TTL trigger pulse which is generated by the DA100 DA200 allowing it to trigger other equipment for example to trigger the sonar ping the practice of estimating the value of a variable at a point by setting it between the values of later and earlier samples causing the range of shades for example from black to white to be reversed so that items which were coloured black become white and vice versa Input Output Industry Standard Architecture a type of signal bus used inside PCs the noise present on a signal causing observations which should be identical to differ Kilobytes 1 024 bytes Kilometre post distance along the survey line or pipeline in kilo metres Postscript printed so that the bottom of the Postscript document is aligned with the long edge of the sheet of paper the along track distance from the datum point on the vessel to the towfish Light Emitting Diode small coloured light attached to electronic equipment all the data arising from a given sonar ping for sidescan this implies both port and starboard channels the cabling and interfacing standards which allow a collection of computers to be connected to each other to share data and resources for example Ethernet Token Ring
201. fied Pressing and dragging with the left mouse button defines the zoom area Releasing the mouse button causes the zoom pop up window to appear It remains on the screen until dismissed by pressing the Done button The Processing Zoom function magnifies a selected area of the display and by default displays the data at full resolution in the zoom pop up You can change the setting to zoom to full screen or zoom to fixed magnification in the Zoom Mode pop up The selected mode is applied when you select an area to be magnified 128 May 2001 for version 2 1 8 6 8 6 1 An area of interest in the display data can be viewed at greater resolutions using the Process ing Zoom menu item Section 8 5 contains details of how to zoom in on regions of the display area Full Resolution mode displays the true resolution of the data without sub sampling This is useful for spotting small features in sidescan or sub bottom data however the zoomed image may appear distorted compared to the screen display for if the screen display is sub sampled the zoomed image appears stretched in the across track dimension This is because no sub sampling is carried out in the along track dimension by the DA System Full Screen mode enlarges the selected area to the size of the display area If the area of zoom is small however the individual pixels in the zoomed image tend to be more prominent than the magnified feature Fixed Magni fication mode combines
202. from within a specified range in a ping Frequency filtering is primarily intended for the processing of sub bottom seismic data though it may be used for sidescan sonar data The Time Varying Filtering pop up allows you to design a suite of filters with which to process data in both acquisition and playback You can design up to four digital filters for each input channel and you can choose from one of five types of filter For each filter you can specify the start and end positions between which the filter applies The order of the filters remains the same throughout operation You can also specify whether the filter is fixed or continuously varying with time When the filter is fixed the same filter is applied to each data sample When the filter is continuously time varying the cut off frequency of the filter is modified at each data sample giving a smooth varying filter 112 May 2001 for version 2 1 The Time Varying Filtering pop up shows level of tab forms is used to select which i select an input channel s filter number T can choose from one of five filters lo BS and Zap To select one of the filters of changing the contents of the bottom frame i the filter s parameter set May 2001 for version 2 1 113 Using the DA Syst em ce eee iros ure once By 8 te em fe Se se CODA DA200 Og amp ER Time Varying Filtering AN Channel 1 Channel 2 Fit Fiter2 Fiter3 Filter
203. ft m gt to bring up the Maintenance Menu The commands that appear on the Maintenance Menu differ slightly depending on whether you are using a tape system or an optical disk system see Figure 12 3 this page The tape system has an Erase Tape command whereas the optical disk system has three alternative commands Format Optical Disk Repair Optical Disk and Unmount All Disks Figured2 3 The Maintena au for a tape system left and an optical disk system right Install Update Caution The DA Sj system musik File menu at th end of installings so system to malfunction OWn by selecting Shutdown from the pdate Failure to do so may cause the Note Before selecting this item make sure tt unsure about the status of the drives but w selecting Restart from the File menu Note The default Nav Lib file will be automat to remember to save the current Nav Library This menu item is used to install a software upgrade from DAT or Exabyte tape floppy di optical disk When Install Update is selected the system asks for the install password If the typed correctly the following set of instructions and questions appear in the up Do NOT switch off power during installation WARNING During update installation the system will be restarted and all playback and acquisition will be aborted Do you wish to proceed with the installation default n y n Press lt y gt to start the installation pro
204. further selections associated with the menu item This hierarchical structure enables the comprehensive functions of the DA System to be accessed in a way that is logical and easy to understand In the example above from ings menu selecting Playback Speed will open a pop up which contains three possible le screen click on the Apply button to confirm the Click on the Cancel button to cancel the changes and the Factory settings as the default setting after the de ped click on the Factory button and then the Store button Figure 3 17 Load and Save Action Buttons Click on the Load button to load previously saved settings for the current pop up Click on Save button to save the current pop up settings to file for reloading at a later date 26 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 3 10 File Selection Window 3 3 11 Hard Disk Erl ect TempProject Setup corrnay files oni dure to MS DOS or Unix so all files can be listed by ith for in a TXT ending can be listed by entering inue to select until all required files are eate New Group Existing groups can To remove a nav file from icon A window is popped the No button to abort the delete Load Settings Figure 3 19 page 28 shows an example you click on the Load button in the Format May 2001 for version 2 1 27 Load Defaut Load Factory Default TempProiect R BetupO0002 ke the default file the selected file the name of the
205. g the processed navigation data so that the positions reported are as accurate as possible The positional data storedon tape or optical disk is not modified therefore the processed navigation file must be present and readable by the system either on floppy or hard disk if corrected positions are required This option is only available in playback mode As no corrected navigation data is available during data acquisition the item appears greyed out and cannot be selected The heading is used to calculate off track positions so it is essential that corrected easting northing AND heading are included in thecorrected navigation file to ensure accurate reporting of positions off the survey track To incorporate corrected navigation data 1 Select File Corrected Nav Input The Corrected Nav Input pop up appears seetFigure 6 7 page 89 This pop up can be selected from any open window but cannot be duplicated if already displayed Analog Analog Analog Ch1 Port Ch2 Stbd Ch3 Seismic Corrected Nav Group f Y Figure 6 7 The Corrected Nav Input Pop up Window 2 Click on the spectacles icon to show all available files The Carrected Navigations Contents pop up will appear see May 2001 for version 2 1 89 ome dp 1 OO nav pentland cny ome dp 1 OO nav mb4 env ome dp 1 OO nav codademo cny Floppy Disk f env codademd Using the DA System tem s hard disk to increase the speed with which the d to the Correct
206. ger INT set to a period of 0 1 seconds When the Play data control button is pressed data should begin to scroll down the screen The digitised data will be whatever signals are present at the analogue BNC inputs Navigation Loopback Plug a 9 way or 25 way D type connector with pins 2 and 3 shorted together into the COM2 navigation data input connector This can be done with the system powered up Click on the Title Bar with the right mouse button see Appendix A and select the Start Loopback Test menu item From the second Nav Loopback Menu that this produces select the Coda format nav string Start the DA System in acquisition mode then open navigation input and select the Coda data format Select Nav input on in the Nav Data Input menu then click on the Nav Format QC button to make sure that navigation data is being acquired correctly by the system see Section 5 4 4 The system generates a beep every time a navigation string is output through the serial port until the End Nav Loopback Test item in the Title bar menu is selected Record Playback Having completed the two tests above insert a blank tape or optical disk into the relevant drive and begin recording see Sections5 2 Allow several minutes of recording to take place stop recording Attempt to play back the data checking that the time and position are updated correctly Off line Noise Test Short the signal input by attaching a 50Q termination BNC connector to the inpu
207. gger Input Trigger type TTL Equivalent TTL loads 1 Overvoltage Protection 40V Minimum Pulse Width 40ns Trigger Type Positive edge sensitive Throughput 250KH Resolution 12 bits Input Impedance ON cha Input Impedance OFF channel 100MW 1 CMRR 80dB typ 60Hz Sample Clock 5MHz 15ppm accuracy Internal Trigger Clock 5MHz 15ppm ac Parallel Output Bi directional parallel port with Enhanced Parallel Port support Serial Input Output Baud rates 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Handshaking Xon Xoff Hardware or None Data bits 7 or 8 Parity Even Odd or None Stop bits 1 or 2 Connector 9 way D type male Input on pin 2 ground on pin 5 or 25 way D type male Input on pin 2 ground on pin 7 GPIB Output Data Rate Up to 1MByte second May 2001 for version 2 1 183 Compatibility IEEE488 1 IEEE488 2 SH1 AH1 T5 TES L3 LE3 SR1 PP1 PP2 RL1 Cl C2 C3 C4 CS El E2 Connector IEEE488 standard 24 pin 15 7 Monitor Output Vertical Refresh Rate 80Hz Horizontal Line Rate 65 5KHz Display Resolution 1040x780 pixels Video Signal Analogue 1 0V p p 75W positive 184 May 2001 for version 2 1 Part IV Getting Help v 186 May 2001 for version 2 1 16 Getting Help 16 1 The Help Menu The Help menu gives you access to more information about the DA System and its modules and about Coda Technologies The Help Menu Figure
208. ght case 4 Attach the front and back covers to the system flight case Follow any other packing instructions that come with your system May 2001 for version 2 1 175 176 May 2001 for version 2 1 Part Ill DA System Technical Details 178 May 2001 for version 2 1 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 Technical Description of the DA System DA System Hardware The DA System is based on cost effective but proven and reliable PC technology In recent years the processing power available at low cost on a PC platform has developed to the point where it is now possible to undertake complex real time signal processing tasks without resorting to the use of specialised digital signal processing devices The DA System uses a high specification Intel Pentium or compatible processor with 32MB or 64MB of random access memory RAM The industry standard high bandwidth PCI interface is used for JO operations where appropriate All of the components on the PCI and ISA buses in the DA System are industry standard cost effective and reliable A high bandwidth SCSI 2 bus interface is provided this allows the processor to communicate with both the system s hard disk with up to 4 3GB of available storage depending on the system and the SCSI tape or optical disk drives at rates of up to 10MB sec The system s easy to use graphic user interface GUI and waterfall display software make use of the graphics cap
209. h follows should clarify the above theory Note Please note that this theory and the following examples only take into account those parameters for accurate digital data acquisition Parameters for the shallow seismic sonar itself e g sonar frequency which determines the sonar range has not been addressed here These parameters must be determined by the sonar engineer As long as the information here is used correctly then the sonar data will be recorded correctly at the correct resolution and sampling rate Shallow Seismic Custom Settings Example 1 Requirement A range of 50m is required 20 metres water depth and 30 metres through clay Explanation Typical settings can be derived as follows The sweep time can be calculated using the expression derived above PenetrationRequired Ti oar a ES RFEESESE SE SweepTime VelocityOfSoundInWater Therefore using a velocity of 1500m s May 2001 for version 2 1 203 Appendices A 3 2 50 SweepTime 1500 0 033s 33 3ms To select the correct sampling frequency and ping rate the following expression is used SamplesPerPing Sweep nes SamplingFrequency The number of samples per ping should ideally be a multiple of 512 as this is the width of a display channel on the DA System The sampling frequency should be high enough to prevent aliasing and so a minimum sampling frequency of 20KHz should be used If this minimum value of 20KHz were used the number of sam
210. hancement undersampling Unix update user specific UTC UTM watch pointer water depth waterfall display window Windows write protect X Window zoom zoom mode 280 May 2001 for version 2 1 Transistor Transistor Logic an electrical interfacing standard for digital signals Time Varying Gain an amplification applied to sidescan sonar signals which compensates for the spreading loss of the signal which is roughly proportional to the log of the range in metres of the DA 100 DA200 a set of facilities which allow users to alter the time varying gain applied to the incoming sonar signal sampling at too low a sampling frequency so that aliasing occurs a multi user timesharing operating system with real time facilities uses the X Window graphical user interface a revision to the DA 00 DA200 software incorporating new features and or bug fixes of files the files in the DA100 DA200 system which are placed there by users for example database files smoothed navigation data files Coordinated Universal Time the world time standard equivalent to GMT Universal Transverse Mercator a form of geographical projec tion which allows positions to be measured relative to each other in metres over a restricted area the pointer which appears on the display screen when the DA100 DA200 is waiting for an operation to complete the depth of waterinput into the system the user may define this relati
211. hannels these range from 12dB to 12dB May 2001 for version 2 1 53 Wo s S ya ou Buisn Using the DA System Use the Diagnostic Aid toggle buttons if you want to send information from the ACI card of your sonar device to the DA System Status Bar or to generate a test signal 5 2 3 Acquiring Data over a Local Area Network Analogue Network Digital Network 1 N Network 2 Si Network 3 _1 Device Active lnactive Networked Device Type Edgetech X Star MIDAS iy Network IP Address reg i jd far SLA 4 Lock Test Connection This version of the X Star is controlled by a MIDAS top side box Network Communications This Coda system s name is choice The IP address is 194 70 215 113 Communication Port Number 49999 hd Derive Ping Timestamp From Coda Nav Time x m X Star Nav Decode 1 Position _ Heading 1 Course 1 Speed 1 Pitch Roll 1 Temperature 1 Annotation Text _ Layback 1 Fish Offset dgeech Figure 5 6 Open Acquisition pop up showing Network Acquisition 5 2 3 1 Networking to an Edgetech MIDAS XSTAR system Note Before Starting please read through instructions and ensure that youyare confident that you can complete the configuration before attempting to change anything Both the Coda system and the XSTAR system must have the same network address the first three entries in an IP address The simplest way to do this is to change the Coda sys
212. haracteristics of the seabed or water column may result in unpre dictable performance by the automated bottom tracking algorithm in which case the Fixed Fish Height setting should be used From Telemetry Data is available only in acquisition mode and causes the height to be read from the nav string this setting can be used if an altimeter is fitted to the towfish and the altitude is being sent from the towfish to the navigation computer If no height is entered via the nav string fish height will be set to 0 e The option Keep Existing can only be selected in playback mode and causes the previously recorded fish height to beused The fish height input will vary depending on system settings it can be via Corrected Navigation Fish Height Record File or Existing Value from Raw Acquisition File see Section 5 5 1 6 e Selecting Fixed Fish Height causes the fish height to be set to a user defined height The height can be entered in metres milliseconds or samples using the scrolling options list It remains fixed at this value until youchoose a different fish height setting or change the value of the fixed fish height e Copy Fish Height from Another Channel allows the fish height value to be copied from another channel using the scrolling options list For example channel 1 could be set to Auto Tracking Threshold Algorithm and channel 2 then set to copy the height from channel 1 This could be useful when the data in channel 2 is too no
213. he user through the TVG Enhancement option in the Processing menu see Section 7 5 The ideal at this point is to obtain a signal whose mean and minimum values are constant The display sub system receives a constant stream of full resolution 12 bit digital data which hastbeen time stamped by the acquisition system and has had navigation data appended to it The display resolution however is limited to 8 bits using a colourmap or palette to match incoming digital values to displayed intensities or colours Moreover the data is usually acquired at a line length which exceeds the display resolution 1024 pixels or 512 pixels per display channel Therefore the first task of the display sub system is to decimate or sub sample the incoming data The sub sampling is carried out according to the values entered in the Left Right Display Channel window in the Settings menu this reduces the incoming pixels in the displayed channels to a number which can be displayed on the screen The 12 bit data is then reduced to 8 bits for screen display again based on parameters input by the user in the Scale Display Data window of the Settings menu This defines a linear mapping of the 12 bit data to 8 for display however the distribution of intensities in the 12 bit data or the 8 bit data derived from it is unlikely to be uniform Therefore a final series of adjustments to the data can be carried out allowing a non linear mapping of 8 bit values to displayed in
214. he Band Stop Filtering pop up window settings for the data displayed onsthe screen The bottom half of the display shows data before low pass filtering was applied while the top half of the display shows the data with the illustrated Band Stop Filtering settings applied Time Varying Filtering T Er Ur mi Channel 1 N AChannel2 Channel3 A Channel 4 N Amt Fiter2 N Filtera N Filter 4 A Dr Filter Active Filter Type El vl LP vi HP vil Aa vii pes l znr m Apply Filter Limits From To v Sensor y End of Data 21 7 al se Seabed 3 0 Eaj ms y Seabed 1 inal gt Time E ms gt Time Ei r Frequency Design Parameters 3 dB Hz Viewing Range Input y Screen Figure 7 18 Band Zap Filtering e Zap Zap filtering suppresses all frequencies in the data leaving the data between the start and end positions at the DC level of 0 volts There are no parameters to enter Typically this filter is used to remove noise in the water column 116 May 2001 for version 2 1 Figure 7 18 page 116 shows the Data Display Area with the Band Zap Filtering pop up window settings for the data displayed on the screen The bottom half of the display shows data before low pass filtering was applied while the top half of the display shows the data with the illustrated Band Zap Filtering settings applied In each filter tab there is a Filter Active on off toggle and three frames for setting up
215. he Contents tab and define the tag types to be included in the report although the only tag type which can be created on the DA System is Unknown changes to the tag types may be necessary if the active database is one loaded from GeoKit or the P1100 5 Select the Reporting Report Generation option May 2001 for version 2 1 153 The Report Generating pop up appears 6 Select the tag file for which you wish to generate a report If a tag file has been created for the data currently in use this file is automatically highlighted in the pop up 7 Select the report destination Text Window Printer or Floppy 8 Click on the Generate Report button 10 10 1 1 Report Setup The Report Setup pop up provides the options for defining the contents and style of the report Each of the aspects of the Report Setup has its own list of options contained on the appropriate pop up Format Options Contents e Report Setup pop up window resulting in a single combined report setup ection 3 3 12 describe how to load and save settings Figure 10 11 The Report Setup Format Tab Form Clicking on the Format tab of the Report Setup pop up allows you t r the number of columns reported and the order in which they are printed Report column entries may be added or deleted To do so select one of the report columns from the scrolling form by clicking on a column number The Add Item or Delete Item button should then be selected You m
216. he DA System e Af line width of 1024 samples per data channel requires a sample period of 33 5ms 1900 1624 0 0327ms or a sample frequency of 0 0327 implies a sample frequency of 45 9KHz Therefore choose a sample frequency of about 45 9KHz 30 58KHz Similarly 1536 samples e Allow a dead time of at least 2ms at the end of each line The discarded signal for the starboard channel should be set to around 33 5ms but can be adjustedato ensure thatthe outgoing pulse of the starboard data channel is aligned with the beginning of the acquired data for the starboard channel This is because the delay for the first data period for the first data channel is 0 but about half the sweep period for the second data channel The line reversed field will be set by default for the Port data channel as this channel is received backwards The line reversed field for the Starboard data channel is not set The range setting for both channels is 50m to ensure that the DA System can calculate measure ments correctly in spite of the fact that the distance of a sample from the start of the line is not proportional to the speed of propagation of sound through water The trigger will be trigger A ands set to external The voltage range output by the Ultra is 0 5V so the DA System should be set to its 5V range Note As the Ultra produces output on a single composite data channel the output analogue output of the Ultra should b
217. he Title bar Menu is not possible then the operating system has crashed Remove all tapes from the tape drive units and use the Reset switch on the DA System front panel to cause the system to reboot itself see Section 12 2 Channel X samples for longer than its trigger period e This error message can appear if the total time spent sampling by a given channel plus the start delay for that channel add up to more than the trigger period selected internal triggering only Either increase the sampling frequency to obtain the desired number of samples in a shorter period or if this is not possible for example the sample rate is at the maximum value reduce the start delay to decrease the overall time from the arrival of the trigger pulse to the end of sampling see Section 5 2 Hardware fault LED on DAT tape drive e Ifthe right hand amber LED on a DAT tape drive stays lit a hardware fault has occurred on the drive Shut down and power off the DA System system and re boot it to cure the fault If this has no effect contact Coda Technologies The system does not accept incoming navigation data even though the correct string format has been selected Ensure that the format you have selected has not been edited to make it incompatible with May 2001 for version 2 1 191 djeH Buje Getting Help the incoming navigation data If a standard string is being used for example Coda NMEA select Default Formats in the Nav
218. he second line of the display will show the type of interface If the mode first three character after the shows 232 then the printer is in RS232 interface mode This can be changed as follows Firstly ensure that the printer is in standby mode This can be checked by examining the three characters before the If this does not display SBY the printer is not in standby mode The printer can be put into standby mode by pressing the keys lt SHIFT ON LINE TEST gt The STANDBY light will be lit and the display will show SBY before the character The display will be similar to Figure J 4 page 242 120 138 MODE DIGITAL 232 200 SBY L R Figure J 4 Typical Display for Ultra Printer in Standby Mode Change to Centronics interfaceby pressing the SETUP Key twice lt SETUP gt lt SETUP gt The display will now show INTERFACE SERIAL 232 200 SBY L R Figure J 5 Typical Display for UltrasPrinter Interface Setup Press the Clear Enter key to change the Interface lt CLEAR ENTER gt The display will now show INTERFACE CENTRONICS CEN 200 SBY L R Figure J 6 Ultra Printer Centronics Interface Setup Now exit the Setup menu by pressing lt SETUP gt The display will now show CENTRONICS INTERFACE Figure J 7 Ultra Printer Set up to Receive Centronics Interface Prepare the printer to receive data by putting it in RUN mode lt SHIFT ON LINE TEST gt 242 M
219. he tape drive e Always remove tapes from the tape drives before powering down the system Failure to do result in data loss or damage to the tape drive uter data standard cartridges Do not use 8mm video cartridges as they are sh quality for the storage of computer data netic tape it is recommended that Exabyte tapes are passed once a year to prevent sticking 232 May 2001 for version 2 1 Optical Disk Drive Units Warning Do not look inside the optical disk drive or use a mirror to look inside the drive The laser can cause eye damage The drive does not require user maintenance If the drive does not operate properly do not try to fix it yourself Contact Coda Technologies 1 1 Drive Controls Activity Light Shutter Door Mandal Eject Eject Disk Button Figure I 1 Drive Switch and LED Eject Button Pressing this button causes the disk to stop spinning and then eject the cartridge This button has no function while the Prevent Media Removal command from the host is in effect or if a command from the host is being executed Activity Light Shown below are the operating states indicated by the LED Red flickering The drive detected a Self Diagnostic CUDG error A detailed list of error codes is provided in Chapter 5 Green on The drive is being powered up the drive is reading data Green flickering The drive is executing a command Orange on The drive holds write data in the buffer memory
220. hooting in the Alden Electronics Operator s Manual Nosoutput e Check the printer is on line and ready e Check the parallel interface is selected ADDR display on the printer shows e Check the parallel cable connection Note that both the printer and the DA System must be switched off before removing or connecting a parallel cable e Check that the correct printer port has been selected from the DA System File Hardcopy Output menu item and that the Output On toggle is activated in the Hardcopy Output pop up Ensure that either the OK or Apply button has been clicked at the bottom of the pop up Slow output e Check the printer HEAD CALIBRATION setting is OFF e Check the printer s paper type setting shows appendedito the medium selected e Check that the DA System has the correct playback speed selected in the Settings Playback Speed menu item This should be set to Fast as Possible Error message appears when the DA System is powered up e Shut down the DA System ensure that both the DA System and the printer are powered off Switch the DA System on after switching on the printer J 2 EPC 1086 2 Thermal Printer The DA System can output data in real time during acquisition to the EPC 1086 2 thermal printer via a parallel interface Note Before connecting the printer to the DA System both the printer and the DA System must be shut down and the power supplies to both switched off see Section 13 1 The DA
221. hows the triggers to be used with specific channels The triggers available are shown in the Triggers tab form see Figure 5 3 page 48 On the DA System Trigger defaults to Trig A where the selected Description is SS Port or SS Stbd and defaults to Trig B when the Description is Seismic e Voltage is used to select the voltage range of the active channels Each channel can have a different voltage range The voltage range is changed by clicking on the option buttons of the active channels and selecting a new value The options available depend on the digitisation option purchased but the typical range is 1 25V 2 5V 5V and 10V Selecting the voltage range that most closely matches the range of the input signal is the best option The setting for the input voltage range is crucial to the acquisition of high quality data When 50 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 2 1 4 acquisition has started it is worth examining the Scale Display Data oscilloscope trace to ensure that the voltage range is set appropriately No useful information is usually held in the outgoing pulse of sidescan sonar or sub bottom profilers the outgoing pulse may be clipped allowing a smaller input voltage range to be selected than would otherwise be the case For sidescan sonar operations it is best not to finalise the input voltage range until the towfish is positioned at a typical survey altitude from the seabed so that the voltage range of the received signal can be ass
222. ic Return with Black Level Set Setting the black level can be simulated by applying the transfer characteristics in the Image Enhancement graph shown in Figure 7 10 this page This also simulates half wave rectification 110 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 6 1 7 7 7 1 7 7 1 1 Refreshing the Display When changes are made to items in the Settings or Display menus their effect is seen from the newest line of data being processed onwards Selecting Refresh Display displays the effect of such changes for the whole screen The effect of any changes for example filtering without the data having to be replayed Depending on the amount of processing being asked of the system the DA System may take up to 5 seconds to redraw the screen Note There may be a few seconds delay between selecting this item and the screen being redrawn depending on the amount of processing being used by the system at the time Processing Sidescan Data Removing Noise Noise from natural sources such as currents or marine life or from man made sources such as ships may affect the quality of the raw data It can obscure or degrade features of interest and should therefore be minimised if not eradicated Cross Track Smoothing The Processing Cross track Smoothing option removes unwanted spikes of noise within a ping dn sidescan sonar data It does this by locally averaging the data in each ping You can contro the extent of smoothing
223. ich is either taken from the Nav String or entered by the user see Section 6 6 4 e range displays either the true range in meters for a side scan window or sweep time in msecs for a seismic window e cursor pointer the position directly under the cursor on the screen namely Eastings Northings and Kp The information is colour coded to indicate the channel over which the cursor is positioned channel colour is indicated in the top right of the display window The position is fully geo corrected and is calculated using the navigation data stored with each ping If the fish height is known the position is automatically slant range corrected Similarly af corrected navigation data mode is available this can also be used to provide a further stage of correction Positions that are off track arecalculated using the geographical ping position heading and across track distance from the position as shown in Figure 6 9 page 83 For accurate off track positions it is essential that the heading is correct Note To calculate an off track position lat longyis converted to UTM the position is calculated and then this position is converted back from UTMbo lat long The format in which thecursor information is displayed can be changed from eastings and northings to lat long and vice versa by clicking on the appropriate one of selection button in the Display Nav Basis Type frame of the Nav Data Settings pop up 6 10 2 The General Information
224. igation Format Editor accessed as Add New Format in the Nav Input pop up in the File menu DAT tapes recorded on instrument recorders for example TEAC Sony will not replay e DAT tapes which have been recorded using instrument recorders for example TEAC and Sony recorders cannot be replayed directly using the DA System These tapes have not been recorded in a computer compatible digital format and must be re digitised to replay them using the DA System The instrument recorder outputs can be connected to the BNC input channels on the DA System see Section 4 3 However navigation infor mation will inevitably be missing resulting in many of the on screen measurement and location functions being unavailable The keyboard short cut keys lt Control c gt menu shortcut keys stop working e Ensure the Caps Lock key is off e Shut down the machine using the Shutdown option in the File menu e Make sure that the pointer is located in the Data Display Area The tape unit LED does notflash continuously during data recording to tape although the correct data acquisition procedure has been followed e Provided the HDD light on the DA System front panel is flashing continuously data will be recording successfully see Section 4 1 1 The tape drive LED not flashing continu ously does not indicate a problem with data acquisition Write protect error message appears during data acquisition e Ifthe tape has been write protected
225. ils of how to format optical disks listed in Section 12 3 10 1 Caring for the Drive To maintain drive performance observe these precautions 1 Remove all media before moving the drive 2 Avoid a dirty or dusty environment Maintain the environmental specifications temperature humidity etc shown in section 5 9 3 Do not use non standard non specified or non approved media in the drive Do not use damaged cartridges 4 Do not stick objects into the drive screwdrivers etc Objects can damage internal mecha nisms mechanically or through static discharge 5 Do not turn the drive on or off during cartridge loading or ejection 6 Do not move bump or shock the drive during operation Caution If the drive emits noises or vibrations immediately eject thedmedia and turn off the power to the drive Performance Specifications 2 6 GB 4X FORMAT CAPACITY ON LINE 512 BPS 1024 BPS 1 519 GB 1 318 GB ROTATIONAL SPEED 3868 rpm SPINDLE SEQUENCE 4 0 1 9 sec May 2001 for version 2 1 235 s Ipu ddy Appendices 2 6 GB 4X FORMAT UP DOWN TIME typical PLASTIC DISK SEEK TIME Average 1 3 full stroke lt 19 msec Track to track lt 0 3 msec Mamimum full stroke lt 55 msec LATENCY Average 7 8 msec TRANSFER RATE FROM TO DISK 24 48 Mbits sec AT SCSI Async Maximum 5 Mbytes sec AT SCSI Fast Sync Maximum 10 Mbytes sec
226. in this document Coda Technologies Ltd assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage caused by errors or omissions or by statements of any kind in this document its updates sup plements or special editions whether such errors omissions or statements result from negli gence accident or any other cause Coda Technologies further assumes no liability arising out of the application or use of any product or system described herein nor any liability for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this document Coda Technologies disclaims all warranties regarding the information contained herein whether expressed implied or statu tory including implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Coda Technologies makes no representation that the interconnection of products in the manner de scribed herein will not infringe on existing or future patent rights nor do the descriptions con tained herein imply the granting of any licence to make use or sell equipment constructed in accordance with this description Coda Technologies reserves the right to make changes to any products herein without further no tice Trademarks Coda Technologies has made every effort to supply trademark information about company names products and services mentioned in this manual Trademarks indicated below were de rived from various sources UNIX is a registered trademark UnixWare is a trademark of The San
227. information none 0 ship 1 towfish defaults to towfish if not set roll instantaneous roll roll to starboard is positive degrees seconds seconds in minute 0 to 59 9999 seconds not required if nav_time is set seconds in day number of seconds since 00 00 seconds smg speed made good knots 214 May 2001 for version 2 1 D 2 D 3 value_field_name Incoming Value Interpretation Units speed of sound speed of sound in water metres sec surge instantaneous surge starboard positive metres sway instantaneous sway starboard positive metres tdop time dilution of precision none temperature water temperature degrees Celsius utm zone UTM zone number 0 to 60 none default is 0 if not set vdop vertical dilution of precision none v flap ROTV vertical flap setting up positive degrees yaw instantaneous yaw starboard is positive degrees year year AD year not required if nav_time is set Navigation Groups The purpose of the navigation group list is to define a set of navigation library entries which are all legaL t the same time the navigation computer is allowed to send whichever type it prefers or makes most sense For a group to be legal each of the navigation library entries must be able to be distinguished from each other when they are received this means that the key field see Section D 1 must uniquely identify each member of the groupw It should be noted that all the e
228. input how to set the fish height and how to record the data If you have used the Coda system before Section 2 Quick Start provides a summary of these procedures Before starting data acquisition you should carry out some or all of the off line tests that are described in Section 12 they enable you to check the system for sane operation without using external inputs from sidescan units or navigation computers Then carry out the tasks in the Mobilisation Checklist in Appendix M to make sure that the system is correctly integrated with the survey spread The DA System can acquire survey data from both analogue and digital sources Your dongle part of the DA System s hardware will be pre programmed by Coda to meet your requirements for either analogue or digital acquisition The following chapter contains information on both Analogue and Digital acquisition Refer to either Section 5 2 1 for Analogue Acquisition or Section 5 2 2 for Digital Acquisition Figure 5 1 page 46 shows the procedures for using the DA System from connecting the systemdand powering up to acquiring data powering down and getting the system ready for transportation Each of these procedures is described in detail in this part of the manual If you are unfamiliar with the operation of the DA System system we recommend that you read through this section thoroughly before using the system for on line acquisition May 2001 for version 2 1 45 Connect S
229. input or be entered manually see Sectiont5 5 Ping Rate the rate at which the data was acquired this may differ from the playback rate Line Name a user defined label marking specific parts of the survey see Section 6 6 4 Fix No a reference obtained from the nav input see Section 5 4 4 Kp the Kilometre post chainage value obtained from the navigation interface which cam be used in place of time as a basis for searches through the data DCC Distance Cross Course the across track distance of the fish from the survey centre line in metres This can be entered manually or taken from the RS232 nav input Section 6 6 4 Layback the along track distance in metres from the ship position to the fish position which can be entered manually or taken from the RS232 nav input see Section 6 6 4 Fish Cross Track Offset the across track distance from the ship position to the fish position A positive offset indicates an offset to the right starboard and a negative offset indicates the offset is to the left port This may be input manually or taken from the RS232 nav input see Section 6 6 4 Along track Resolution the distance between pings in the along track direction Cross track Resolution the distance between samples in the across track direction Slant Range the maximum slant range from the sonar transducer see Section 7 7 2 1 Sample Frequency the rate in Hz at which data samples are taken This is defined while setting up the
230. ion 2 1 271 3 Aresso 5 Glossary amp Conversions grip grip point GUI half wave rectify handshaking hard disk hardcopy hardware hardware handshaking heave compensation unit height trigger high contrast high pass filtering high resolution image enhancement image processing indented information window 272 May 2001 for version 2 1 see grip point DA100 DA200 a point on an interactive graph signified by a small square which can be moved by users using the mouse trackball to alter the shape of the graph Graphical User Interface remove those portions of an incoming analogue signal which are below some threshold value usually 0 volts of RS 232 interfaces the means by which the starting and stopping of data transfers is effected this can be carried out in hardware or software the magnetic disk which is permanently attached to a computer system printed output the generation of printed output electronic components handshaking carried out by electronic components without the intervention of any computer program a piece of equipment external to the sonar which monitors the vessel s heave and varies the timing of the trigger pulse sent to recording equipment for example the DA 00 DA200 so that theeffect of vessel heave is largely eliminated used for sub bottom profiling PI100 the minimum height of the bottom of the pipe above the seabed that will trigger the
231. is free IP address and sub net mask see Section 12 3 4 When finished your system will reboot 3 On theANetwork tab of the of the Acquisition pop up see Figure 5 10 page 59 enter in Network IP Address the IP address of the Reson Seabat 8125 4 Press Test Connection This activates a ping test on the Reson Seabat 8125 IP address to check the integrity of the network connection If successful the system will return the message IP address is alive 5 Use the Lock button to prevent accidental change and save the set up using the Save button On the Reson Seabat 8125 itis possible to configure the UDP base port number Get the details of this port number and enter it in the Network Tab Form Port Number spin box see Figure 5 10 page 59 The final selection can be made inthe Derive Ping Time Stamp From spin box to either Coda Nav Time or Reson Seabat System Time see Figure 5 10 page 59 5 3 Getting High Quality Data Step 3 QC by Viewing the Data It s obviously important to be able to see the data and check that it looks correct without any obvious noise problems for example This section gives a brief summary of how to get your data scrolling on the screen so that you can QC it For more complete information refer to Section 6 5 3 1 Choosing Which Channels to View Coda s acquisition system can collect up to 8 channels of data and can display all of these n the display simultaneously depending on the syst
232. ising the DA200 251 253 for mobilising the PI100 255 for mobilising TrackPlot Mosaic 256 for saving loading tag files 257 Coda data format summary 221 Coda navigational data string Coda format 207 Coda date format 208 Coda systems main display 21 menu features 24 25 pointer types 3 1 32 security device 3 Coda Technologies information 188 Colour Coding 23 Colour Maps 122 Common Funcitonality 72 connecting the system 43 Control Area in Playback Mode 79 93 Controlling Playback Speed 88 Conventions Used in this Manual 17 conversion table 263 265 copying data tapes 161 update package 169 copying data tapes 161 corrected navigation data incorporating 89 91 corrected navigational data Corrected Nav Input pop up 89 File Selection window 27 format 209 cross track smoothing 111 D DA200 287 applications 15 back panel 39 connecting 43 data flow 179 file structure 181 front panel 37 40 hardware 179 operating system 179 powering down 175 powering up 44 preparing for transportation 175 restarting 33 setting up 44 shutting down 175 software and GUI 179 specifications 183 version 188 data acquisition See also data acquisition mode acquisition parameters acquisition setups data acquisition mode 49 50 data channels Channels 1 4 tab form 47 other channels 51 seismic channels 50 sidescan channels 49 Data Display Area 21 Data Display Window Identification 23 data playback incorporating corrected naviga
233. isition Mode 2 82 General Information Area in Playback Mode 1 96 General Information Area in Playback Mode 2 97 getting help technical support 188 troubleshooting 189 Getting High Quality Data Bottom Tracking 67 glossary 267 280 Goto a Specific KP Chainage 95 Goto command Goto pop up 80 93 moving between tags 145 moving to a specific position 95 2 moving to a specific tag 94 145 Goto File command 85 Goto Specific Fix Number 95 Goto Specific Ping Number 95 GPIB output 183 GPIB setup 138 H hardcopy devices Alden 9315 CTP series printer 237 EPC 1086 2 thermal printer 238 hardcopy output GPIB Settings pop up 138 Hardcopy Output pop up 137 Help Help menu 187 see also getting help HP C1533 C1599A environmental specifications 230 head cleaning 229 hints and precautions 230 LED interpretation 229 recommended tapes 229 I Image Enhancement 106 toolkit 108 Incoming Nav Data Format 63 install password 173 installing updated software 167 interpretation checklist 259 260 K key shortcuts 33 187 L left channel channel settings 105 Load button 26 Load Remote button 149 loading navigation lib 170 pop up settings 27 28 report setups 154 tag files 149 tag files from tape 147 Lower command 166 M main display Coda systems 21 77 Make Clean command 173 Make Default button 29 Manage Tag Files optical disk system 150 152 tape system 146 150 measurements making on screen measurements 129 Measurement
234. isk the upper portion of the screen of tapes or optical disks the scheme used to record the digital data onto the tape or optical disk Different formats can result in different amounts of data being stored see also Coda format Q MIPS format SDEF format SEG Y format of the DA100 DA200 the operation mode in which the DA100 DA200 reads previously recorded data from tape or optical disk and displays it on the screen a structured means for storing and retrieving data in digital form allowing rapid random access to individual data entries the point on the towing vessel from which all measurements are referenced Distance Cross Course the across track distance of a point from the survey line Digital Data Storage the standard format for storing computer data to DAT tapes May 2001 for version 2 1 269 9 JBSSOJE Glossary amp Conversions DDS2 dead time DGPS digital digital signal process ing digitisation display channel DOS DOS formatted double click dual tape dynamic range Eastings edge sensitive Encapsulated Post script EOT Ethernet event Exabyte external trigger fast tag 270 May 2001 for version 2 1 an improvement to the DDS standard allowing a higher record ing density to be used hence obtaining more storage capacity from a given length of magnetic tape in digitisation the time allowed between the end of sampling for a given data line or ping and the arri
235. isy for automatic tracking to work reliably e Use Fish Height Settings From AnotherChannel allows pop up settings to be copied from another channel In this case the fish height will still be computed independently for each channel since it is not the fish height value but the computational parameters that are being copied across Note that this is distinct from Copy Fish Height from Channel where the final computed fish height value is being copied Automatic Tracking offers four methods for automatic detection e Thresholding This method which sets a threshold amplitude for the bottom return and is the preferred method of detection because it is highly configurable for varying conditions e Power Density This method automatically sets its own thresholds and looks for the greatest energy in the search window e Edge Detection This method automatically sets it own thresholds and looks for the fastest edge in the search window e Advanced Edge This is the conventional bottom tracking for sidescan data available in earlier releases of the Coda software and is only available for sidescan May 2001 for version 2 1 69 va ou fuisn Using the DA System 5 5 1 2 Fish Height Source Method Properties Each selection of fish height source will display its associated Method Properties worksheet In the example below see Figure 5 24 this page the Method Properties for Auto Tracking Threshold Algorithm are shown Re ae Auto
236. ith a heading of 031 8 degrees The survey line number is RFP1002 and the last valid fix was number 344 the sound velocity was 1503 45 m s the delay between fix and trans mission was 1 03 seconds and the date and time of transmission was 20th April 1994 15 50 and 2 milliseconds Coda Date Format The Coda Date format replaces the UTC time entry with a time entry of the form hh mm ss dd mm yy that is hours minutes seconds followed by day month and year since 1900 Example CODA DATE 123 354 33998 005 12 234 77 09 34 5 10 2 4 3 031 8 RFP1002 344 1503 45 1 03 15 50 00 20 04 94 lt CR gt lt LF gt This string has the same meaning as the Coda string given in the example above Note The on screen measuring and tag position calculation both rely heavily on the accuracy of the incoming navigation data It is particularly important that jitter or noise in the incoming data is eliminated as far as possible For instance the headi ghinformation derived from flux gate compasses as fitted to towfish can vary widely over a short period of time To increase the accuracy of the measurements obtained from the instantaneous navigation data such noisy inputs should be filtered to reduce the extent of fluctuations The best quality navigation data and therefore on screen positioning is derived from smoothed or corrected navigation data see Section 6 6 1 208 May 2001 for version 2 1 C Corrected Navigation Data Format Section 6
237. l q x Type lt all gt or press lt Return gt to continue or press lt q gt to abort the update As the update progresses various messages may be printed to the screen These are a normal part of the update installation and require no action by you If the update package is a new software version the system automatically backs up the previous software configuration on disk The system is automatically re booted tomake sure that all of the software modifications in the update take effect Some packages however may require more than one disk or tape in which case the following prompt appears Insert a cartridge into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Insert the next disk and type lt go gt to continue the update The disks should be inserted in the order indicated on the labels Follow the instructions above until all the update disks have been used When all the disks have been used press lt q gt to the above prompt The system is automatically re booted to make sure that all of the software modifications in the update take effect Restore Previous Caution The DA System system must be shut down by selecting Shutdown from the File menu at the end of installing a software update Failure to do So may cause the system to malfunction Note Before selecting this item make sure that the tape or optical disk drives are not in operation If you are unsure about the status o
238. l string or modify the navigation library entry to interpret the incoming serial data correctly whichever is easiest and preserves the greatest amount of navigation information No Tape Detected error e This is a common error caused by the tape being accessed before it has been initialised by the system Repeat the Open Tape procedure see Section 6 2 If however this problem persists contact the Codahelpdesk No input data on display e Use internal triggering toascertain that the A D sub system is functioning correctly see Appendix K e Ensure that a TTL level external trigger is connected to the BNC labelled TRIG IN see Section 4 3 Ping rate is half the expected rate e The usual cause for a ping rate being lowerthan expected is that the line length that has been selected in the Open Acquisition window is too long see Section 5 2 Try increasing the sampling frequency or if this is at the maximum value decrease the line length CPU Overload for example very slow display e Try turning off TVG Slant Range Correction or Raw A Scan display see Section 7 3 Section 7 7 2 1 or Section 8 7 Note TVG Slant Range Correction and Raw A Scan display all use relatively large amounts of computing power whilst Image Enhancement uses almost none Login problems Maintenance Menu e Ensure that the Caps Lock key isn t on Unix logins are case sensitive Problems saving tags e If the error Unable to write
239. lable only in GeoKit Annotate Tag Node s This option is available only in the PI100 or GeoKit Replaying Tags The DA System system automatically labels each sonar data file on a Coda format data tape or disk with the file name of its associated tag file If the selected tag file is in the tag file directory of the DA System hard disk or optical disk the tags in the file are automatically replayed along with the data from the tape or disk during playback Loading tag files from tape saving tag files to tape and copying tag files to and from optical disk are described in Section 10 9 2 3 and Section 10 9 3 1 If the Overlay Data toggle in the Display menu is on then the tags are overlaid on the sonar data If this toggle is off the tags are still read from the file but are not displayed on the screen Using Goto to Replay a Tag When the DA System is in playback mode the Goto command can beused to move between tags Refer to Section 6 7 4 for details of how to use the Goto command Setup Tags Most of the facilities in this menu item are only useful for PI100 or GeoKit modules However the colour used to display fix lines may be altered in this pop up Select the System Tab followed by the Fix Line item in the Tag Name list Change the file line colour by selecting a colour on the Tag Colour option menu below the Tag Name list Once this has been applied all fix lines will be displayed in this new colour Fast Tag Setup This option
240. le Display Data pop up The time varying gain function can be used to alter the gain across thedata trace and as aresult improve image quality across the data display Selecting TVG Enhancement or the Setup TVG Functionality icon pops up the Time Varying Gain TVG toolkit see Figure 7 3 this page The TVG graph however is a graph of the gain applied across the range of the displayed data The function can be specified by moving the points on the TVG function curve to the required shape The steps are the same as the Image Enhancement toolkit The TVG toolkit contains eight smart icons six of which look identical to those in the Image Enhancement toolkit They are used to toggle between round or straight line curves in the graph e enter an exponential function value gamma for the gain to be applied across the ping return e remove grip points from the graph e add grip points to the graph e reset the gain back to one e invert the TVG function e apply TVG from start of ping or seabed dependent on correct fish height tracking e apply an automatic gain profile to the signal May 2001 for version 2 1 103 Using the DA System The Auto TVG function attempts to generate a TVG curve that yields a consistent signal in the across track direction It does this by e Calculating a mean ping over the first ten pings since the Auto TVG button was pressed Dividing this mean ping into a series of bins starting from the curre
241. lly generate a report to the selected output device The buttons in the Output Report To frame allow you to select the destination for the report file The Printer option is available only if a suitable hardcopy device is connected to the DA System see Section 4 3 If Text Window is selected from the output options a report file is generated by the system and displayed in a text window which is overlaid on the screen You can scroll through this window to view its contents Figure 10 16 page 159 158 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 10 2 1 Figure 10 16 Report File Displayed in Text Window If output to Printer is selected the report file is sent to the printer according to the options selected in the Printer Setup menu see Section 10 10 2 1 The printing process can be stopped at any point by pressing the Cancel button If the output is totbe saved to a floppy disk Floppy Disk should be selected and a blank DOS formatted floppy disk inserted in the floppy disk drive and a DOS file name given to the disk After Generate Report is clicked a further window will appear asking for the name under which the report file should be saved to the floppy disk Once the name has been entered press OK to start copying the report file to disk The report file saved to disk will be an ASCII dump of the database contents in exactly the same format as the report sent to a printer or to the screen All files are saved with the extension rep
242. locity is used to calculate the position of the scale lines see Section 7 8 3 Displaying Fix Information When the overlay plane is on see Section 8 1 theDA System displays the Fix Number and an Easting and Northing pair E N on the fix lines The Fix Number is not currently affected by corrected nav files You can select other data items to appear on the fix lines using the Fix Data pop up The other data items are Date Time Kp Speed Heading Fish Height Line Name Survey Description and for Pipeline Inspection software Pipe Offset and Striking Angle You can also choose whether to display every fix line or only some fix lines If you select Display some fixes you can specify in the text entry box how many fixes to display from in 2 fixes to 1 in 100 fixes Ensure Display Overlay Data is switched on May 2001 for version 2 1 127 Wa skS va ou usn 8 4 1 Fix Data Setup a selected number of fixes o re displayed varying be tech 1 in 2 fixes and 1 in 100 fixes according to the selection i 8 5 Zooming on Sc key shortcut lt Contro Figure 8 5 The Zoom Mode Pop up Window The Zoom function selects a rectangular area of the DA System display to be viewed under magnification Using the key short cut lt Control z gt or selecting this menu item causes the zoom pointer to appear in the Data Display Area The pointer can then be moved to the position of either the top left or bottom right corner of the area to be magni
243. mal interface It is compatible with a wide range of printer An additional GPIB Centronics type interface is also available for compatibility with thermal printers Monitor signal connector By using the VGA splitter cable provided with your DA System a monitor can be connected to the unit as well as the integral screen 42 May 2001 for version 2 1 e Tape Drive The units usually have two LEDS one gree and one amber though 8mm Exabyte tape units ahve three The left hand green LED should flash periodically when data is being recorded or played back from tape The right hand amber LED should not come on during normal operation and indicates a fault status See Appendix H for further information on interpreting the DAT drive LED display and for information on interpreting the LEds of 8mm Exabyte tape units 4 3 Connecting the System Caution Failure to ensure that the input voltage of the power supply unit is set correctly for the AC supply voltage may damage the unit 14 If your DA System has a voltage selector switch see Section 4 1 2 make sure that the voltage selector switch is set correctly for the local onboard supply The input voltage mains voltage of the power supply unit PSU is preset to 240V If the local onboard supply is 110 120V the voltage selector switch must be set accordingly 2 Plug the power cable into the Mains AC In socket Caution Connecting agmonitor that cannot operate at the required resolution an
244. mation Area shows small fluctuations about the fixed value Playing Back Data Step 4 Bottom Tracking It is vital for any measuring that you carry out on your data or any interpretation using Coda PI or GeoKit that the position of the seabed is accurately known by the system This applies equally to sidescan and shallow seismic data Bottom tracking settings may have been incorrect during acquisition so it is important to check where the bottom tracking line is being drawn that it matches the actual seabed position Use Display Display Preferences and the Display Toggles pop up to turn on display of this line You must do this with each display window open If the position of the line does not match the actual seabed position then review Section 5 5 which describes how to set up bottom tracking this will allow you to ensure that the system accurately tracks the seabed during data replay Playing Back Data Step 5 Corrected Navigation Incorporating Corrected Navigation Data The DA System acquires raw position information from a vessel s navigation computer however the accuracy of this data varies and a degree of jitter is likely to be present in the estimated towfish position To overcome this the DA System can incorporate processed corrected navigation data see Appendix C for a definition of the format of this data When sonar data is played back the position information stored on tape or optical disk is modified usin
245. me Varying Filtering Br Gir Channel 1 AChannel2 Channel3 h Channel 4 N Amt Fiter2 N Fiter3 Filter 4 V Dr Filter Active Filter Type I faortirassisiy Tine Ven Fite vies A LZ IRC v Euas v En gt Apply Filter Limits From To gt Sensor gt End of Data 7 Seabed 0 0 ia ms y Seabed po ms sr Time D0 Es ms ar Time 50 0 H ms m Frequency Design Parameters 3 dB Hz High Cut Off fo Low Cut Off 500 EERIE Filter Order 3 viewing Range gt Input y Screen ok apply Load Save Cancel Figure 7 16 Band Pass Filtering BP Band pass filtering attenuates frequenci s below one frequency and above a second frequency You can enter lower and upper cut off frequencies in Hertz and specify the order of the filter The lower and upper cut off frequencies define the 3dB point at which frequencies in the data start to become significantly attenuated The cut off frequencies must always be less than half of the sample frequency of the input the Nyquist frequency The lower cut off frequency must always be less than the upper cut off frequency The order of the filter governs the rate of attenuation of the filter after the lower cut off frequency and prior to the upper cut off frequency that is the roll off rate A higher order gives steeper roll off rates The maximum allowable filter order is four A band pass filter CANN
246. mped image Within the Screen Dump window the format tag colour and destination for the image can be selected Image Format provides a one of choice between PostScript and TIFF Tag Colour allows a choice of Black or White and Dump To gives the option of Printer or Floppy If the Image Format selected is PostScript and Printer is selected in the Dump To options a PostScript compatible printer is required Similarly when Floppy is selected in the Dump To options a single PostScript or TIFF file will be produced on the floppy disk in DOS format A promptwill ask for a file name to be entered Before attempting to dump the file to floppy ensure that the floppy disk is a 1 44MB DSHD disk formatted for DOS If PostScript format is selected the file produced will be an Encap sulated PostScript file whereas if TIFF is selected a TIFF format file is produced Both are suitable for import to many different PC applications Tag Colour provides a one of choice of Black or White This ensures that the colour for any tags in the dumped file can be selected to suit a specific purpose If the screen image is todbe dumped to a printer click on the Printer toggle To set up the particular printer configuration click on the Printer Setup button This brings up a pop up window that allows printer port and output format selections to be made Section 9 2 1 explains the use of the Printer Setup window After selecting the appropriate format
247. ms for doing this see Section 7 but at this point all you need to do is ensure that the data looks correct without any fine tuning of the display To do this 1 Press the Play button in the Tape Disk controls area this has the same graphic as a Video or Tape recorder play button May 2001 for version 2 1 61 2 A pop up window labelled Scale Display Data will appear it will automatically adjust the offset and gain applied to your data using different defaults for sidescan and shallow seismic data Click on Done in this pop up to dismiss it 3 Now check that your data looks correct if you need to fine tune the display refer to Section 7 for detailed instructions 5 4 Getting High Quality Data Step 4 Navigation Inputs Navigation input to the system is initialised by selecting File Raw Nav Input This option is available only if the acquisition system has already been set up see Section 5 2 in playback mode it is greyed out Fish referenced yf Use nav string Y Figure 5 14 The Raw Nav Input Selection Pop up Window 5 4 1 Setting Up RS232 Communication 1 Ensure that the serial port you are using to acquire navigation data is con navigation computer or GPS set 2 The Input Device to be used for the navigation data can be chosen by g on the appro priate device tab usually COM2 Navigation input is connected to t A System via a serial port The Serial Setup button may be used to pop up the COM Set
248. n Using the DA System 5 8 2 Positions that are off track are calculated using the geographical ping position heading and across track distance from the position For accurate off track positions it is essential that the heading is correct Note To calculate an off track position lat long is converted to UTM the position is calculated and then this position is converted back from UTM to lat long The format in which the cursor information is displayed can be changed from eastings and northings to lat long and vice versa by clicking on the appropriate one of selection button in the Display Nav Basis Type frame of the Nav Data Settings pop up The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 2 Dualvert 1 Figure 5 47 The General Information Area in Playback Mode 2 e Position The position of either the fish or the vessel in either Lat Long or UTM appears at the top of the display and shows the position of the newest ping in the window A symbol of a fish or a vessel appear in the middle of the position to indicate the position reference point e date time the present date and time The date is displayed as dd mm yy e Nav Sync A clock face displayed between date and time shows green when the navigation data is in sync and has a red cross on the face when not in sync e pings s the rate pings per second at which the trigger is running e ping no the number of the ping being displayed in the top line
249. n TVG curve and so on A setting of 1 25 or 2 5 volts is usual Typical Sidescan Sonar 100m True Range Requirement The DA System is required to digitise the two analogue channels of data Port and Starboard from a sidescan sonar operating at a slant range of 100 metres An external trigger is to be used Explanation Two channels 1 and 2 in this case will be active and will be labelled Sidescan Port and Sidescan Starboard The sample frequency is determined as follows e Itis desirable to collect asmany samples as possible from the sidescan signal where possible the number used should be a multiple of 512 as this is the width available per display channel in the data display area of the screen e The minimum sample frequency used should be about 20KHz to ensure that no aliasing of the signal occurs e Using a maximum towfish altitudesof 40 of true range the required slant range is 1500 91002 402 107 7m giving a maximum ping rate of approximately 2x 1077 6 96Hz To fit 1024 samples into a period of 75 143 6ms would give a sample period of 143 6 1024 sample frequency of 17 8KHz 4096 samples a frequency of 28 52KHz and 5120 samples a sampling frequency of 35 6KHz Therefore choose 5120 samples per data channel and a sample rate of approximately 35 6KHz 0 14ms or a sample frequency of 7 13KHz Similarly 2560 samples would give a e Allow a dead time of at least 2ms before each trigger No st
250. n be deselected by clicking on a tag free area of the display or by clicking on another tag to make it the current selection Deleting Tags key shortcut lt Delete gt or lt k gt Selection of this menu item or the letter lt k gt for kill or the lt Delete gt key on the leyboard deletes the current tag from both the Data Display Area and the tag database After deleting the tag there is no current tag selected 1 Select the tag to be moved by clicking on it The selected tag flashes between orange and light blue indicating that it is the currently selected tag 2 Select Tagging Delete Tag Node s or press the key short cut lt Delete gt or lt k gt for kill The tag disappears from the display and is removed from the database If Delete Tag Node s is selected but there is no current tag selection a warning appears in the display area No nodes currently selected Moving Tags Move Tag Node s allows you to move a tag to a different position in the display This function can be selected from the Tagging menu or by using the keyboard short cut lt m gt Tag nodes must be selected before they can be moved If Move Tag Node s is selected but no tag nodes are selected a warning will appear in the display area No nodes currently selected Move Tag Node s allows tags to be moved within a data channel but the DA System does not permit tags to be moved between channels The move operation consists of two s
251. n or click on the Open Acquision icon to initialise acquisition mode In the Channels 1 4 tab click on the Active on off switches of the data channels to be digitised and toggle on the Device Active Inactive button in the Open Acquisition pop up Set the voltage range and the description of the channels to be digitised In the Triggers tab set the number and source of the triggers to be used When all the parameters have been set click on the OK button Click on the Play button in the Data Control Area to start the data display In the Scale Display Data pop up configure the display scale andrange Do this either by clicking on the Auto button or by using the Shift and Scale arrow buttons to make adjust ments manually The blue band range of screen yalues should cover the green trace incoming data The green trace can be adjusted using the Channel Voltage range in the Open Acquisition pop up Select Settings Fix Lines and select the navigation survey data items to be displayed on the fix lines Select File Raw Nav Input to initialise navigation input In the Nav Input Settings pop up select the navigation string and input port to be used Click on the Nav input on one of selection switch Click on the OK button Select Processing gt Fish Height and configure the fish height Record data e To start recording insert a blank DDS or DDS2 standard DAT tape or a Coda formatted optical disk into the appropriate drive if using
252. n the General Information Area drops to half the rate you would expect for the range setting on the processing unit e g if the range setting on the processing unit is 100m then the expected ping rate is about 6 5 per second adjust the range on the Coda system to the point where the ping rate in the GIA drops to about 3 per second At this point you know that the Coda system is sampling for too long after each external trigger and is missing every second trigger Decrease the range setting in the Open Acquisition popup until the trigger rate returns to the expected value then decrease it by a further 1m to allow for any variation in trigger timing Using this procedure you have ensured that you re getting the maximum across track and along track resolution from your sidescan sonar Ultra Widescan e True Range m This option button is used to define the across track swathe size for the data channel A True Range can be selected from the following options 50m 100m 150m 200m 250m 300m 350m and 400m The actual true range of the sidescan is dependent on itsaltitude the true range selected will be correct for any fish altitude from 0 to 40 of the true range The DA System will automatically calculate the sample frequency and the number of samples per ping required for the given range Custom Sidescan e This allows you to alter the acquisition settings at a very low level and requires an in depth understanding of the Coda system
253. name label Click on the Select Factory Default ologies original setting the string FACTORY DEFAU in e Name text entry box at the bottom of the pop up fault button to Use the Project scrolli j a oject and the Set up Files scrolling optin list to search and v icula os files To select a settings file from the list click on the file name Altwernative D i ame move the pointer onto the Set up Click on the Delete button to remove the curren e i isk In the window that appears asking for confirmation click on the Ye the No button to abort the delete If the file to be deleted is the de i for confir mation Note All settings files have a set ending Files cannot so results in an error up 3 3 12 Save Settings Figure 3 20 page 29 shows an example of a Save Settings pop up this pop up appears when you click on the Save button in the Format tab form of the Reporting Report Setup menu 28 May 2001 for version 2 1 setup0002 f etup0002 g option list to search and view particular settings files To select ck on the file name theSave As text entry box is updated to display to abort the delete If the fi a i i appears asking for confir mation Click on the Apply button or the OK butto File Name window If no file has been selecte Message Window Figure 3 21 The Message Window A Message Window appears at the bottom right of the DA System display This gives time stamped CODA system i
254. nar signal from the nearest to the farthest end of the swathe using a filter of fixed frequency response of the DA100 DA200 the event marker selected to be active by clicking on the appropriate area of the Data Display Area The selected tag flashes between its normal colour and light blue symbol that shows the position on the display where any typed text will be entered Coda Technologies system for acquiring processing and replaying sidescan sonar or sub bottom data with single trigger capability Coda Technologies system for acquiring processing and replaying data from two independently firing sonars e g sidescan sonar and boomer Digital Audio Tape an international standard for the recording of analogue data to digital tape see also DDS and DDS2 the process of obtaining data usually in digital form of the DA 100 DA200 the operation mode in which the DA100 DA200 is digitising and records data see also data playback mode the number of Dits used to hold the information from each sample usually an integer number of bytes 8 16 or 32 bits a flow of data for example sonar data into or within the DA 00 DA200 see also display channel of the DA 100 DA200 that partof the DA100 DA200 interface which controls the operation of the tape or optical disk drive unit or units of the DA 100 DA200 that part of the screen given overto the display of data from the acquisition sub system or from tape or optical d
255. nd see if the Nav Data fields set to Corrected or Raw It should be set to Corrected when the navigation data is being corrected e Ifcorrected nav is applied to a field this will be indicated in the survey datapopup by a letter C next to the value Choosing UTM or Lat Long Coordinate Display The Settings Nav Type pop up contains the Display Nav Basis Type selector which allows you to display nav data in either UTM or Lat Long format irrespective of the original nav format input at acquisition time For data originally input as UTM the correct UTM zone must also be present to convert the values to lat long see Figure 6 11 this page Conversion to and from lat long and UTM assumes lat long values use the WGS84 spheroid May 2001 for version 2 1 91 WwW 19 S S va eu Buisn 6 6 4 Other Navigation Parameters up is used to enter a number of parameters which igation input string In general navigation param nput string from the RS 232 port see Section 5 4 1 string is being used it may be difficult to obtain some parameters in this manner T tings pop up therefore provides the means to manually enter v be provided by onboard navigation facilities In playback mode parameters ente de the corresponding recorded values 6 6 4 1 Survey and Line Name The Settings Navigation Parameters contai which is used to store text data for one surve characters If no name or description is entere survey run li
256. ndow over which the system will try and detect a swell frequency The valuesican be specified in Hz or in seconds e Dynamically Recalculate Swell Every clicking on this toggle causes the system to try and determine the swell frequency every n seconds If the toggle is disabled the system calculates the swell frequency when the swell filter is first applied and continues to apply this filter until the filter is disabled We recommend enabling this toggle with the recalculation taking place every 30 seconds e Display Lost Swell Warning Messages this toggle allows you to specify whether or not to display lost swell warning messages These occur if the system cannot determine a swell frequency within the search window We recommend that this toggle is enabled Clicking on the Copy Settings To All Channels in the Swell Filter Setup pop up copies the settings from the current channel to all other active channels Clicking on the Display Swell Filtered Data button causes the Display Swell Filtered Data pop up to appear Swell filtered data can be displayed in either data channel by clicking on the appro priate toggle The swell filtered data can be compared to the original unfiltered data 120 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 8 3 7 8 4 The action buttons at the bottom of the pop up include the option to Load previous settings or to Save current settings so that they can be used in future The name of the current setup file is displayed at the
257. nes Usually it is more convenient if this is available as part of an RS232 naviga string 6 6 4 2 Setting Towfish Layback and Offset When Layback and Fish Cross Track Offset are entered in the text entry boxes is able to use the ship s position to estimate the position of the towfish 92 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 6 4 3 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 Towfish Position Figure 6 12 Diagram showing Cross Track Offset and Layback The Layback value is the along track distance in metres from the ship position to the fish position and the Fish Cross Track Offset is the distance also in metres cross track from the ship position to the fish position see Figure 6 12 this page A positive offset indicates an offset to the right starboard andja negative offset indicates the offset is to the left port Setting the UTM Zone The Settings Navigation Parameters UTM Zone selector can be used to enter the UTM zone number for converting positions from Eastings and Northings to lat long co ordinates The value can either be taken from the nav string by clicking on the Input via nav string item or it can be entered manually by clicking on the User Input and typing the zone number in the text entry box Note Fix Number is not currently affected by corrected nav files The Tape Disk Controls in Playback Mode The Tape Disk control buttons are analogous tothose of a video tape or audio recorder though their functions change a
258. nformation As they appear messages are colour coded red for errors blue for warnings and black for information Once a new message appears the older one disap pears and is stored in black in the list of messages created since your system was started up You can scroll through this list by clicking on the down arrow at the side of the window May 2001 for version 2 1 29 3 5 Status Bar Settings Figure 3 22 The Status Bar Settings Button This button is on the bottom right of the Message Window see Figure 3 1 page 21 Clicking on it produces the Status Bar Setup Window see Figure 3 23 this page Figure 3 24 page 30 and Figure 3 25 page 31 In this pop up you can specify how you want information in the status bar to be displayed whether you want the system to sound a Beep and produce separate Pop ups detailing the message for how long you want the pop up to remain and the size of the message Log gt tab form gives a description of the effect of selecting items within the pop up Figure 3 24 The Status Bar Setup Window showing Popups settings 30 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 6 Pointer Types Twelve mouse pointers are used in the D The arrow pointer is the pointer typ The pencil pointer is used to create tags Keyboard shortcuts lt F1 gt to lt F12 gt e The crosshair pointer is used to make on screen measurements a the DA System is in measure mode Keyboard shortcut lt Control s gt
259. nges made to Method Properties By selecting Cancel the user can revert to previous settings By selecting OK or Apply the user confirms the changes made to the Method Properties Clicking on the Copy Settings to All Channels button copies the settings from the current channel Clicking on the Display Bottom Position button produces the Display Bottom Position pop up The action buttons at the bottom of the pop up include the option to Load previous settings or Save current settings so that they can be used in future Setting Up Sub Bottom Profiling Showing the Seabed Position The Display Bottom Position Line menu item produces the Display Bottom Position pop up This pop up is used to choose which data channel will display an orange line in the display indicating the position of the seabed return in the display area namely the left or right channel or both channels To select a data channel click on the appropriate Left Channel or Right 74 May 2001 for version 2 1 Channeltoggle Processing Fish Height Setup pop up see Section 5 5 2 2 The Bottom displayed in the correct position even when sub sampling or offsets are applied isplayed channels see Section 7 4 ottom ditacking Figure 5 37 Fish Height Settings Pop up Window for Seismic Data From Telemetry Data receiving the towfish height as part of the na on data based on the towfish altimeter reading is usually the best option if data from this source is
260. ngs and then shifts each line to re align the bottom position to this average value You can recalculate this average bottom position by clicking on the Average Bottom Position button This option should be used with care it assumes that the seabed is flat and so valid seabed features may be lost when this option is applied May 2001 for version 2 1 119 Swell Filter has two options Manual and Automatic Clicking on the Manual Setup button produces the Manual Swell Filter Setup pop up see Figure 7 21 page 120 Two parameters can be modified in this pop up Low Cut Off and High Cut Off These specify the 3dB band edges of the band reject swell filter The values can be specified in Hz or in seconds Entering a value in seconds in the text entry box and then applying the change will recalculate the value to Hz Manual Swell Filter Setup Channel 3 Cut Off Parameters 4 Low Cut Off 0100 High Cut off eoo 4 Figure 7 21 Manual Swell Filter Setup Clicking on the Automatic Setup button pops up the Automatic Swell Filter Setup pop up see Figure 7 22 page 120 Auto Swell Filter Setup Channel 3 Minimum Expected Swell pio Fa Maximum Expected Swell 2000 44 JF Dynamically Recalculate Swell Every 50 0 JF Display Lost Swell Warning Messages Figure 7 22 Auto Swell Filter Setup Window The setup options are e Minimum Expected Swell and Maximum Expected Swell these fields define the search wi
261. nt bottom position to the end of the trace e Calculating the mean signal level for each bin Calculating a gain factor for each bin so that when this gain factor is applied to the binned data the mean signal level in the bin is equal to the mean signal level calculated previously Adjusting the minimum and maximum gain values so that the curve is scaled appropriately onthe graph ed Interpolating using a spline fit between bin positions to produce a smooth curve To get good results from Auto TVG the following points are important e There should be a reliable fish height position available to the system e Data should be scrolling e The Apply TVG from Drop Down option should be set to Minimum displayed value to avoid taking any dc offset into account After an Auto TVG function has been applied it may be advisable to rescale the data using the Scale Display Data pop up to yield the best possible image Figure 7 1 page 101 In addition to these icons the verticalfscale gain can be varied to a maximum of 100dB by using the Gain spin boxes the entry in one box will be mirrored in the other Apply TVG from Drop Down will set the point from which TVG is applied to either Zero Volts or Minimum display value With Zero Volts selected amplification will be applied to any dc offset to the signal as well as the signal itself whereas the Minimum display value will apply the gain to the signal only Distortion may occur if the Shift
262. nterpretation and report generation Whether you are new to digital sonar acquisition an experienced data processor or a professional geophysicist you will find the DA System a reliable and versatile system for acquiring displaying processing and interpreting sonar data The DA System has been developed by Coda Technologies Ltd Admiral House 29 30 Maritime Street EDINBURGH EH6 6SE UK tel 44 131 553 1380 fax 44 131 554 7143 e mail coda coda technologies com www http www coda technologies com Coda s Technical Support service is available 24 hours a day USA tel 1 888 340 CODA Rest of the World tel 44 131 553 7003 See Technical Support on the inside front cover for full details Coda s American subsidiary is Coda Technologies Inc 9800 Richmond Avenue Suite 480 Houston Texas 77042 USA tel 1 713 780 3223 fax 1 713 780 3280 The DA System The DA System system can be used either as a stand alone module for acquiring and processing data or as the data input system for one of Coda s processing and automated interpretation modules GeoKit Pipeline Inspection P1100 TrackPlot TrackPlot Plus and Mosaic The DA200 retains the acclaimed look and feel of the DA100 system The main difference between the two systems is that the DA200 can accept dual independent input triggers whereas the DA100 accepts only a single trigger The DA5O provides the look and feel of the DA100 restrict
263. ntries in a navigation group must have the same termination String The format of the library entry for a navigation group is as follows ident identifier group_list endnav The group list may be further defined as group_list group_entry group_list So a group_list is a list of one or more group_entry entities where the group_entry is defined group_entry group identifier A group_entry is a line beginning with the word group followed by a double quote delimited string which is the identifier of a navigation library entry An example of the definition of a navigation group is given below Navigation Library Explained An NMEA GGA string is being sent by your navigation computer to the DA System system An example string is shown GPGGA 121345 65 5523 45 N 09333 45 E O 1 1 0 9 9 3 M 1 3 M 3 2 1022 23 lt CR gt lt LF gt This string contains the following information 121345 65 the fix time 12 13 45 65 GMT 5523 45 Northing coordinate 55 deg 23 45 min N Latitude May 2001 for version 2 1 215 saoipueddy Appendices 09333 45 Easting coordinate 93 deg 33 45 min E Longitude 0 invalid GPS fix 11 11 satellites in view 0 9 horizontal dilution of precision 9 3 antenna altitude 9 3 m 1 3 geoidal separation 1 3 m 3 2 differential gps data is 3 2 seconds older 1022 differential ground reference station used was number 1022 23 checksum of 23
264. ode in the recording session The tape or disk moves to a point about 4 seconds before the time the next tag will appear at the top of the screen This is to ensure that the tag is visible in the first full screen of data after the goto command e Previous Tag moves the tape or disk to the previous tag in the current recording session To ensure that the tag is clearly visible in the first full screen of data after the goto command the goto moves to a point about 4 seconds before the time the tag event occurred e Previous Tag Node moves the tape or disk to the previous tag node in the current recording session To ensure that the tag is clearly visible in the first full screen of data after the goto command the goto moves to a point about 4 seconds before the time the tag event occurred e Attributes see Figure 6 13 page 94 e Tag ID moves the tape or disk forwards or backwards to a specific tag and type the tag s ID number in the text entry box Only the digits of the code no letters or 94 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 7 4 3 6 7 4 4 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 6 punctuation should be entered The tag ID is printed when a report is generated Cut and paste the tag s ID number using the Reporting menu Select Reporting Report Generation Text Window Generate Report In the Tag Report File window scroll to the Tag ID column and double click on the tag s number to copy it In the Goto menu place the pointer over the Tag ID box
265. of input data to display data conversion Scale and Shift adjustments can be made for Both channels or Left and Right independently as for Auto scaling The Reset button resets the display data parameters back to those at system initialisation When you have finished making your adjustments to the Scale and Shift values dismiss the pop up by pressing the Done button Setting Time Varying Gain Left Right N Ki Ed 17 0 dB Ala i Pad Gain dB H 4 re auro 170 dB Seabed Range max Staat Le 2 1 Apply to Both Channels Apply TYG from Minimum displayed value iyi ox Apply Load Save Cancel Figure 7 3 The Time Varying GainToolkit Pop up Window The Processing Time Varying Gain TVG pop up Figure 7 3 this page shows an inter active graph which allows the gai applied across the range of the displayed data to be altered The icons are used to toggle between round or straight line curves in the graph enter a gamma value for the gain applied across the ping return remove grips points from the graph add grip points reset the gain back to 1 invert the TVG function and apply the gain from the seabed rather than the start of ping The best TVG Enhancement curve is one which gives afconsistent maximum data value across track This is done by either reducing or increasing the gain forsome parts of the scan You can see the effect of manipulating the TVG function by using the Sca
266. of the Data Display Window It is continuously updated while data is scrolling e survey displays the survey description as entered in the Nav Parameters pop up e Kp the kilometre post number of the newest ping in the display window e cursor pointer the position directly under the cursor on the screen namely Hastings Northings and Kp The information is colour coded to indicate the channel over whichthe cursor is positioned channel colour is indicated in the top right of the display window The position is fully geo corrected and is calculated using the navigation data stored with each ping If the fish height is known the position is automatically slant range corrected Positions that are off track are calculated using the geographical ping position heading and across track distance from the position For accurate off track positions it is essential that the heading is correct Note To calculate an off track position lat long is converted to UTM the position is calculated and then this position is converted back from UTM to lat long The format in which the cursor information is displayed can be changed from eastings and northings to lat long and vice versa by clicking on the appropriate one of selection button in the Display Nav Basis Type frame of the Nav Data Settings pop up 82 May 2001 for version 2 1 6 Playing Back Survey Data 6 1 This section describes how to use the system to replay previously recorded data
267. oggle on or off the display of scale lines on the data display e Scale Line Spacing This field is used to set the space between scale lines in either metres or milliseconds By using the scale lines spacing option button an accuracy of 0 1 metres or milliseconds may be defined e Annotate Scale Lines This option allows automatic scale line annotation to be On or Off When annotation is On the appropriate distance or time label appears beside each scale line on the display e Position Reference The type of scale lines to display is selected using the one of selectors in this option box The Relative to Sensor option displays scaleylines at Slant Range Distance The Relative to Seabed option displays scale lines at True Range Distance Note When displaying metres scale lines over sub bottom data only true distances are used This is the case even if the Slant Range Distances option is selected as slant ranges equal to true range in this case e Travel Time These options are only available when displaying millisecond scale lines and relate to the travel time for each ping of data The type of millisecond scale lines to display are selected using the one of selectors in this option box A setting of Two Way Travel Time displays millisecond scale lines at two way travel time intervals while a setting of One Way Travel Time displays millisecond scale lines at one way travel time intervals Note For sub bottom data the sub bottom sound ve
268. ompensated Trigger Delay us 0 Gain Auto E Pulse Power oo zl Sweep Time ms 100 s E Use FSIU Values Start Delay ms o g Total Sweep ms 100 Figure 5 9 The FSIU Sub bottom Tab Form ofthe Network Tab Form The Sub bottom tab is shown in Figure 5 9 this page The tab allows you to activate the subsystem select the type of pulse trigger gain and power and also select the sweep time parameters The Pulse Type is obtained by interrogating the FSIU unit this is done at the same time as the interrogation for subsystems Selecting a different Pulse Type from the scrolling option list causes the Pulse Type Information area to be updated with the information of the newly selected pulse type The Trigger scrolling option list gives the choice of internal external coupled or gated trigger types Internal trigger is internal to the FSIU unit and not to the Coda system When Internal is selected the Trigger Divisor and Trigger Delay fields are greyed out When External is selected the Trigger Divisor is greyed out The Delay field can also be used for External triggers specifying the delay from the trigger When Coupled trigger is selected the trigger can be coupled to another subsystem e g SSS Each option for coupling subsystems will be displayed in the list as for example Coupled SS 410 In Coupled mode the Divisor and Delay fields can be used In Gated mode the external trigger is used as a
269. on its tab of the DA 100 DA200 a group of one or more interconnected tag nodes of the DA100 DA200 a unique database entry defining a point within the data or the screen graphic associated with it the plastic cartridge containing the magnetic tape medium see tape unit that part of the tape drive which is in contact with the tape medium and causes the data to be written to the tape tape unit TCP IP tear off menu telemetry text entry box thresholding TIFF time varying gain titlebar toggle Token Ring toolkit topology towfish trace mixing track trackball TrackPlot TrackPlot Plus transducer trigger trigger source or tape drive unit that part of the DA100 DA200 mechanism which contains the tape head and into which the tape cartridge is loaded Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol an interface standard for local area networks a pull down menu which can be detached from the Menu Bar to allow it to be displayed permanently on the interface measurements carried out at a distance for example of the towfish altitude an area in a window which allows the user to type input using the keyboard thus changing system parameters the act of setting a level for example a greyscale intensity level or a voltage above and below which different actions are taken on the incoming signal Tag Image File Format a common industry standard format for storing and exch
270. on on the copied data by copying the nav file and reapplying see Section 6 6 1 Appendix C The Copy Source tape and to Target tape option selection buttons display the drives from which the data will be copied and to which the data will be written The default setting is to copy from Tape 1 to Tape 2 but the setting can be changed by setting the option selection buttons The tape operating system automatically detects the data format on the source tape and offers a choice of formats for the target tape in the Target Data Format frame A format is selected by clicking its one of selection switch The Tape Copy Mode one of selection switches allow you to choose whether to add the data you are copying to the end of the existing data on the target disk or to rewind the target tape and overwrite the existing data May 2001 for version 2 1 161 The Target File Size frame provides the options of limiting the file size when writing to the tape by editing the text entry box under Limit Size to MB or by default to keep the file size the same as the original Same size as source Finally depending on the format into which you have chosen to copy the data you can select whether to copy all triggers or only specific ones with the data using the Triggers to Copy one of selection switches A number of limitations exist when copying data e Multi trigger data cannot be copied from Coda format into other data formats e Copying from Coda fo
271. on to the fish source the Read Write bottom position to from Disk utility must be activated see Figure 5 33 this page When the raw data file is played back you can review the quality of the seabed tracking and manipulate the source settings to obtain the best response During this stage fish height for each ping is stored in the record file May 2001 for version 2 1 73 Using the DA System 5 5 1 5 5 5 1 6 5 5 2 5 5 2 1 There are no restrictions on the data playback sequence any iteration through the data set to recompute the fish height will store a new set of values in the record file The Fish Height file is updated if more than 1 second has elapsed AND the seabed value has changed by gt 2 for a non flat seabed OR Updated every 5 seconds for a flat seabed Fish Height Play Back Fish Height File To play back a data file using the Fish Height File you must select Keep Existing playback mode only as the fish height source The Remember Use Previous Bottom Position toggle must als be selected The system will automatically detect the Record File and apply it to the data set being played back In playback the fish height can be applied to a data set via a corrected navigation file a fish height file or simply by reading fish height values recorded in acquisition The Coda system will detect which inputs are available on the system and apply a status to each one thus determining which input will be used for fish
272. op up window When you select Windows Open New Window in any open Data Display window the Open New Window pop up appears see Figure 3 6 this page This allows you to choose parameters for the new window e Window Type This scrolling option list can be set to either Horizontal Window or Vertical Window indicating the angle at which the data will scroll e Number of Channels The scrolling option list can be set for either 1 or 2 channels e Scroll Direction This scrollingoption list can be set for either Left or Right for a horizontal window or Up or Down for a vertical window Menu Bar Options Author Note not for publication different applications to be listed in Appendix L When more than one data display window is open the Menu Bar options can apply to that particular window or to the whole system or to an input channel A list of the different appli cations is in Appendix L e When Menu Bar Window options are selected the selection will apply to the window from which the pop up was called The same pop up function can be called once for each data display window open e Menu Bar System options apply globally Although system options can be called from any open data display window if a pop up is already open calling it from anothersopen data display window will only have the effect of bring the open pop up to the foreground of the main display e Menu Bar Input Channel options apply to input channels and can be di
273. or Viewing Range is Input It shows a green trace which corresponds to the input signal acquisition or the signal being read from the disk or tape playback anda blue rectangle which indicates the portion of the input signal that is on display in the Data Display Area To scale the display data manually the Scale and Shift arrows should be usedfto move the input signal until it coincides with the display range This is represented in thetScale Display Data pop up by a solid blue rectangle illustrating the display range covering the desired range of the incoming signal In addition to appearing when selected from the Settings menu the Scale Display Data pop up appears when the Play button in the Data Control Area is pressed after changes have been made to the acquisition setup or Open Playback has been selected from the File menu Setting the Viewing Range to Screen causes the oscilloscope trace to show the blue display data range that is what is actually visible on the screen rather than the input data range The arrow keys can again be used to alter the range being displayed However on this viewing range selecting the up and down Shift arrows on the screen causes the trace itself to be moved up or 102 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 3 down respectively The Scale arrow keys cause the trace to be scaled in size the up Scale arrow increasing the size the down arrow reducing it This viewing mode allows fine tuning for the settings
274. ord twice then the new password The new password must then be re typed to ensure that it has been entered correctly The system password should consist of at least six characters and should contain at least two alphabetic and one numeric characters It must differ from the old password by at least three characters May 2001 for version 2 1 173 Do NOT allow the install password for the system to fall into the hands of those not trained to carry out system updates or cleaning Do NOT write the password down 12 3 15 Screen Saver Option A screen saver can be turned on or off by pressing lt Alt Shift S gt and lt Alt Shift Q gt respectively If the screen saver option is turned on and the screen remains inactive for a period of 5 minutes the screen will be blanked To reactivate the screen simply move the mouse 174 May 2001 for version 2 1 13 Powering Down amp Packing Up 13 1 Shutdown This option shuts down the Unix operating system of the DA System to allow the power to be turned off or the machine to be rebooted If this item is selected a pop up appears asking for confirmation that the system is to shut down if Yes is selected the shutdown takes place and any tapes in the tape drives are ejected Eject diskettes from the floppy disk drive prior to rebooting the machine Shutdown cannot be halted at this point 13 2 Powering Down the System Caution Before powering down the system make sure that no tapes
275. ortant information in the input signal thereby optimising the display If the energy content of the signal changes significantly in either acquisition or playback modes the quality of the display deteriorates because the display range does not coincide with the range which covers the important infor mation in the input signal The data should be rescaled by clicking on the Auto button in the pop up The Reset button resets the display data parameters back to those at system initialisation The Shift Scale Auto and Reset conversion settings can be made to both display channels simultaneously the initial default or to either channel individually This is controlled by the Apply To toggle Setting the toggle to Both causes both display channels to be altered Setting to either Left or Right applies the conversion changes to the respective single data channel only This allows the two channels to display different portions of their respective input signals thereby allowing individual channel displays to be optimised When suitable conversion parameters have been selected the Scale Display Data window may be dismissed by clicking on the Done button The parameters may be altered at any time by re selecting the Scale Display Data menu item and re scaling the data either automatically or manually Manual Scale and Offset Adjustment The pop up shows an oscilloscope trace and a number of controls It has two viewing ranges The default setting f
276. ot look inside the optical disk drive or use a mirror to look inside the drive The laser can cause eye damage Cautions Connecting the System e Failure to ensure that the input voltage of the power supply unit is et correctly for the AC supply voltage may damage the unit e Connecting a monitor that cannot operate at the required resolution an 80Hz refresh rate whilst displaying 1040x780 non interlaced pixels may damage the monitor e Ifthe DA System was in transit and has recently been unpacked or if it has been brought from a cool area to a warm one leave it for some time at least an hour to reach ambient temper ature before powering up This prevents condensation from forming within the system which may seriously damage the electronics and the drive mechanism Powering Down amp Packing Up e The DA System system must be shut down by selecting Shutdown from the File menu Failure to do so may cause the system to malfunction May 2001 for version 2 1 3 e Before powering down the system make sure that no tapes or disks have been left in the drives Failure to do so may result in damage to the tapes or disks or to the drives Updating Software The DA System system must be shut down by selecting Shutdown from the File menu at the end of installing a software update Failure to do so may cause the system to malfunction Tape System The status of the write protect tab on the tape must not be change
277. ouse trackball an area at the top of the display in the DA100 DA200 in which a number of menu items are permanently displayed P1100 the minimum length or separation between separate pipe events e g spans that will prevent the events from being merged as one single event user defined a windowing operating system for IBM PC compatibles PI100 the minimum length a pipe event e g span can be without it being discarded as being too short user defined Coda s software module for Mosaicing sidescan sonar records the process of geopositioning sidescan sonar records such that an image of a large area of the seafloor is built up line by line a library of software routines used for building user interfaces giving a characteristic look and feel a pointing device fosse with computers Movement of the mouse moves the screen pointer see also trackball Microsoft Disk Operating System see also DOS an event marker which has several user positioned points or nodes used to define a boundary or a layer capable of displaying or processing data at a number of scales of operating systems ableto run several programs simultane ously abbreviation for navigation string any form of navigation information within the DA 100 DA200 any form of navigation input to the DA 00 DA200 system DA100 DA 200 the reference table which allows the DA100 DA200 to interpret incoming navigation strings an ASCII string holding naviga
278. p 353 872 Rewind Tape Fix Number 2 1 A Sidescan Port 2 A Sidescan Starboard Eject Tape Catalogue Tape Goto File fi a OK Store Factory Cancel Figure 6 2 Open Playback Pop up Window 2 Select File Open Playback The system automatically begins to read the tape or the tape in Tape 1 in a twin tape system and the Open Playback pop up appears displaying information about the files recorded to that tape For a dual tape system two tab forms will be present in the pop up Tape 1 and Tape 2 only the Tape 1 tab will be present in single tapersystems To produce a list of all files on the tape select Catalogue Tape The location of the file list will be displayed in the File Information area of the pop up e If an error message appears when the system tries to read the tape for example Tape Not Ready click on the Reopen Tape button to make another attempt to readithe tape e If the file details indicate that the wrong tape has been inserted click on the Eject Tape button insert another tape and then click on the Reopen Tape button e If the tape needs rewinding click on the Rewind Tape button When the tape has rewound click on the Reopen Tape button to allow it to be read Note The tape drive automatically rewinds tapes after recording has stopped and before ejecting them so a newly recorded tape inserted into the tape drive will not nged rewinding For some tape formats for
279. p for an Edgetech FSIU system Figure 5 8 this page shows the Open Acquisition Network tab form with the Edgetech FSIU Network Device Type selected after clicking on the Connect to FSIU button This will establish a connection with the FSIU unit and interrogate the subsystems omthe unit The results of the interrogation will then determine the numberand type of device tabs to be displayed on the form The Reset FSIU button causes a reset message to be sent to the FSIU and for the tab area to be cleared Re clicking the Connect to FSIU button will cause the tab area to be redrawn 5 2 3 2 1 Edgetech FSIU Sidescan The Sidescan tabs are shown in Figure 5 8 this page There are two separate tabs one for high frequency sidescan and one for the low frequency sidescan The tabs allow the user tovactivate the subsystem select the type of pulse and trigger and the range The Pulse Type is obtained by interrogating the FSIU unit this is done at the same time as the interrogation for subsystems Selecting a different Pulse Type from the scrolling option list causes the Pulse Type Information area to be updated with the information of the newly selected pulse type The Trigger scrolling option list gives the choice of internal external coupled or gated trigger types e Internal trigger is internal to the FSIU unit and not to the Coda system When Internal is selected the Trigger Divisor and Trigger Delay fields are greyed out e When External is s
280. pe control command fails for some reason The following steps should be taken e Reselect Open Tape Playback from the File menu and continue tape playback see Section 6 2 e If this fails eject the tape re insert the tape and then select Open Tape Playback again e Ifthis fails re start the viewer and select Open Tape Playback e If all of the steps above fail shutdown and re boot the system The display does not scroll in acquisition or playback mode e Ensure that two display channels have been selected see Section 6 3 The DA System requires two display channels to be operating before it can scroll the waterfall display DA System locks up completely The DA System can only lock up under very unusual circumstances most users will never experience this The following remedies should be attempted e Check whether the system issstill recording indicated by intermittent flashes of the SCSI light If so the data will still be being written to the tape You may wish to follow these next instructions once it is convenient to stop recording e Ifmouse movements cause the pointer on the screen to move andthe DA System display responds then select the Restart option from the File menu see Section 13 1 e If mouse movements cause the pointer on the screenito move but selection of the File menu is not possible activate the Title Bar Menu see Section 12 2 and select the option Restart DAx00 from this menu e If selection of t
281. ped a fault the Coda system will time out waiting for the communication Hardcopy Output will then be automatically turned off You can specify the length of Timeout in seconds in the text field in the pop up When outputds enabled you canselect for output to the printer or plotter to be either from the top line of the screen by selecting Newest in the one of Print Line choices or from the bottom lineby selecting Oldest If you choose Oldest tags that have been added will appear on the hard copy All image enhancement and processing applied to the on screen data is also applied to the data sent to the hardcopy device Note As the data being printed is that atthe bottom of the screen it is important to ensure that the system keeps acquiring and recording data at the end of a survey line for long enough to cause the whole line s data to be output to the printer GPIB Setup GPIB Settings D2200 Settings er Device Settings GPIB address GPIB address m GPIB Timeout Timeout secs iB Figure 9 2 The GPIB Settings Pop up Window Clicking on the GPIB Setup button in the Hardcopy Output window pops up a window that defines the GPIB Settings The DA System Settings frame is used to set the GPIB address for the DA System By default this is set to zero The Hardcopy Device Settings frame is used to set the external device number this is usually 6 The two GPIB addresses must be different The GP
282. pipe span condition user defined a large proportion of the available grey is used to display the regions of the image the user is interested in removing the low frequency component of a signal of digital storage retaining a large proportion of the original information content of the signal the shade or tint of a colour Hertz the SI equivalent of cycles second small symbol on the computer screen which represents some entity or function within the computer system performing image processing in order to improve the quality of an image for example the display of sonar data ona screen performing manipulations to an incoming digital signal on the assumption that the data contained therein has some meaning as an image DA100 DA200 the buttons used to control the functions of the DA100 DA200 for example the data control buttons have a three dimensional look when a button has been activated the shading changes and the button appears to have sunk into the interface to have been indented a window which supplies the user with information but does not accept any input from the user for example the Survey Data window input voltage range intensity interface internal trigger interpolation invert IO ISA Jitter KB Kp Landscape mode layback LED line of data local area network lookup table loopback low contrast low pass filtering LPTI LUT master trigger the range o
283. ple navigation data This means that the original data is always available and that no information is lost in any processing steps In playback mode data previously recorded to tape or disk can be manipulated and displayed in the same way as in acquisition mode The playback speed can be varied from zero paused to typically two or three times the original acquisition rate The format time and channels recorded to the tape or disk are shown when the media is first loaded You can select channels for display the display channels can be changed at any time In both modes the DA System provides a number of processing options and several powerful tools which enable you to configure the setup to best suit your needs These features include multi resolution data display scrolling speed adjustment single or dual channel waterfall or horizontal displays slant range correction TVG and TVF enhancement image enhancement zoom facilities real time cursor navigation position and on screen measurement The DA System is available with a number of options including a tape or optical disk system single drive or dual drives for continuous recording and a GPIB port for real time data output to thermal recorders About this Manual This manual is designed to help yousget the most out of the DA System system whatever your level of experience e Part I The Introduction and Basics contains basicinformation about Coda systems display featur
284. ples per ping would be defined by SamplesPerPing gt 0 0333 20000 So SamplesPerPing 2 20000 x 0 0333 That is the number of samples per ping should be at least 667 However as the number of samples per ping is the maximum number of points visible on the screen p r ping it would be better to maximise the number This determines the maximum resolution of the display in a similar way that dots across the paper trace affect the image on thermal paper recorders In addition we wish to mak the samples per ping a multiple of 512 Therefore it would be better to have atleast 1024 samples per ping Doubling roughly the samples per ping should double the sampling frequency to maintain the relationship Sweep Time gt SamplesPerPing SamplingFr quency 1024 gt So 0 033 20000 0 0256 or 33ms225 6ms These settings are suitable to obtain range of 50m no aliasing and good display resolution Shallow Seismic Custom Settings Example 2 There is a requirement to sample the data from a SBP of at least 40KHz The SBP ping rate is 10Hz and the master trigger is to be provided by the DA System Only the channel with sub bottom profiler data should be digitised data channel 1 in this case and its Description field should be set to seismic The sample rate is arrived at as follows e The line length should be a multiple of 1024 so that the displayed line will fill the data display area of the screen either
285. ponds to the numberof pixels which would be drawn across a thermal recorder s sheet for the channel 3 Sampling Frequency The rate at which the digitising hardware samples the incoming analogue data The sampling frequency must be high enough to ensure that the required number of samples per ping are acquired for each successive trigger These three parameters are closely related according to the expression SamplingFrequency 2 NumberOfPingsPerSecond x SamplesPerPing Therefore SamplingFrequency TriggerRate x SamplesPerPing 1 lingF De Sampling TriggerPeriod x SamplesPerPing 4 Slant Range The trigger period samples per ping and sampling frequency parameters are also related to the slant range of the survey as this governs thestriggering rate For example a 50m slant range sidescan sonar survey would have the following setup Range 50 metres therefore the time between triggers should allow sound to travel 50m through the water and 50m back to the transducer a total of 100m Sound travels through water at approximately 1500 metres s so it would take at most ET seconds for the ping to leave the transmitting transducer and return to the ms receiving transducer So the maximum triggering rate is 15 pings second This corresponds to a sweep time of 67ms milliseconds Now that the triggering rate ping rate or pings s has been established as 15 pings everysecond we can determine the best sampling frequency for a
286. py output device can be set in this pop up May 2001 for version 2 1 137 System Usi 9 1 1 9 2 As coloured hardcopy output is not available through this menu item the tag colours must be converted to either black or white The Tag Colour option allows a one of choice of either Black or White in which all tags will be printed Finally the Output On toggle in the Hardcopy Output window should be switched on green The pop up can then be dismissed by clicking OK if the settings are correct or Cancel to revert to the previous settings The data line is normally drawn from left to right on the hardcopy device However the line may be reversed and drawn from right to left by selecting the Reverse Line option Normally each line is only printed once However if it is desirable to stretch the hard copy in the along track direction the lines may be repeated by setting the Repeat Count value Increasing the repeat count will generally slow the overall print speed When sending data to the printer the Coda system requires hardware signals to be returned from the printer If these are not received for example if the printer is busy the Coda system will stop scrolling dat until it can communicate with the hardcopy device This ensures that the rate of Coda system scrolling is not faster than the printer can print out However if the printer does not communicate for a long time for example if the printer is off line or has develo
287. quisition mode See data acquisition mode acquisition setups default setups 196 default sidescan setups 201 default sub bottom profiler setups 205 default widescan setups 201 examples 195 parameters for custom Settings 196 shallow seismic custom settings described 202 shallow seismic custom settings example 1 203 shallow seismic custom settings example 2 204 shallow seismic useful table 205 sidescan setups 100m true range 199 sidescan setups 50m true range 198 ultra widescan setups 100m true range 200 ultra widescan setups 50m true range 199 acquisition See data acquisition Adaptive Limits 71 Alden 9315 CTP printers configuring the printer 237 selecting the printer 238 troubleshooting 238 analogue input 183 Application Specific ARea 135 Application Specific Area Coda systems 21 in acquisition mode 80 Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 1 80 Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 2 81 Application Specific Area in playback mode 98 Applications menu 99 Apply button 26 Automatic Tracking Hints Seismic 78 B backing up setup files 171 Backup Setup Files 172 Bottom Tracking 67 75 Bottom Tracking setting up 68 Butterworth filters 225 buttons See particular buttons C Cancel button 26 Change IP Address 169 Change Password command 173 Change Time command 173 Checking the Format of Incoming Nav Data 63 checklists for interpreting data 259 260 for mobilising GeoKit PI100 253 255 for mobil
288. r or needs to be cleaned The middle green LED flashes to indicate SCSI bus activity The bottom green LED indicates the presence of atape in the tape drive and flashes when the tape is in motion or when the tape drive needs cleaning Figure H 2 this page shows the various LED combinations that occur during normal tape drive operation Power Ready Ready Normal High SCSI Time Cleaning on Failed no tape tape tape speed bus Error to in self test POST loaded loaded motion tape reset clean progress POST motion Top LED error fast slow fast Middle LED i SCSI irreg irreg irreg irreg irreg irreg na ma irreg Bottom LED tape E m slow_ fast fast slow Key W On Off Flashing slow 1 flash second 0 94 Hz fast 4 flashes second 3 76 Hz irreg Rate of flash varies with SCSI bus activity If the tape drive is not connected to the SCSI bus this LED will be off Figure H 2 LED Combinations for the Eliant 820 May 2001 for version 2 1 231 seolpueddy H 2 3 Environmental Specifications Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F Operating rel humidity 20 to 80 non condensing H 2 4 Hints and Precautions e Always allow the DA System to reach ambient temperature before switching it on Failure to do so may damage t
289. r standard settings are Trigger A or B Input Voltage Range 1 25v 2 5v 5v 10v and the description SS port SS starboard Seismic as described in Section 5 2 The following example setups describe the more detailed options to allow customised settings to be used where greater flexibility during acquisition is required Description of Sidescan Parameters for Custom Settings There are five important parameters in the acquisition pop up window each interlinked and related to the others The relationship between these parameters governs the setup for data acqui sition The five parameters are 1 Trigger Period 2 Samples Per Ping 3 Sampling Frequency 4 Slant Range 5 True Range 196 May 2001 for version 2 1 1 Trigger Period This represents another method of presenting the triggering rate or ping rate If the DA System system is triggered externally this value is computed automatically and can be read from the General Information Area as it corresponds to the pings s If the sonar is triggered by the DA System that is an internal trigger is output via the Trigger Out connection this value can be automatically calculated by the system or computed by the user to ensure that e it provides a trigger at the correct rate e it is not in conflict with the samples per ping and sampling frequency values as outlined below 2 Samples per Ping Thenumber of samples or pixels or dots used to digitise each ping This corres
290. r switch off DF1000 acqui sition Use the Diagnostic Aid toggle button if you want to send information from the DCI card of your sonar device to the DA System Status Bar 5 2 2 2 Edgetech ACI Analogue N Network N Digital NV Digital 1 W Digita2 Digital _1 Device Active Inactive Digital Device Type ledgetech ACI272T F The 272TD fish is a dual frequency 100 500 kHz fish Sonar Range f 00m F Sonar Frequency fi 00 kHz x Port Gain Pity Gan LE Stbd Gain Unity Gain FI m Diagnostic Aids These options should only be selected if the user wishes to perform diagnostics with the ACI card 1 Generate ACI Test Signal 1 Send ACI Serial Output To Status Bar 2 dgelech Figure 5 5 The Digital Tab Form of the Open Acquisition Window showing the setup for an Edgetech ACI272T and AC272TD towfish Figure 5 5 this page shows the Open Acquisition Digital Tab Form for an Edgetech ACI 272T and ACI 272TD digital towfish First select the digital device type to be used ACI 272TD dual frequency or ACI 272T single frequency Select the Sonar Range for which the data will be collected This is the true range for each channel or swathe over which the sonar will collect data The available ranges are 25m 50m 75m 100m 150m 200m 300m 400m and 600m Select the frequencies option to be acquired by the fish either 100kHz or 500kHz 100kHz only on ACI 272T Select the gain for the port and starboard c
291. r with or without punctuation The system searches forwards or backwards to find the specified number Goto a Specific Ping Number Click on Attribute and select Ping number in the scrolling option list and in the text entry box enter the ping number that you want to find Again specify either an absolute or a relative value Enter an absolute fix number by typing the number in the box The system searches forwards or backwards to get to the fix number requested Enter a relative value by prefixing the fix number with or without punctuation The system searches forwards or backwards to find the specified number May 2001 for version 2 1 95 Wo s S va eu Bulsn Using the DA System 6 7 5 6 7 6 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 10 1 Fast Forward Cue This button has two modes of operation during playback they determine the speed of movement through the data on tape or disk If the Play button is depressed when this button is pressed cue mode is selected a tape system will display every third line of incoming data from a tape and an optical disk system will display every fifth line of incoming data from disk allowing fast searches through the data If the Play button is not depressed when this button is pressed fast forward mode is selected both a tape drive and an optical disk drive will move the media forward repeatedly by 10 000 lines of data Each mode of operation continues until the Stop button is pres
292. racking applied Figure 5 44 this page This is indicated in each case by a red status indicator for off or a green status indicator for on 80 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 7 2 5 8 5 8 1 The Application Specific Area in Acquisition Mode 2 Devices Channels K Fast Tags ki Tape 1 Recording Local Disk 1 Recording Disk Space Thu 19 Apr 2001 12 18 31 Error Unable to find A D device Figure 5 45 The Application Specific Area Device Tab in Acquisition Mode When the DA System is in Acquisition mode the Devices tab in the Application Specific Area shows information on the tape devices or disk devices present and activated on the system see Figure 5 45 this page A status indicator for each device indicates which device is recording green and which are not red For tape and optical drives there is a device icon which can be used to eject the media from the drive and in the case of optical drives and local disks there is an indication of free disk space The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode The General Information Area which lies near the bottom left of the display screen is shown in Figure 5 46 page 81 and Figure 5 47 page 82 There are two modes selected by the button in the bottom right hand corner of the area and they provides the information listed below for whichever window is selected on the tab bar The General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 1 Dualvert t
293. re of the surrounding air conveying information by changes in signal amplitude and phase see also digital of sonar records the practice of using an external device to over lay the analogue sonar data with navigation information the part of the DA 00 DA200 display in the bottom right of the screen whose functions change in playback and acquisition modes A button which applies the settings or options selected and retains the pop up window on the screen American Standard Code for Information Interchange the world wide standard means of sending alphanumeric characters in a 7 bit format of the DA 00 DA200 a feature which prevents the freezing of the screen display by the Pause button if further pausing would cause loss of data to the screen the pointer type used for resetting the position of automatically tracked features during P7100 operation of the DA100 DA200 the default sub sample mode this auto matically derives a sub sample rate which allows the full swathe width to be displayed on the screen a group of tag files saved in the same save operation May 2001 for version 2 1 267 SUOISI AUOD 9 Messo rsions Glossary amp Conve baud rate bit BNC connector bottom tracking byte Cancel case sensitive Centronics cleaning cartridge click clipped Coda format COMI COM2 compression continuous record contrast corrected navigation data creator node critical length
294. rected Similarly if corrected navigation data is available this can also be used to provide a further stage of correction 8 12 Application Specific Area Tape 1 File Information Ship Coda format version 1 21 A E 00543662 10 N 06686464 30 Line Name 0 Disola 6 6 99 16 35 05 Kp 353 799 Br Fix Number 2 Channel 1 2 3 4 2 A Sarean Eier oe Right y v Y Thu 02 Nov 2000 10 40 11 Info Beginning of tape medium A Figure 8 13 Application Specific Areain Acquisition Mode Settings A Towfish Channel 1 y2 v3 v4 E 00000000 00 N 00000000 00 Channel State On Display y Sample Freq 40000 Hz Channel 1 2 3 4 Samples per Ping 2872 samples eau VV Start Delay O msecs Fight Vy Oy vy Fri 03 Nov 2000 10 55 54 Info No nav updates for 30 seconds A Figure 8 14 Application Specific Area in Playback Mode In playback mode the Application Specific Area shows three types of information Tape Channels or Disk Channels Position and Display see Figure 8 13 this pagerand Figure 8 14 this page e Tape Channel Disk Channels shows information about the type of survey data on the current tape or disk during playback it refers to the data being replayed Depending on which drive is being used this frame of the display is labelled either Tape 1 Channels Tape 2 Channels Disk 1 Channels or Disk 2 Channels e Position This section display
295. red manually by clicking on the User Input and typing the zone number in the text entry box Getting High Quality Data Step 5 Bottom Tracking The Processing Fish Height pop up see Figure 5 21 page 68 enables you to select the source of the fish height to be used during data acquisition and playback The fish height is used to determine the seabed return position which is used in feature height calculations and in slant range correction May 2001 for version 2 1 67 WwW 19 S S va eu Buisn In acquisition mode the resulting fish heights are recorded to the data storage device with the raw data In playback mode previously recorded values may be used or they may be reviewed using one of the bottom detection algorithms available in the Fish Height Seabed Tracking pop up The Fish Height Record File utility is provided to allow the user to store the results of this review Where the user iterates on difficult data to obtain better fish height results the record file can be updated with the new values On playback of a data file which has a fish height record file the system will automatically apply this file to the data set if the enabling toggle Remember Use Previous Position is selected Section 5 5 1 4 From telemetry data acquisition mode only Figure 5 21 Fish Height Setup Popup Window for Sidescan Data The Channel tab forms are used to select which channel or channels to setting to e fish h
296. requency gt TriggerRate x SamplesPerPing a SamplingFrequency 2 ae x SamplesPerPing 4 Sweep Time The sweep time selected must be long enough to ensure that the correct range is achieved In addition the sweep time is related to the sampling frequency and the ping rate The ping rate should be slowmenough or the trigger period should be long enough to ensure that each ping has enough time to travel through the water penetrate the correct depth and return to the receiving transducer In mathematical terms this means that SweepTime lt Trig gerPeriod DeadTime Allow dead time of at least 2ms In order to calculate the correct sweep time from the custom settings one mustuse the sampling frequency and samples per ping values If one wants a sweep time of 50 milliseconds one must ensure that sweep time is related to the sampling frequency and samples per ping in the custom settings according to Swe fTime gt SamplesBerPing SamplingFrequency In addition the sweep time determines the range of the ping through water and sediment Range Sweep Time x Velocity of Sound Through Medium Assuming that all sediments have a speed of sound higher than water we can calculate the maximum sweep time required for a specific range using PenetrationRequired Ti SS SS ee VelocityOfSoundInWater So once the sweep time is calculated for the required range then the sampling frequency and ping rate can be calculated The example whic
297. res If the same ping were to travel through rock the range would be 0 025 x 1800 45 metres Default Sub Bottom Profiler Setups The following table shows the settings used by the DA System system for a Standard Sub Bottom Profiler data channel SweepTime True Range Trigger Trigger Sample Samples msec in water period Rate pings Frequency Channel m msec per sec Hz 50 75 50 20 40 960 2048 100 150 100 10 35 840 3584 200 300 200 5 19 200 3840 May 2001 for version 2 1 205 saoipueddy 206 May 2001 for version 2 1 B Coda Navigation Data String B 1 To get the most from the Coda DA System system you must ensure that the system has access to the highest quality navigation data available The following variables should be passed to the system if at all possible towfish easting UTM or lat long towfish northing UTM or lat long towfish Kp towfish DCC water depth towfish altitude towfish speed made good towfish heading survey line designation fix number and system time A number of optional navigation string entries are available on the system new entries can be edited on the system or can be made up by Coda on request However we would encourage you to use the CODA string format as it has all the fields necessary to ensure that features such as on screen measurement and cursor position reporting function correctly The nav string should be updated as
298. riod 2 Samples Per Ping 3 Sampling Frequency 4 Sweep Time corresponding to range depth Again these parameters are interrelated in a similar way to that described in Section A2 1 Trigger Period This represents another method of presenting the triggering rate or ping rate If the DA System system is triggered externally this value is computed automatically and can be read from the General Information Area as it corresponds to the pings s If the sonar is triggered by the DA System that is an internal trigger is output via the Trigger Out connection this value can be automatically calculated by the system or computed by the user to ensure that it provides a trigger at the correct rate e it is not in conflict with the samples per ping and sampling frequency values as outlined below 2 Samples per Ping The number of samples or pixels or dots used to digitise each ping This corresponds to the number of pixels which would be drawn across a thermal recorder s sheet for the channel 202 May 2001 for version 2 1 A 3 1 3 Sampling Frequency The rate at which the digitising hardware samples the incoming analogue data The sampling frequency must be high enough to ensure that the required number of samples per ping are acquired for each successive trigger These three parameters are closely related according to the expression a SamplingFrequency gt NumberOfPingsPerSecond x SamplesPerPing T Therefore SamplingF
299. rk unless the format is Coda Copy Tape Format The Copy Tape option allows tapes to be copied from Coda SEG Y Q MIPS or SDEF to any of the CODA SEG Y Q MIPSTM or SDEF formats see Section 11 This option can also be used for making backup copies of data tapes Note While Codadechnologies Ltd allow playing of SDEF SEG Y and Q MIPS compatible format we do not guarantee that tapes of SEG Y format which have been recorded on other systems will play on the CODA DA System Although every effort has been made to ensure that tapes in SDEF SEG Y and Q MIPS format are compatible with those produced on other systems no guarantee of compatibility can be given For further details of the SEG Y format contact the Society for Exploration Geophysicists P O Box 3098 Tulsa Oklahoma 74101 USA Note Some SEG Y readers cannot read the data recorded or copied in SEG Y format if the files have channels of differing line length May 2001 for version 2 1 227 seolpueddy 228 May 2001 for version 2 1 H H 1 H 1 1 H 1 2 H 1 3 Tape Drive Units The DA System is supplied with one of three tape units the HP C1533 or the HP C1599A DAT DDS2 4mm tape drive or the Exabyte Eliant 820 8mm tape drive unit The DAT tape drives may be recognised by the size of the slot for tapes 1 cm x 7 5 cm which is smaller than that of the Exabyte unit 1 6 cm x 9 5 cm Hewlett Packard HP C1533 C1599A 4mm DAT Tape Unit He
300. rmat to another data format always results in the loss of navigation information for example fix marks are not copied into SDEF format gt from Coda format to SDEF format results in the loss of channel information so all ubsequently show as PORT when data in this format is played back da format the data is copied in the current version of Coda format This e target tape may be recorded in a more recent version than the source tape if also in Coda format py part of 2 stop the cop goto appropriate start point and then copy from there Pressing cancel oint It will not cancel the complete copy No well define e andards exist for the storing of sidescan and sub bottom profiler data to SG i ossible that data tapes not recorded on the DA System may not be able to be 5 the case contact Coda Technologies for further help 11 2 F seed Arly Store Factory Cancel J Figure 11 2 Copy Media Pop up Window This menu option allows you to copy data from optical disk to optical disk however it is only possible if you have a dual drive DA System The From Source Device and To Target Device option selection buttons display the which the data will be copied and to which it will be written The default setting isi 1 to Optical 2 Clicking on the option buttons displays the other options available The Store action button at the bottom of the pop up gives you the option of stori selected source and target drives as
301. rmined as follows e Itis desirable to collect as many samples as possible from the sidescan signal where possible the number used should be a multiple of 512 as this is the width available per display channel in the data display area of the screen e The minimum sample frequency used should be about 20KHz to ensure that no aliasing of the signal occurs e Using a maximum towfish altitude of 40 of true range the required slant range is 1502 202 53 85m The range is 53 85m giving a maximum ping rate of approximately 2x 53 85 eae 13 93Hz To fit 1024 samples into a period of ao 71 8ms would give a 198 May 2001 for version 2 1 A 2 1 2 A 2 1 3 sample period of aor 70 1us or a sample frequency of 14 3KHz Similarly 1536 samples would give a sample frequency of 23 1KHz 2048 samples a frequency of 28 5KHz and 2560 samples a sampling frequency of 35 7KHz Therefore choose 2560 samples per data channel and a sample rate of approximately 35 7KHz e Allow a dead time of at least 2ms before each trigger No start delay or line reversal is required the line reversal toggles are all off and the range will be calculated from the elapsed time since the trigger pulse so range should be set to Auto The trigger should be trigger A which should be set for an external trigger The choice of voltage range will depend on the voltage produced by the sidescan which will in turn depend on the towing altitude input gai
302. rom the list of tag t in reports produced using the current tag database Add All Tags Clicking on this button adds all of the currently active tag types to Contents tab form e list displayed on the Delete All Tags Clicking on this button deletes all of the currently selected tag types from the list displayed on the Contents tab form 10 10 1 2 Generating Reports Using a Corrected Nav Data File 1 Acquire the data as usual creating event tags as required All the tag database entries contain raw navigation data at this point so the report files are uncorrected 2 With the DA System in playback mode select FileCorrected Nav Input May 2001 for version 2 1 157 The Corrected Nav Input pop up appears see Section 6 6 1 3 Select the location of the corrected nav file Floppy If floppy disk is the source insert the appropriate floppy disk into the disk drive e Hard Disk If the hard disk is the source select a file from the File Selection window that appears 4 Select Settings and click on the Corrected button in the Nav Data Type area of the pop up see Section 6 6 2 5 Follow the steps to generate a event database report in Section 10 10 1 Floppy Disk the required files or by holding down lt Control gt while clicking on the tag file na the report click on the Generate Report button The watch pointer will appe is being generated Alternatively double clicking on the tag file name or automatica
303. ross track offset may be entered to allow the DA System to calculate a derived fish position see Section 6 64 The setting of the Nav position reference is indicated in the General Information Area by a picture ofa fish or a ship or in the Display Survey Data Pop up In the Raw Nav Input Nav String Decode tab frame click on Nav input on and then click on Apply Navigation input is then read and merged with the sonar databeing digitised and recorded If Nav input on has not been selected when recording starts a warning appears Note Navigation data is only displayed or updated when Nav input on is selected in the Raw Nav Input Nav String Decode tab pop up It is not displayed when Display Raw Nav String is selected or when Turn nav input off is selected When navigation input is turned on the system monitors input from the navigation input device If no navigation input is received within a given number of seconds specified as part of the navigation format for Coda format it is 30 seconds a message appears on the screen warning that navigation input has not been detected This warning continues to pop up at regular intervals until navigation input is once more detected or navigation input is switched off To turn the input off the Raw Nav Input Nav String Decode tab menu item should be reselected and Nav input off clicked followed by selecting the OK at the bottom of the pop up May 2001 for version 2 1 65 Wo s S va eu
304. rvey is available as an additional software module If you have bought this module refer to the CODA Trackplot Mosaic Manual For further information contact Coda Technologies Multiple Windows Fie Window Display Settings Tagging Reporting Processing REA SAINS ie TE Qp m Fie Window Display Settings Tagging Reporting Processing 4m avtdsaaes ate ga w E 00296395 10 Devices Channels Fast Tags 7 Analog Chi Port Corrected Nav correction off CODA Coda Technologies Ltd 1994 2000 All Rights Reserved DA200 Version 2 1 1 1022 al Analog Ch2 Stbd Corrected Nav correction off 68 Analog Ch3 Seismic Corrected Nav correction off ala mein Figure 3 5 The Main Display Area in Playback Mode showing two Data Display windows Wed 22 Nov 2000 17 43 38 Info You are working in proiect TempProiect Depending on how your system is configured it is possible to activate a number of data display windows When you switch your Coda system on the default is one data display window configured as a dual channel vertically scrolling down display 22 May 2001 for version 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 Opening a Data Display Window Window Type Horizontal Window wy Number of Channels Ft em Scroll Direction Right MA Data Input Device Tape 1 OK Apply Cancel Fig re 3 6 The Open New Window p
305. s The Speed x Time method tends to give more accurate results over short distances raw navigation data is typically updated only every second and instantaneous headings can change considerably This method however should only be used if you have an accurate speed over ground supplied through the navigation string The Difference is E N pair method should be used for long measurements or when corrected navigation data is available If the screen is scrolling when the measurement is performed the measuring start point scrolls with the data This allows measurements to be made of features that are larger than the screen height There are a few other points to bear in mind when making on screen measurements amp For sidescan data labelled SS Port and SS Stbd in the Description field of the Open Acqui sition menu the height is also displayed in this pop up The height reading is valid only if a shadow has been measured This height corresponds to the height of an event that would cast a shadow corresponding to the across track distance measured on the screen e If the display is paused the blue measuring line remains on screen until the measurement pop up is dismissed e An accurate fish height is essential fonon screen measurement see Section 5 5 e In acquisition mode the start and end positions of the measurement line are calculated using raw navigation data including towfish heading and velocity so the measurements are dependen
306. s are not in ascending order nav correction will not be applied correctly The system s basic frame of reference is the time stamp for each ping which is why it is necessary for the DA System clock to be synchronised with the navigation clock if navigation correction is to be carried out Example 800984945 435 2116 332348 99 5757666 95 age Ia This entry means that the correct position for fix 2116 taken at 800984945 435 was 332348 99 East and 5757666 95 North no update was made to the heading kp dcc layback or fish offset fields It should be noted that navigation data can only be corrected if ities between two points in the corrected nav file interpolation to discover actual position and heading is otherwise impossible C 1 UTC Time Offsets UTC Time Offset UTC 00 00 00 1 January 1970 0 00 00 00 1 January 1996 820454400 00 00 00 1 January 1997 852076800 00 00 00 1 January 1998 883612800 00 00 00 1 January 1999 915148800 00 00 00 1 January 2000 946684800 00 00 00 1 January 2001 978307200 00 00 00 1 January 2002 1009843200 00 00 00 1 January 2003 1041379200 00 00 00 1 January 2004 1072915200 00 00 00 1 January 2005 1104537600 May 2001 for version 2 1 209 s pu ddy 210 May 2001 for version 2 1 D Editing Navigation Library Strings The DA System is delivered with a library for interpreting different navigation data string formats Users are encouraged to use one of the formats in that librar
307. s 2 205 0 4536 pounds avoirdu pois May 2001 for version 2 1 265 SUOISJOAUOD 9 JBSSOJE 266 May 2001 for version 2 1 Glossary A D conversion absolute AC acquisition acquisition mode acquisition parameters acquisition sub system across track across track resolution active channel aliasing along track along track resolution altitude ambient temperature analogue annotation Application Specific Area Apply ASCII auto pause release automatic position pointer automatic sub sample batch the process of converting an analogue signal to a digital one using a predefined frame of reference 0 Kp or 0 00 on Ist Janu ary 1970 see also relative Alternating Current mains supply see data acquisition see data acquisition mode the settings used within the acquisition sub system to determine the quality and volume of the digital data obtained the parts of the DA100 DA200 concerned with obtaining a digital form of the analogue sonar inputs at 90 to the towfish or vessel track the distance across track covered by each sample of sonar data a data channel which is currently being digitised distortion of the input signal caused by carrying out digitisation at too low a sampling frequency along the line of the towfish or vessel track the distance along track covered by each sample of sonar data of towfish thedistance above the seabed the temperatu
308. s selected by clicking on the appropriate one off selection switch for Channel The up and down arrows can then be used to look through all the acqui sition settings for the data channel selected 136 May 2001 for version 2 1 9 Data Output 9 1 This section explains how to obtain print outs of acquired data You can obtain hardcopy by sending the data to a printer or thermal plotter or you can save the image displayed on screen in either a Postscript format or a TIFF format images can then be incorporated into reports or other computer packages Many common windows applications for example word processing packages and presentation packages are able to import Postscript and TIFF graphics Hardcopy Output The Hardcopy Output option sends digital data via a parallel interface or a GPIB interface to a printer or thermal plotter it can be used in acquisition or playback mode and allows real time plotting of survey data Lines of data are sent to the printer or plotter as they are displayed at the top of the Data Display Area or as themreach the bottom of the Data Display Area The second option allows event tags to be positioned before the data is printed However the rate at which data can be sent to the printer or plotter may be limited when used with certain types of plotter preventing the real time plotting of data in acquisition mode and slowing the rate of data display It is normal for the display to pause when a print
309. s set up Have you included all the tag types required by the client 1 2 Are the start end codes correct 1 3 Are the correct tags active May 2001 for version 2 1 253 SISI IOYUD Checklists GeoKit P1100 Mobilisation Comments Initials 1 4 Are the forced measures set for the appropriate tags 1 5 Is the Tag Setup saved on the system hard disk optical disk 1 6 Has the Tag Setup been saved to tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Backup Setup Files 1 7 Has the Tag Setup file name changed on the system hard disk optical disk 1 8 Has the Tag Setup been reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Restore Setup Files 1 9 Is the tape optical disk labelled and write protected Fast Tag Files Are the Fast Tag Setup files correct for the job 2 2 Is the Fast Tag Setup saved on the system hard disk optical disk 23 Has the Fast Tag Setup saved to tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Backup Setup Files 24 Has the Fast Tag Setup file name changed on the system hard disk optical disk 2 5 Has the Fast Tag Setup been reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Restore Setup Files 2 6 Is the tape optical disk labelled and write protected 2 7 Has the right mouse button been set up for maximum efficiency
310. s the UTM or lat long co ordinates of the Shiptor Towfish for the most recent line of data displayed at the top of the Data Display Area When the waterfall display is scrolling these co ordinates are continuously updated e Display This section shows which data channels are being displayed and where they are displayed namely the left or right display channel the number of channels available for display corresponds to the number of channels being recorded or replayed Any data channel can be displayed on either the left or right display channel by clicking on the corresponding toggle provided it is on the same trigger as the data in the other channel For example data channel 2 can be displayed as the right display channel by clicking on the selector toggle under channel 2 in the row which corresponds to the right display channel In acquisition mode the Application specific Area is divided into the following areas Settings Position and Display The Position and Display area have the same function as in playback mode e Settings On optical disk systems this area displays the amount of disk space free when recording Unfortunately it is not possible to display the amount of space remaining on a May 2001 for version 2 1 135 tape because of the limitations of SCSI tape devices It also displays the acquisition system settings for a specific data channel as set through the Open Acquisition pop up under the File menu The data channel i
311. s typed correctly the following prompt appears Which tape device do you wish to copy setup files to default 1 1 2 Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt A prompt appears asking for a tape to be inserted into tape drive 1 Insert the tape into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt to continue The setup files are then saved on tape The following prompt appears Setup files were successfully backed up to tape drive I Restore Setup Files This menu item is used to restore setup files from tape to the hard drive Note Existing setup files with the same name on the hard disk will automatically be overwritten When Restore Setup Files is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly the following prompt appears May 2001 for version 2 1 171 12 3 10 12 340 1 12 3 10 2 12 3 10 3 12 3 10 4 12 3 10 5 Which tape devise do you wish to copy setup files from default 1 1 2 Press either lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt and then press lt Return gt A prompt appears asking for the tape to be inserted into tape drive 1 Insert the tape into Tape Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Type lt go gt or press lt Return gt to continue The setup files are then copied from the tape to the hard drive The following prompt appears
312. samples sy Manual sub sample tin fi l samples Subsample Method average i Duplication Method Replicate i Figure 7 4 The Left Display Channel Pop up Window The attributes of the Left Display Channel or Right Display Channel can be changed by selecting this menu item Settings Left Display Channel The pop up is divided into Single Channel Display settings which apply when only one channel is displayed in the Data Display Area and the Dual Channel Display settings which are used when both data channels are displayed The Offset is the number of samples from the start of the raw ping at which the screen display begins for example if the raw ping is 2560 samples long an offset of 400 will shift the line 400 samples to the right for example in order to remove the water column Negative offset values are therefore invalid the system will not accept them and will display an error message and ask for the offset value to be changed The visible effect of changing the offset value is to move the data across the screen Sub sampled Line White Sample a Black Sample Sub sample 3 Line Start Offset 5 Full Resolution Line Figure 7 5 Offset and Sub sampling of Incoming Data May 2001 for version 2 1 105 Using the DA System 7 5 The sub sample rate determines how much of the full resolution line appears in the display by ignoring a proportion of the samples and displaying the remaind
313. saved on the system hard disk optical disk 2 3 Has the Fast Tag Setup been saved to tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Backup Setup Files 24 Has the Fast Tag Setup file name changed on the system hard disk optical disk 2 5 Has the Fast Tag Setup been reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Restore Setup Files May 2001 for version 2 1 259 SSINOEUN Checklists GeoKit P1100 Interpretation Comments Initials 2 6 Is the tape optical disk labelled and write protected 2 7 Has the right mouse button been set up for maximum efficiency 3 System Hard Disk 3 1 Have all previous interpretations and tag files been stored to tape optical disk and labelled correctly 3 3 Have all unwanted tag files on the system hard disk optical disk been deleted 4 Report Files 4 1 Are the Report Setup files correct for the job 4 2 Can the Report ASCII output on floppy bexead by the system the report is intended for 4 3 Is the report format as required and meaningful 4 4 Is the Report Setup file saved onto the system hard disk optical disk 4 5 Have the Report Setup files been saved to tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Backup Setup Files 4 6 Has the Report Setup file name changed on the system hard disk optical disk 4 7 Has the Repor
314. scrolled by clicking the middle mouse button in the area between the rectangle and the arrows in the border that is clicking the right mouse button 10 of the way between the two arrows moves 10 of the way through the data clicking 90 of the way between the arrows moves 90 of the way through the data The Default Formats option in the Navigation Format Editor accessed by selecting Edit Nav Format can be used to reset the user copy of the navigation string library to its default values Note Any changes that you make are discarded when Default Formats is pressed May 2001 for version 2 1 211 seolpueddy Appendices D 1 Navigation Interpretation Lists A single navigation library entry is composed of an interpretation_list which is defined to be composed of a setup_list followed by a value_list The setup_list contains general definitions about the incoming navigation data whether GMT or local time is being sent for example while the value_list is the list of variables which will be updated from the navigation string interpretation_list setup_list value_list setup list setup entry value entry setup_list setup_entry setup_field_name value From the above it can be seen that a setup_entry in the setup_list is composed of a setup_field_name followed by a value The list of setup_field_names and their legal values is given in the following table setup_field_name Value Description Status
315. scrolling option list and in the text entry box enter the Kp value that you want to find The Kp value is obtained from the navigation stored with each ping as the basis for the search Specify either an absolute or a relative Kp value Enter an absolute Kp value by typing the number including punctuation in the box for example type 345 12 to go to Kp345 12 The system searches forwards or backwards to find the Kp requested Enter a relative Kp value by prefixing the Kp value with or To use this command you must keep track of whether the Kp are increasing or decreasing as the data is played The system searches forwards or backwards to find the Kp requested If the system is unable to find the Kp requested it goes toithe nearest point it can find on the data If that point is more than 25 metres from the position requested a warning pop up window appears Note Note The Kp values used for goto commands are taken from the raw navigationdata stored with each ping Goto a Specific Fix Number Click on Attribute and select Fix Number in the scrolling option list and in the text entry box enter the fix number that you want to find This command uses the fix number from the tag database entry Again specify either an absolute or a relative value Enter an absolute fix number by typing the number in the box The system searches forwards or backwards to get to the fix number requested Enter a relative value by prefixing the fix numbe
316. seabed directly below the transducer P1100 the true height of the bottom of the pipe above the seabed May 2001 for version 2 1 275 9 JBSSOJE rsions Glossary amp Conve pipe striking angle pixel playback mode playback speed pointer pop up menu pop up window port Portrait mode positive edge Postscript power down power up pre emptive scheduling press and drag processed navigation data PSU pull down menu Q MIPS format random access real time reboot recording session 276 May 2001 for version 2 1 see pipe grazing angle picture element the dots on the screen from which an image or GUI is built see data playback mode the rate at which sonar lines are displayed on the screen the icon which reflects changes in the mouse position or move ments of the trackball Usually an arrow but may take other forms a menu which appears as the result of a selection in a previous menu any form of window which appears as the result of a mouse trackball or keyboard selection from a menu in the interface equivalent to interface also left see also starboard of Postscript documents printed so that the bottom edge of the document is aligned with the shorter edge of the paper of TTL inputs a signal which changes from 0 to 5V a language for describing printed matter text diagrams and images the procedure to be observed when turning off the mains power to
317. sed Rewind Review This button has two modes of operation during playback they determine the speed of rewind If the Play button is depressed when this button is pressed review mode is selected a tape drive will rewind a tape 250 lines at a time and an optical disk drive will rewind a disk 7 lines at a time stepping back through the data and displaying it on screen If the Play button is not depressed in other words data is not being played when this button is pressed rewind mode is selected both a tape drive and an optical disk drive will rewind the media 10 000 lines of data at a time The data lines are not displayed on screen in this mode Each mode of operation continues until the Stop button is pressed Ejecting Tapes and Disks 1 Click on the Stop button in the Data Control Area 2 Do one of the following e If you are using a tape system press the Eject button on the front of the tape drive e If you are using an optical disk system select File Open Playback click on the Unmount button in the Open Playback pop up click on the OK button and then press the Eject button on the front of the disk drive Deleting Files from an Optical Disk A file can be deleted by selecting it and clicking on the Delete button This option is password protected and you will be prompted for the correct installation password before the file can be deleted If an optical disk is read only the delete button willbe greyed out It is not
318. setup we must set up the value_list These key words are used to access data passed in your navigation string We need to access the values in the order in which they appear hours ASCII Number 2 This will read 12 216 May 2001 for version 2 1 minutes ASCII Number 2 This willread 13 seconds ASCII Number Variable This will read 45 65 northing ASCII Number 2 This will read 55 Northing Minutes ASCII Number Variable This willread 23 45 North Switch ASCII Text N easting ASCII Number 3 This will read 093 Easting Minutes ASCH Number Variable This willread 33 45 East Switch ASCII Text E None of thenavigation entries shown above requires an offset or gain to be applied We could have entered a 0 then a after each entry but as this is the system default we have inten tionally left offset and gain blank We are not interested in any of the other values in the navigation string so we are going to junk them The following does this for us junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCH Text Variable junk ASCII Tex
319. sh Height from Other Channel allows the fish height value to be copied from another channel using the option selection button For example channel could be set to Automatic Tracking and channel 2 then set to copy the height from channel 1 This can be useful when the data in channel 2 is too noisy for automatic tracking to work reliably Automatic Tracking offers three methods for automatic detection e Edge Detection This method automatically sets it own thresholds and looks for the fastest edge in the search window It is most suited to hard seafloor and high frequency shallow seismic sonar Power Density This method automatically sets its own thresholds and looks for the greatest energy in the search window It is most suited to lower frequency profilers e Thresholding This method which sets a threshold amplitude for the bottom return and is the preferred method of detection because it is highly configurable for varying conditions gt automatic Tracking Sidescan Seismic gt Edge Detection Method Setup Power Density Thresholdin Reset Bottom b i Position Figure 5 38 Fish Height Setting Method Seismic and Other sonar Clicking on the Method Setup button pops up the Automatic Tracking Setup pop up The setup options are A AKI Irsk Sep LIT LEE D Lip dallen ross Jet Les W maw Hmh weeg 8 Alien Anrim Sp d Nd Ass hr m du 1 Erp Rd RHI TA u Figure 5 39 Automa
320. should be followed though tag files cannot be saved to tape while the tape drive is being used for data acquisition or tape playback Tag files can however be saved to the hard drive You have to eject a data tape from the system before you can select Load Save Loading Tag Files from Tape When playing back data tapes you may need to reload a set of saved tag files Note Loading tag database files with the same name as any files currently onthe hard disk will cause the files on the hard disk to be overwritten Note The Load Remote option does not relate to loading tag files from tape To use this option contact Coda Technologies To load tag files from tape to hard disk 1 Select Tagging Manage Tag Files The Tag Database Management pop up appears 2 Click on the Load Save button The Load Save Tags to Tape pop up appears 3 In the Load Verify frame of the pop up select List All Batches to find the position of the May 2001 for version 2 1 147 wasks va eu usn batch that contains the required tag file 4 In the Load Verify area of the pop up select Load Batch The system prompts you to load the tag file tape into the appropriate tape drive 5 When the tape is loaded click on the OK button The tag file or files from the batch are loaded automatically and the tape is rewound to the beginning e If you have problems loading tag files eject and reload the tag file tape to make sure that it returns to the star
321. splayed in one or a number of windows Although channel options can be called from any open data display window if a pop up is already open calling it from another open data display window will only have the effect of bring the open pop up to the foreground of the main display Data Display Window Identification The Title Bar of each open window indicates the format of that window If more than one window is open with the same format a number will be added to the description The description in the Title Bar is repeated in the associated tab of the General Information Area see Figure 3 5 page 22 Colour Coding In addition to labels describing the format of each display window a colour coding system is used to identify which channel or channels are being displayed in each window and which channel data is being displayed in each General Information Area tab The following aspects of the Data Display Area can be seen in Figure 3 5 page 22 May 2001 for version 2 1 23 npon uol e The channel colours are indicated on a bar on each channel icon on the Channels tab of the Application Specific Area e The channels being displayed in each data display window are indicated by coloured buttons on the top right hand side of the Menu Bar of each data display window e The channel to which the information in the General Information Area refers is indicated by the colour of its border 3 2 5 Window Polling Pressing the lt Alt gt
322. stem 5 20 Write protect the floppy and write the file name on it 5 21 Does the system time synchronise with the nav time and does it remain so for gt 2 minutes 252 May 2001 for version 2 1 DA System Mobilisation Comments Initials 6 Hardcopy Output 6 1 Does the printer produce the correct out put in playback 6 2 Does the printer produce the correct out put in record real time 6 3 Do fix marks appear in the same place on annotator output if used as they do on the DA system Note Switch off annotator output after you have checked the fix marks 6 4 Do you have sufficient printer paper for the job 7 Data Recording TA Does data recorded have the nav and time set and is it updated correctly 7 2 Do the start and end recording pop ups appear at the start and end of recording 7 3 Does data recorded on one tape optical disk drive play back on another Are any tape disk drive warning lights active 74 Do you have enough tapes of the right kind optical disks forthe job 8 System Security 8 1 Is the system lashed down securely 8 2 Is the monitor lashed down securely 8 3 Are all cables tied down with no direct strain possible Signed Date CODA system mobilised for acquisition M 2 GeoKit P1100 Mobilisation Checklist GeoKit PI100 Mobilisation Comments Initials 1 Tag Setup Files 1 1 Are the correct tag type
323. sulting in straight lines between the grip points This determines how smoothly the grey levels change in the display A smooth curve gives a smooth transition between greyscales while a graph composed of line segments can cause more abrupt changes in greyscale Straight line functions are more suited to thresholding or rectifying data to aid interpretation Clicking on the spline icon toggles the smoothing on and off 7 5 4 3 Adding a Grip Point ADD This smart icon is used to add grip points to the graph To add a grip point click on the icon The pointer changes to an arrow with the extra grip point Click the cursor at the location on the graph where the grip pointis to be added The head of the arrow corre sponds to the location of the new grip point 7 5 4 4 Deleting a Grip Point F This smart icon is used to remove grip points from the graph To remove a grip point click on the icon The cursor changes to a pair of scissors Click the cursor on the grip point to be removed The graph is redrawn without this grip point Note The two end grip points cannot be deleted 7 5 4 5 Resetting the Graph Ga This smart icon is used to reset the graph to a straight line with four grip points restoring the Data Display Area to its original state 108 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 5 4 6 A Practical Example Rectifying the Data CODA DA200 Image Enhancement Setup Left Right FE Input Colourmap Greyscale y
324. t Variable Our complete interpretation list for the example navigation string looks like this ident NMEA 0183 GPGGA Time Basis GMT Nav Basis LATLONG separator ASCII TEXT key ASCII TEXT GPGGA hours ASCII Number 2 minutes ASCII Number 2 seconds ASCII Number Variable northing ASCH Number 2 Northing Minutes ASCII Number Variable North Switch ASCII Text N easting ASCII Number 3 Easting Minutes ASCII Number Variable May 2001 for version 2 1 217 saolpueddy Appendices East Switch ASCII Text SE junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable junk ASCII Text Variable Nav Termination Binary Integer 1 10 endnav D 4 Example Navigation Library Entry The following navigation library examplesiare taken directly from the navigation library on the DA System Coda nav type CODA Easting Northing KP DCC Depth Altitude Speed Heading Fix SpeedofSound DataAge LineName NavTime ident CODA Time Basis GMT Nav Basis MET
325. t Setup been reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu gt Restore Setup Files 4 8 Is the tape optical disk write protected and labelled Signed Date CODA system mobilised for Tagging amp Reporting 260 May 2001 for version 2 1 Part VII Glossary amp Conver sions 262 May 2001 for version 2 1 Conversion Table The following tables may be used for conversion from one unit of measurement to another The units are grouped under the headings angle area length distance temperature time velocity speed weight An Example of Use of the Tables To convert a measurement from a unit in the first column Unit A to a unit in the fourth column Unit B you multiply the measurement by the multiplier conversion factor in the second column Unit A to Unit B multiplier conversion For example to convert 10 knots to metres per second 10 x 0 5145 5 145 metres per second To convert a measurement from a unit in the fourth column Unit B to a unit in the first column Unit A hyou multiply the measurement by the multiplier conversion factor in the third column Unit B to Unit A multiplier conversion For example to convert 10 metres per second to knots 10 x 1 944 19 44 knots Angle Unit A Unit A gt Unit B Unit B gt Unit A Unit B multiplier conver multiplier conver sion sion degre
326. t channel Perform the test in Section 12 1 1 The displayed data should b a flat line with noise no greater than one binary digit on the Input Range of the Scale Display Data pop up window Repeat this for each channel The Title Bar Menu Figure 12 1 The Title bar Menu The DA System provides additional commands through its Title Bar menu You use this pull down menu when you want to test navigation loopback data change the size of the main display and restart the programme The Title bar menu is accessed by clicking and holding the right mouse button on the Title Bar which is displayed across the top of the DA System main display see Section 3 1 Having selected the Title bar menu drag the pointer to the menu item required see Figure 12 1 this page May 2001 for version 2 1 165 12 2 1 Start Nav Loopback Test When you select Start Nav Loopback Test the Nav Loopback Menu appears It lists several navigation formats see Figure 12 2 this page Clicking on one of these formats starts a program that synthesises navigation data output When the appropriate loopback connector a 9 way or 25 way D type connector with pins 2 and 3 shorted together is connected to the COM port the DA System s navigation interface can be tested as described in the Off line Testing section Clicking on another format ends the loopback test and starts another one While the loopback program is running the DA System beeps continuously
327. t of the tape 6 Remove the tag file tape from the drive and store it safely isk save tag files to tape and also to list tag files which have be i For single tape systems tag files cannot be accessed on tape while d for any other purpose that is data acqui sition or playback PR Note Tag files and sonar data should be saved to overwritten being accidentally Saving Batches When tag files are saved each separate save i contains the highlighted tag files in the Tag Database is no limit to the number of tag files which can be saved as a single batch Tag files are selected for Save by clicking the left mouse button on the tag file na of tag files If more than one tag file is to be saved either press and drag the left mouse button to highlight a group of tags or hold down lt Control gt while clicking on the more tag files to a group 148 May 2001 for version 2 1 Listing Batches be used to move backwards or forwards tape drive into the tag file directory on e 1 1 hat this is taking place Note If any of the tag files on the tape have the same name as those already in the DA Syste directory they will overwrite the files on the hard disk The tag database files are saved in binary machine readable format using thi access the database in an ASCII format suitable for import into spreadsheets d processing packages use the Report Generation option see Section 10 10 2 es
328. t on the quality of the navigation data e In playback mode corrected navigation data is only used in the calculation if the Nav Data Type in the Settings menu is set to Corrected e The along track dimension of a measurement is based on either an estimate of the towfish velocity and heading or the difference between the start and end positions derived from incoming navigation data e If lat long co ordinates are being used by the DA System as part of the nav string measure ments of start and end positions are performed by converting the ping lat longvalues to UTM that is Easting Northing values and then calculating the start and end positions from these Where necessary the start and end positions are converted back to lat long for display e True cross track distances are calculated whether slant range correction is on or not see Section 7 7 2 1 e To make measurements in the zoom window the data in the zoom window must still be visible in the Data Display Area 130 May 2001 for version 2 1 8 7 8 8 Measurement Values Start Position E 00296367 80 N 00965738 40 End Position E 00296393 10 N 00965697 50 Start Kp 0000 000 End Kp 0000 000 Start DCC 0000 000 End DCC 0000 000 Start Sample 795 End Sample 455 Along track pings 121 Cross Track Slant Distance 7 15 m Distance 48 29 m Height 7 90 m Done Figure 8 7 On screen Distance Measurement The Measurement Values pop up which appears
329. taCruz Operation Inc Novell is a registered trademark of Novell Inc Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Postscript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Q MIPSTM is a registered trademark of Triton Elics International Maxoptix and T5 2600 are registered trademarks of Maxoptix Corporation The SAS and FAS asynchronous I O packages were developed by Uwe Doring and Jim Murray Coda Technologies Ltd did not develop and do not hold the copyright toithese packages The original SAS package in its entirety is held in home PKG of the DA system xvertext 5 0 Copyright c 1993 Alan Richardson mppa3 uk ac sussex syma Permission to use copy modify and distribute the xvertext software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation All work developed as a consequence of the use of this program should duly ac knowledge such use No representations are made about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty 2 May 2001 for version 2 1 Read This First Security Devices Coda systems are fitted with either a DAT or an Exabyte tape IO sub system or an optical disk IO sub system Both of the sub systems are cov
330. tab turn green to indicate that a filter is active Alternatively you can load previous settings using the Load button You can also save the current settings using the Save button The name of the currentsetup file is displayed at the top of the pop up If an asterisk appears beside the name it means that the settings have changed from those saved to disk Continuously Time Varying Filters This option is available only for low pass and high pass filters When this option is selected you can enter start and end cut off frequencies and the filter order The order and the start cut off frequency defines the filter at the first sample to be processed whereas the filter for the last sample to be processed is defined by the filter order and the end cut off frequency Between these samples the filter is designed by linearly interpolating between the start and end cut off frequencies Apply Filter Limits This frame allows you to select the start and end points between which a digital filter is applied For the start sample specify one from Sensor Seabed or Time If Sensor is selected the filter is applied from the start of data onwards whereas if Seabed is selected the filter is only applied from the seabed onwards You must ensure that a valid fish height value is available to the system see Figure 5 21 page 68 Selecting Time allows you to apply the filter from a fixed time in the data This time is specified via the text entry box as a two
331. tages First the current tag is removed from the screen and the tag database and the pointer changes to the crossed arrows move tag pointer see Section 3 6 Then the selected nodes are pasted back into the display area This is done by moving the pointer to the required point and clicking with the left mouse button The tag remains active to allow further actions for example measurements to be taken Incomplete moves may be cancelled by pressing lt m gt again 144 May 2001 for version 2 1 10 6 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 3 10 7 10 7 1 10 8 10 8 1 10 9 1 Select the tag to be moved by clicking on it The selected tag flashes between orange and light blue indicating that it is the currently selected tag 2 Select Tagging Move Tag Node s or use the short cut key lt m gt The current tag disappears from the screen and the pointer changes to the crossed arrows MOVE pointer If no tag is selected an error message appears 3 Move the pointer to the new position for the tag and click the left mouse button The tag is pasted back into the display area It remains active to allow further actions to be taken Incomplete moves may be cancelled by pressing lt m gt again 4 When you have finished deselect the tag by clicking on it or clicking on another tag Options Only Available in PI or GeoKit Insert Append Tag Node This option is available only in PI100 or GeoKit Complete Multi Node Tag This option is avai
332. tanding of the underlying geological structure click the left mouse button on the appropriate item a form of interface which allows a computer to interchange data with the outside world in serial form that is one bit at time a single typed character or sequence of keyboard inputs which allows the user to carry out interaction with the DA 00 DA200 interface without using the mouse a form of sonar which uses twin sideways looking transducers to obtain an image of the seabed as it is towed through the water see digital signal processing of DA100 DA200 a version of the DA100 DA200 which has only one tape drive unit the distance across track to a point on the seabed from the towfish position this is directly proportional to the time from the outgoing pulse transmission May 2001 for version 2 1 277 SUOISI AUOD 3 Aresso 5 rsions Glossary amp Conve slant range correction slave trigger smart icon smoothed navigation data software sonar sonar input span spline stacking starboard stop bits string sub bottom profiler sub sampling substrate swathe tab form tag tag node tape cartridge tape drive tape head 278 May 2001 for version 2 1 a geometric correction to the incoming sonar signal which converts the across track scale of the sonar data so that it is directly proportional to distance across track rather than to time the incoming TTL trigger pulse which causes
333. tapes or disks It includes descriptions of how to initiate playback mode how to use the Goto command to move to a specific point in the data and how to incorporate corrected navigation data Features which can be used in both acquisition and playback modes are not dealt with in this section but are discussed in Section 7 We recommend that you practice using the DA System in playback mode to become familiar with the look and feel of the interface A sample tape or disk of data acquired using the DA System is provided for this purpose and a summary of the procedure is given in below Summary of the Playback Procedure Author Note not for publication Flow chart not yet checked and updated Figure 6 1 page 84 shows a summary of the procedure for playing back survey data using the DA System from connecting the system powering up and playing back data to powering down and getting the system ready for transportation The cross references within the flow diagram indicate which section to go to for more details on the procedure and screen dumps of the relevant display areas menus and menu items May 2001 for version 2 1 83 Using the DA System Section Section Load Corrected 6 6 Navigation Data Section 8 Section Zoom on 85 Screen Features gt Section 86 Features Section 10 2 Tag Screen Features Section L oad Save Copy 10 9 Tag Files Connect Section 4 2 System Op
334. tave min Random 5 350 Hz 0 00053 g Hz 350 500 Hz 6 dB octave 500 Hz 0 000271 g2 Hz 0 5 g rms Swept Sines 0 75 g peak 5 500 Hz 1 octave min Random 5 100 Hz 0 02 g Hz 100 137 Hz 6 dB octave 137 350 Hz 0 0107 g Hz 350 500 Hz 6 dB octave 500 Hz 0 0052 g Hz 2 41 g rms 5 0 g peak for 3 ms sine 8 0 g peak for 11 ms sine 90 g peak for 3 ms sine 30 g peak for 26 ms trapezoidal 0 km to 4 6 km 0 to 15 000 ft 0 km to 15 2 km 0 to 50 000 ft Suspended particle environment particles lt 200ugram m e Always allow the DA System to reach ambient temperature before switching it on Failure to do so may damage the tape drive e Always remove tapes from the tape drives before powering down the system Failure to do so may result in data loss or damage to the tape drive 230 May 2001 for version 2 1 H 2 H 2 1 H 2 2 e Data cartridges may be write protected by sliding open the tab on the right of the cartridge so that the coloured tab becomes invisible Do NOT do this while the cartridge is in the tape drive e Always use DDS Media Recognition System Standard DAT type tapes Do NOT use audio DAT tapes under any circumstances they are not of high enough quality for storage of computer data For best results use DDS2 standard 120m tapes rather than 60m or 90m tapes The DDS2 standard tapes allow the tape unit to operate with a higher bandwidth and a 1
335. te sidescan signal for example Ultra Widescan A discarded signal can only be entered when a fixed sweep time sonar has been selected Note This field should be used with extreme caution the portion of the signal discarded cannot be recovered after acquisition e Trace Reversed if this option is selected by default it is off the order of the samples in a ping of data will be reversed before they are recorded or displayed This option should only be selected when recording data from sidescans which output their port and starboard channels as one composite channel of data for example Ultra Widescan In this instance both data channels CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4 should be connected to the composite signal and the two channels separated in the A D conversion process using the Discarded Sig setting Due to the naturesof the composite ping one data channel is digitised in reverse order so the ping reversed field for that channel should be set It is easy to establish which data channel is reversed as the outgoing pulse and water column will appear at the outer edge of the display area rather than the centre Default Setups The Acquisition pop up has been designed so that users can use standard settings or more detailed customised settings The standard settings allow you to simply input the true range for sidescan sonars and the Sweep Time and Start Delay for shallow seismic sonars The only other parameters that need to be set up fo
336. tem s IP address to the XSTAR network as follows 1 Choose a free IP address on the XSTAR s network 2 Select the Change IP Address option from the Coda system s Maintenance Menu and use this free IP address see Section 12 3 4 When finished your system will reboot 3 When the system has rebooted check you have added your Coda system to the network Select Maintenance Menu gt X Terminal In the X Terminal screen type ping IP Address If you get a reply from other machines on the network you have successfully added your Coda system to the XSTAR network Now configure the MIDAS XSTAR software to tell it how to connect to the CODA system 1 Edit the etc hosts file on the MIDAS system to add the Coda entry 2 Right click on the Menu Bar with your mouse and select Shells Shell Tool 3 At the prompt obtain root permissions by typing su lt return gt and enter the root password 54 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 2 3 2 Note The Root Password is documented in your DA System s Technical Manual Software Build printout Contact Coda Technologies for further information 4 When the system s name appears in the display type usr bin textedit etc hosts This will bring up an editor 5 Add the Coda system entry in the editor and save this file by right clicking the mouse over the menu area of textedit and then selecting the appropriate menu 6 Exit the editor by right clicking on the Title Bar and selecting Quit
337. tensities or colours This LUT or palette selection is carried out by the user in the Image Enhancement toolkit accessed through the Processing menu Hardcopy or screen dump output uses the same LUT 12 to 8 bit conversion and line sub sampling as the screen display It should be emphasised that the data saved to tape or disk is always fullresolution 12 bit data with no TVG or image enhancement corrections applied File Structure of the DA System All user data is stored on the home partitiomof the DA System ensuring that files loaded by the user cannot corrupt the system software which is held in the usr partition The user data is loaded into one of the sub directories of the home dp100 directory either home dp100 setup for user setup files home dp100 nav for corrected navigation data home dp 100 tag for tag database files home dp100 lib for other system files or home dp100 log for system log files No direct interaction of the DA System user with these directories is permitted by the system nor does the DA System create files in any other directories on the system The Make Clean option in the Maintenance Menu allows the owner of a DA System system or any user with access to the install password to empty the setup navigation lib and tag directories May 2001 for version 2 1 181 sjlejog wa shs Va 182 May 2001 for version 2 1 15 15 1 15 4 15 5 15 6 DA System Specifications Tri
338. ter a positive rising edge or a negative falling edge e Auto Period this toggle can be used to set the internal trigger period itautomatically calcu lates the longest period for the trigger and adds dead time e Period ms this field sets the period in milliseconds of the trigger produced at the TRIG OUT connector When internal trigger is selected this field will show the trigger period in seconds default 74 milliseconds or 13 5 triggers second This can be altered by typing a new entry in the spin box This field is greyed out if an external trigger is selected e Pulse Width ms DA200 only a spin box which is used to set the width in milliseconds of the internal trigger pulse This field is greyed out if an external trigger is selected e Pulse Polarity DA200 only two toggles which set the polarity of the internally generated trigger pulse The options are either Low or High A High polarity setting implies that the pulse is high for the time specified by Pulse Width The remainder of the pulse Period minus Pulse Width is at a low level For a Low setting the reverse is true 48 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 2 1 2 When you have set all the parameters activate the device To do this you need to check to Device Active Inactive box at the top of the tab Acquiring Analogue Sidescan Data The File gt Open Acquisition pop up selects data acquisition mode and allows the acquisition parameters to be set Select th
339. that channel red when not To view more channels in another window simply click on the non displayed icon and an appro priate window will be opened in the above example if the Analogue Ch3 Seismic icon were to be clicked this would open a horizontally scrolling single channel window Alternatively open anew window Window Open New Window and set the Window Type Number of Channels and Scroll Direction Figure 5 12 this page to suit the requirements of the channel or channels torbe displayed Clicking OK will open the new window and the system will select the most appropriate channel or channels to be displayed in the example given in Figure 5 12 this page Ch3 Seismic will be selected automatically if the window is set up for one horizontal channel Window Type Horizontal Window b j Number of Channels fi ri Scroll Direction Right Data Input Device None hall OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 12 Open New Window Pop up Window If you need to change the channel or channels being displayed in a window select Display Display Input Channels Figure 5 13 this page and selectthe required channels Left Channel Analog Chi Port mA Right Channel Analog Ch Stbd ma Figure 5 13 Display Input Channel Pop up Window Setting Offset and Gain for Each Channel As the system acquires 12 bit data but must use 8 bits for display you must select which part of the data range to see The system offers a number of mechanis
340. the Add Item button opens a pop up window see Figure 10 12 this page This produces an alphabetically sorted list of report column types available in GeoKit and the PI100 as well as the DA System It is used to produce reports with the DA System from datacollected using other Coda modules Thus the report column types listed are not all available when the data has been collected using the DA System and selecting such items results in field entries such as 0 0 and N A In this pop up you can select items from the scrolling list by clicking on the namesiin the list and you can specify their position in the report by clicking on either the Before current selection button or the After current selection button The appropriate action button at the bottom of the pop up Add or Done should be clicked on when all items have been added Alternatively double click on the item to add it to the report Multiple selections may be made by using a press and drag action over the required item in the list Delete Item and Delete All Items The two delete buttons on the Format tab allow you to delete either the selected entry Delete Item or all the entries in the report Delete All Items May 2001 for version 2 1 155 Report Setup Options Report Separator The options within this se elect the type of separator for the Space and Comma Tab inserts a Dual Tags This option is only available when the datab Inspection module They have
341. the least distortion of the image compared to the screen display with an acceptable magnification This magnifies the selected area of the screen by a set factor usually a setting of 200 400 of the original image size will be found to be satisfactory Additional points to remember e Zoom to full resolution only has an effect if the display is not already showing the full resolution data To display the full resolution of an area of the swathe continuously adjust the Left or Right Display Channel setups in the Settings menu see Section 7 4 e The fixed magnification and full screen zooms use the full resolution data not the display data as the source for the zoomed image This gives the highest quality zoomed images The selected setting is then appliedwhen Zoom is selected from the Processing menu or when the keyboard short cut lt Control z gt isused Making On screen Measurements key shortcut lt Control s gt The DA System can measure the on screen distance between two points and the height of an on screen feature using the Processing Measure option When you select measuring mode and mark the distance to be measured the DA System will calculate the distance or height using the measurement method selected The Data Display Area can be used for measuring distances and heights Measuring mode is started by selecting Measure from the Processing menu or by using the keyboard short cut lt Control s gt The ARROW pointer ch
342. tic Tracking Setup Seismic Limits Static Minimum Expected Fish Height defines the lower search limit from the seabed The units can be entered in metres samples or milliseconds The minimum height may be used to mask out noisy data at the start of the sonar trace e Maximum Expected Fish Height defines the upper search limit from the seabed The units 76 May 2001 for version 2 1 can be entered in metres samples or milliseconds AMAR rabe SIL ere Coen Di Lip Sonn roles Sea C bd wH YI ki Hen x w wcir T LD a we Fhe aol T gt O Ar Peden PIE Figure 5 40 Automatic Tracking Setup Seismic Limits Adaptive e Search Window Width defines the width of the window in which the search for the bottom return will take placeyitkeeps bracketing the bottom return as the return is tracked The units canbe entered as metres samples or milliseconds FAIR Irabhr Su red LE CI Lip fall rasta 34 2 Les ah Mines ect ae hoali v mes ee Pool v Edo Thre El ee Al ELI Fu s Figure 5 41 Automatic Tracking Setup Seismic Tracking Thresholding e Sensitivity this parameter relates the trade off between detection ability and sensitivity to noise When sensitivity is low the algorithm is less sensitive to noise but not a good at tracking weak bottom returns Conversely when sensitivity is high the algorithm isimore sensitive to noise but better at tracking poor bottom returns e Offset Bo
343. tion Clicking on the button or using the key shortcut lt b gt changes the arrow pointer to the automatic tracking pointer This allows you to reset the tracking algorithm by clicking with the left mouse button over the appropriate bottom position in the data display 72 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 5 1 3 Fish Height Alarms Fish height alarms are only available in acquisition mode The user can set the fish height in terms of metres msec and samples from the scrolling options list Alarms FT EnableAlarms Minimum Fish Height Alarm Bbo A metres Hyf Bel Maximum Fish Height Alarm fo oO gt Figure 5 31 Fish Height Alarm Worksheet Th alarm is an audible double beep every ten seconds when the fish height exceeds either the Maximum or Minimum limits In addition the status bar is updated to report alarm condition Wed 10 Jan 2001 11 24 46 Warning Fish Height Alarm the current fish height 4 18m lies outside the alarm limits 5 01m to 20 00m Figure 5 32 Status Bar Fish Height Alarm Message 5 5 1 4 Fish Height Recomputed File During survey set up and acquire the fish height with the raw data See Section 13 1 1 If this has not been possible or the resulting fish height is unsatisfactory perhaps due to environ mental conditions review the fish height values in playback mode The Read Write Fish Height Values utility is provided to allow you to store the results of this reviews On future playbacks o
344. tion data see tag node of computer monitors displaying all the pixels within the display in a single pass interlaced displays take two passes each displaying every second line of pixel data distance North or South in metres of a given position from the UTM or lat long origin processing which does not take place as data is being acquired or at the rate of acquisition offset OK on line on off toggle one of selection operating system option selection outgoing pulse overlay plane overwrite palette parallel port parity password PCI PI100 ping pipe distance pipe grazing angle pipe height DA100 DA200 the distance of a given sample from a datum point usually the distance of the start of the raw data line to the start of the displayed line a button which selects and applies the settings or options selected and dismisses the pop up window from the screen processing which takes place as the data is being acquired and at the rate of acquisition a switch on the DA 00 DA200 display which turns a system func tion on or off each selection of the switch changes the state of the function if it is on selection turns it off subsequent selection turns it on again a form of switch on the DA100 DA200 display which selects one from a number of possible options where all the possible options are displayed the program which manages a computer allowing the user
345. tion data 89 91 starting85 stopping 96 deleting tag files 150 152 tags 144 display channels adjusting the channels 603 87 display data scaling 101 displaying A scan trace 131 overlay data 125 survey data 131 Swell Filtered Outout 118 tags 125 143 displaying fix data 125 127 displaying scale lines 125 Edgetech ACI 53 Edgetech FSUI Common Features 59 Edgetech FSUI Sidescan 57 Edgetech FSUI Sub bottom 58 Editing Navigation Library Strings 211 Ejecting Tapes and Disks 96 X pu Index End Nav Loopback Test 166 EPC 1086 2 thermal printers configuring the printer 238 selecting the printer 239 troubleshooting 239 EPC HSP1000 Printer 240 EPC HSP1000 Printer Change to Digital Mode 240 erasing tapes 171 event marking See tagging Exabyte Eliant 820 environmental specifications 232 head cleaning 231 hints and precautions 232 LED interpretation 231 F Factory button 26 filters 225 Fish Height 67 Fish Height alarms 73 Fish Height Source 68 Fish Height Source method properties 70 Fish Height additional options 74 Fish Height play back fish height file 74 Fish Height recomputed file 73 fix data displaying fix data 125 127 Fix Data Setup pop up 128 fix lines see fix data Format of Incoming Nav Data 63 Formatting Optical Disks 235 G General Information Area 21 96 134 General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 81 General Information Area in Acquisition Mode 1 81 General Information Area in Acqu
346. tivity load or unload Off i i Activity read or write Green ifr Cartridge loaded drive on line Amber Any Media Caution M Slow Fi Any Fault HSA a Self test in progress LE oe Figure H 1 LED Combinations for the HP C1533 C1599A Recommended Tapes To ensure the best possible results and maximal reliability we recommend tapes by the following manufacturers are used TDK HP Verbatim and Fujifilm May 2001 for version 2 1 229 seolpueddy Appendices H 1 4 Environmental Specifications These specifications are for the HP C1599A tape drive If a tape is in the drive these specifica tions may be modified by the specifications for the tape in which case the more stringent figures apply Parameter Ambient Operating Temperature Non Operating mech Non Operating tape Humidity Operating Non Operating mech Non Operating tape Vibration Operating 3 Axis Non Operating 3 Axes Shock Operating 3 Axis no performance change Operating 3 Axes no data loss Non Operating 3 Axes no damage Altitude Operating Non Operating Suspended Operating and Particles Non Operating H 1 5 Hints and Precautions Specifications 5 C to 40 C AT lt 10 C h 40 C to 70 C AT lt 20 C h 40 C to 45 C AT lt 20 C h 20 to 80 RH non condensing Max wet bulb temperature 26 C 5 to 95 RH change RH lt 30 h 20 to 80 RH change RH lt 30 h Swept Sine 0 3 g peak 5 500 Hz 1 oc
347. to disk 1 Load a blank tag file disk into Optical 2 or the disk drive to which the sonar data is not being recorded 2 Select Tagging Manage Tag Files The Tag Database Management pop up appears The name of the current tag database file is displayed on the title bar 3 Select the location of the tag database files to be copied Hard Disk Optical 1 and Optical 2 in a dual drive system The names of the files appear in the Tag Files window 4 Select the files to be saved For one file click on the tag file name for several files either press and drag the pointer to highlight a group of tag files or hold down lt Control gt while clicking on the tag file names to make multiple selections If necessary scroll through the list of tag files to find the correct files The selected files are highlighted in black 5 Click on the Copy Tag Files button The Copy Tag Files pop up appears May 2001 for version 2 1 151 wajskS va eu Buisn 6 Select the destination of the files Hard Disk Optical 1 and Optical 2 in a dual drive system 7 Click on the OK button 10 9 3 3 Deleting Tag Files The procedure for deleting tag files is similar to that of copying tag files First the source of the tag files must be selected in the Tag Database Management pop up using the Database Location option selection button Then the files that you want to delete must be selected from the list that appears in the Tag Files window Clicking
348. tom that is reasonably flat otherwise seabed features may be lost The Swell Filter option has two methods Manual and Automatic Use the former method if you know the frequency range of the swell Use the latter to detect the frequency of the swell and remove it The action buttons at the bottom of the pop up allow you to copy settings to all channels and to display swell filtered data allowing you to see effect of the swell filtering To use swell filtering 1 Select Processing gt Swell Filtering The Swell Filter Setup pop up appears The number of seismic channels available is indicated by the number of tab forms 2 Select the source of the swell filter to be used Choose one of the following options e Select from Keeping Existing Value Playback only Copy Swell Value from Other Channel Bottom Flattening or Swell Filter If you select Swell Filter either click on the Manual Setup button and enter the cut off parameters in seconds or Hertz and click on the OK or Apply button or click on Automatic Setup and enter the minimum and maximum expected swell in seconds or Hertz When the swell is measured in seconds this is automatically recalculated to Hertz by the system Also in the Automatic Setup if you want the system to recalculate the swell frequency as the survey progresses click on the appropriate toggle and input number of second between recalculations If you want the system to display lost swell warning messages click on the
349. ton over the event An orange box appears around the event Tagging can be performed during both data acquisition and playback Only one type of tag can be created in the DA a single point or node non specific tag labelled Unknown these tags are represented as an orange box in the display Other tag types and tagging tools are available with the P7700 and GeoKit The DA System maintains a tag database for each file on the tape or disk so that information on eachscreen tag can be stored to hard disk This allows tags created in acquisition mode or previous playback sessions to be automatically replayed with the accompanying data channel The display of tags can be toggled on or off Tag databases may also be saved to tape or disk loaded to the hard disk or copied to disk so that tag files can be archived The tag file database can be used in Goto commands and it can be used to produce an ASCII format report Another type of tag a fixtag is generated automatically by the DA System This tag is based on incoming navigation data Whenever the fix number in the navigation data changes a fix tag is created Fix tags are represented on screen as coloured dashed line The Fix Data Setup option is used to set the information included on the fixes and the frequency they are displayed as well as to toggle the display on and off see Section 8 1 1 Fix tags are only entered into the database in acquisition mode A tag file is create
350. tracking Threshold algorithm v Tracking Noise Reduction Smoothing Static Window Le TEE I Con NICE Figure 5 24 Fish Height Setup Pop up Window for Sidescan Data Method Properties Static Limits Figure 5 25 Method Properties Worksheet Static Limits Search Limits Type defines the type of searching window used Static applies a fixed position search window to the data The window extends between Minimum Search Limit and Maximum Search Limit Minimum Search Limit defines the lower search limit from the seabed The units can be entered in metres samples or milliseconds The minimum height may be used to mask out noisy data at the start of the sonar trace e Maximum Search Limit defines the upper search limit from the seabed The units can be 70 May 2001 for version 2 1 entered in metres samples or milliseconds Method Properties Moving Window Tracking Noise Reduction Smoothing po Mfwre mi Search Figure 5 27 Method Properties Workshe acking e Polarity allows the choice of positive or nege e Threshold Value sets a threshold amplitude scale value of the signal amplitude e Offset Bottom Position allows a fixed offset to be applied to the fish height A indicates that the fish height will be increased Method Properties Tracking Power Density Edge Det Edge Advanced Figure 5 28 Method Properties Worksheet Tracking Power Density Edge D
351. trigger inhibit with the time of inhibit being controlled by the value in the Inhibit Time field This field replaces the Trigger Delay field when the Trigger Type is set to Gated The Divisor field acts to subdivide the master coupled trigger The Delay field can be used to further delay this trigger from the master 58 May 2001 for version 2 1 The Gain option allows a pre selected gain to be applied to the received data Selecting the value Auto will cause the FSIU to choose the optimum gain Pulse Power allows the user to select the outgoing pulse power as a percentage The Sweep Time spin box allow the user to set the two way sweep time The Start Delay spin box allow the user to set an initial period over which no data is gathered The Total Sweep field automatically calculates the sum of the Sweep Time and Start Delay spin boxes The Navigation Decode scrolling option list allows the following choices hen Use FSIU Values is selected the position E N fish offset layback pitch roll ing temperature course annotation text and speed are all set from the FSIU e Coda Navigation Values is selected the navigation values from the Coda p From scrolling option list allows the user to select where the The choices are either FSIU System Time FSIU Navigation When the option is set to Coda Navigation Time the actual me the time is left unchanged when set to FSIU Navigation Time the FSIU time be set b
352. ts labelled TRIG A OUT or TRIG B OUT for DA200 systems which have two trigger outputs The system generates a TTL level output signal whose period can be adjusted manually see File Open Acquisition Triggers 9 Connect the navigation data input to the serial port labelled COM2 May 2001 for version 2 1 43 wayskS va eu Buisn 4 4 Powering Up the System Caution If the DA System was in transit and has recently been unpacked or if it has been brought from a cool area to a warm one leave it for some time at least an hour to reach ambient temperature before powering up This prevents condensation from forming within the system which may seriously damage the electronics and the drive mechanism e If using a printer through LPT1 ensure it is connected to and powered up before the Coda system e Power up the system and wait for the Coda Technologies screen tem automatically starts up and initialises the DA System display interface ill appear on the screen giving details of the release status of the software on your ou can also view this at any time by selecting the Release Info option from 44 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 Acquiring and Recording Survey Data The DA System can be used to acquire survey data from both sidescan sonar and sub bottom profilers and other seismic sources and to record the data to tape or disk This section explains how to initialise the acquisition system how to initialise the navigation
353. ts placed on the settings by the acquisition hardware are detailed below Note The sampling frequencies entered in the Open Acquisition pop up must be integer divisors of the highest sampling frequency of any of the triggers That is the frequency must divide into the highest sampling frequency with no remainder For example in an acquisition setup with 3 active channels valid sampling frequencies could then be 20KHz 10KHz and 40KHZ respectively as 20KHz and 10KHz are integer divisors of 40KHz the highest of the three frequencies Invalid frequencies would be 30KHz 25KHz and 40KHz as neither 30KHZnor 25KHz is an integer divisor of 40KHz 1 The sum of all sample frequencies must not exceed 160KHz 2 All sample frequencies must be an integer divisor of the highest sample frequency 3 The maximum number of samples for any channel must not exceed 20 480 4 The maximum number of samples for any trigger must not exceed 32 000 5 An internal trigger period should always exceed the sweep time for any channel on that trigger by at least the system dead time 6 Theminimum allowable sample frequencies for sidescan and seismic channels are 14KHz and 3 5KHZ respectively 7 The shortest allowable trigger period is 34 msecs 8 Widescan channels on an internal trigger should not have a trigger period of less than 67 msecs Custom Sidescan e Sample Freq Hz determines the number of samples used to represent the incoming data and can
354. ttings 3 Switch the Head Calibration OFF by pressing either the TEST or ADDRESS buttons These buttons toggle the Head Calibration default between ON and OFF 4 Press the ON LINE button to exit test mode 5 Select the appropriate PAPER TYPE See Paper in the Alden Operator s Manual 6 Press the OFF LINE key twice to put the printer into Detach mode Cycle through the paper options by pressing the PAPER button until the appropriate paper type is selected ensuring that the display shows an asterisk after the paper type this designates high speed The printer is now configured correctly for use with the CODA DA System 7 Switch the printer on line by pressing the ON LINE button May 2001 for version 2 1 237 seolpueddy Appendices J 1 2 Select the Printer Hardcopy Output is described fully in Section 9 1 1 Switch on the DA System The DA System should be switched on after the printer is switched on 2 Select File Hardcopy Output 3 From the scrolling list of printers plotters which appears select Alden 9315 CTP 4 Select the appropriate parallel port LPT or LPT2 depending on which port the printer is attached to see Section 4 3 5 Select tag colour from the one of options of Black or White 6 Toggle Output on 74 Click on Apply or OK This starts printer output To switch the output off toggle the Output On button off and press either Apply or OK J 1 3 Troubleshooting see also Troubles
355. ttom Position 3 If the bottom tracking line is persistently positioned BELOW the true bottom position INCREASE the automatic tracking Sensitivity onuse Offset Bottom Position The Tape Disk Controls inAcquisition Mode The Tape Disk control buttons are analogous to those of a video tape or audio recorder though their functions change according to the mode being used acquisition mode or playback mode This section describes the functionality of the buttons in acquisition mode for details of their effect in playback mode refer to Section 6 7 The Record Button This button controls all the record functions of the system When it is selected a pop up s appears Section 5 5 3 has described how to start and stop recording to tape and disk Note that the record button turns from red to green when recording is taking place and that recording is started and stopped by the popup which appears if the record button is pressed Pressing the record button accidentally during recording will not have any effect Play During acquisition this button starts the display scrolling it has no effect on the recording of data During playback this button controls the reading of data from tape or optical disk and its display on screen When the Play button is pressed after File Open Playback or File Open Acquisition have been selected the Scale Display Data pop up appears in the display area to enable you to optimise the display Stop During a
356. ttom Position allows a fixed offset to be applied to the fish height A positive value indicates that the fish height will be increased ARTE ratre Sep Clr cere D sper Sonu roles jed L 4 xb Henn i erg E werh Fawr Frer At Les sgire Gr Tig occ ie nr Figure 5 42 Automatic Tracking Setup Seismic Filtering May 2001 for version 2 1 77 Using the DA System Band Pass Filter Low Edge defines the low frequency 3dB cut off point for the filter Band Pass Filter High Edge defines the high frequency 3dB cut off point for the filter ARIE rabe SU LIST LE D Lip dallen roles jed ba Hu Men ect FF Suns bidule Thee Cor i mr Figure 5 43 Automatic Tracking Setup Seismic Smoothing e Smooth Bottom Tracking Over defines the number of pings the bottom tracking should be smoothed over in the along track direction The Display Bottom Processed Data works in the Power Density mode and displays the characteristics of the detection envelope instead of the bottom return When this option is selected a warning message will be displayed in the Scale Display Data window The Reset Bottom Position button in the Fish Height Settings pop up or the Reset Seabed Position icon allows you to reset the bottom position Clicking on the button or using the key shortcut lt d gt changes the arrow pointer to the automatic tracking pointer This allows you to reset the tracking algorithm by clicking with thedeft
357. up window which allows the baud rate the number of data bits the number of stop bits the parity and the method of flow control to be selected These should be set to match those of the serial device sending the navigation data to the DA System Selections are made by clicking on the appro priate toggle buttons when a suitable selection has been made click on the OK button in the COM Setup window Figure 5 15 page 63 shows a COM Setup pop up window 62 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 4 2 Checking the Format of the Incoming Nav Data 1 Use an internal or external trigger or digital or network device conn scroll on the screen You will not be able to QC the navigation with you do not need to have any input apart from the trigger connected 3 navigation string system Figure 5 16 Figure 5 16 Display of Unformatted Serial Input for Coda Navigation String eiving RS232 navigation data correctly and to confirm pops up a window which displays the ASCII characters CODA 5286046 22 880996 44 62 00 25 01 160 989 13 148 13 316 23 11 RPT6 997 00230 CODA 5286046 50 880999 04 61 37 25 40 CODA 5286046 99 881001 66 62 21 26 25 160 009 14 910 12 785 22 26 RPT6 997 00230 copa 5286047 87 881003 57 62 80 27 10 159 755 14 652 13 256 22 39 RPT6 997 00230 Coda 5286048 17 881005 27 62 13 27 91 158 762 15 363 13 105 21 70 RPT6 997 00230 Coda 5286050 19 881007 56 62 82 27 53 158 240 15 691 13 702 21 67 RPT6 997 00230 CODA 5286050 66 881009 69 63 6
358. ures 128 8 6 Making On screen Measurements 129 8 6 1 Measurement Method 129 8 14 Raw A Scan 131 8 8 Displaying Survey Data 131 8 9 Ping Data 133 8 10 Nav Data QC 134 8 11 General Information Area 134 8 12 Application Specific Area 135 9 Data Output 137 9 1 Hardcopy Output 137 9 1 1 GPIB Setup 138 9 2 Screen Dump 138 9 2 1 Printer Setup Window 140 9 2 2 The Serial Setup Window 141 10 Tagging amp Using the Event Database 143 10 1 To Turn on Tag Display 143 10 2 Creating Tags 143 10 3 Selecting and Deselecting Tags 144 10 4 Deleting Tags 144 10 5 Moving Tags 144 10 6 Options Only Available in PI or GeoKit 145 10 6 1 Insert Append Tag Node 145 10 6 2 Complete Multi Node Tag 145 10 6 3 Annotate Tag Node s 145 10 7 Replaying Tags 145 10 7 1 Using Goto to Replay a Tag 145 10 8 Setup Tags 145 10 8 1 Fast Tag Setup 145 10 9 Managing Event Database Files 145 10 9 1 Loading Saving and Copying Tag Files 146 10 9 2 Manage Tag Files on a Tape System 146 10 9 2 1 Saving Tag Files to Tape 147 10 9 2 2 Loading Tag Files from Tape 147 10 9 2 3 Tape Load Save 148 10 9 2 4 Delete 150 10 9 2 5 Rescan 150 10 9 3 Manage Tag Files on an Optical Disk System 150 10 9 3 1 Copy Tag Files 151 10 9 3 2 Copying Tag Files 151 10 9 3 3 Deleting Tag Files 152 10 9 3 4 Rescan 152 10 9 3 5 Unmount 152 10 9 4 Deleting Tag Files 152 10 10 Report Setup and Generation 153 10 10 1 Generating Tag Database Reports 153 10 10 1 1 Report Setup 154 10 10 1 2 Generating
359. usn Using the DA System Norcom Nav Norcom Depth Norcom Fix Norcom End Figure 5 18 The Navigation Input Selection Pop up Window 5 4 4 Other Navigation Parameters in Acquisition Mode Figure 5 19 The Navigation Parameter Settings Pop up Window The Settings Navigation Parameters pop up is used to enter a number of parameters which are normally input automatically via the navigation input string supplied to the system from the RS 232 port see Section 5 4 1 However if a fixed format navigation string is being used it 66 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 4 4 1 5 4 4 2 5 4 4 3 5 5 may be difficult to obtain some parameters in this manner The Nav Parameter pop up therefore provides the means to manually enter values for parameters that may not be provided by onboard navigation facilities In acquisition mode the values entered for these parameters are recorded to tape or optical disk along with the other navigation data They are also displayed to screen via the Display Survey Data pop up Note that entering parameter values in the pop up overrides any corresponding parameter values supplied from the nav input In playback mode parameters entered in this pop up override the corresponding recorded values Survey and Line Name The Settings Navigation Parameters pop up contains the Survey Name Description text entry box which is used to store text data for one survey with a chosen name or description of up to 48
360. val of the next trigger pulse Differential GPS A form of GPS which uses a base station to send corrections to the satellite derived positions allowing more accurate fixes to be obtained representing information by a sequence of bits rather than using the signal amplitude and phase see also analogue using numerical techniques to carry out signal filtering or ampli fication in the digital domain rather than the analogue domain the process of converting an analogue signal s amplitude and phase information into digital form a data channel which is displayed on the DA 00 screen see MS DOS of floppy disks formatted on the MS DOS operating system press and release the specified mouse button twice in rapid succession if no button is specified the left button should be used of DA100 DA200 a system having two tape drive units rather than one that portion of an analogue signal which actually conveys information that is the range of values between the highest and lowest encountered distance East or West in metres of a given positiomfrom the UTM or lat long origin of TTL input reacts to the change in voltage level rather than to the steady state voltage level a form of Postscript which is suitable for incorporating into documents on word processing packages spreadsheets and so on End Of Tape Local Area Network using a coaxial cable with BNC connectors capable of up to 1 25MB second transfer rate DA100 DA2
361. ve to a datum on the vessel as the depth under the keel or as the depth under the echo sounder transducer a scrolling display of image data an area of the graphical user interface set aside for a specific operation often disappearing when that operation has been completed see Microsoft Windows X Window of disk or tape cartridge set so that it cannot be written to only read from a graphical user interface standard for the Unix operating system the process of selecting an area of the display to be redisplayed in greater detail defining the type of zoom operation to be carried out for exam ple full resolution fixed magnification Software Defect Report Form Coda Technologies has made every effort to ensure that its software is reliable and performs satisfactorily at all times However as with any software based product some defects may still be present If you encounter unexpected undocumented or illogical behaviour by the system please complete this form and fax or mail it to Coda Technologies Ltd Admiral House 29 30 Maritime Street EDINBURGH Software Version Number Serial Number Mode in which fa occurred playback acquisition Description of Fault please be as specific as possible Was recovery possible How On receipt of this form Coda Technologies will contact you and issue a reference number for this report and describe the remedial action to be taken For Coda office use only
362. version 2 1 First Fold Manual Feedback We at Coda value your opinion Please give us your opinion of this manual in each of the following areas We ll send you a free mousemat on receipt of your form Manual Title Excellent Good Fair Poor Accuracy Is the information correct m m m g Completeness Is information missing m 0 0 g Organisation Is the information easy to find o 0 0 g Clarity Do you understand the information o m m g Examples Are there enough 0 0 0 g Illustrations Are there enough 0 0 0 g Appearance Do you like the page format o m m g Physical Binding Do you like the cover and bind m m g g ing Doessthe manual meet your need Why or why not What s the single most important improvement we could make to the manual Please complete the following information Name optional Job Title or Function Organisation Address Phone If we need more information may we contact you Yes O No O Thank You May 2001 for version 2 1 285 SUOISISAUOT 9 JBSSOJE Second Fold aritime Street 3URGH Fix Postage Stamp Fourth Fold tuck into flap 286 May 2001 for version 2 1 First Fold A A D card DOS disgnostics test 245 About this Manual 16 Acquiring Data from a Digital Sonar 52 Acquiring Survey Data 19 acquisition acquisition mode 80 see also triggers see data channels ac
363. way travel time in milliseconds Time selections always take account of any start delay in the input channel May 2001 for version 2 1 117 Wo s S va eu usn Using the DA System 7 8 2 For the end sample specify one from the Seabed End of Data or Time The end sample must always be after the start sample If Seabed is selected the filter is applied only up until the estimated position of the seabed whereas if End of Data is selected the filter is applied to all subsequent data samples Choosing Time allows you to apply the filter up until a fixed time in the data This time is specified via the text entry box as a two way travel time in milliseconds Note A valid fish height must be available if Seabed is specified as one of the limits Swell Filtering For seismic data you can remove periodic noise from the data in the along track direction by using the swell filtering option This option is available in both acquisition and playback modes The Processing Swell Filter Setup pop up which is accessed from the Processing menu is similar in lookand feel to the Fish Height Settings pop up see Section 7 8 2 1 The default setting is no value The source of the swell filter can be set using keep existing value copy value from another channel bottom flattening or swell filter either automatic or manual The Bottom Flattening option is the easiest option to use however it should only be used if you know that you have a bot
364. will be triggered by the DA trigger Do they all trigger correctly Analogue Data Input Is the rub test overside test satisfactory Is the noise level acceptable 4 2 Is the level of crosstalk between channels acceptable 4 3 Is the ping rate detected by the DA system at the desired rate 44 Is the range or sweep time correct If not reduce the range settings or sweep time May 2001 for version 2 1 251 SJSIHOSUD Checklists DA System Mobilisation Comments Initials 4 5 Is there annotator output on the data There should not be 5 Navigation Data Input 5 1 Is the input coming in to the correct pins 5 2 Are the baud rate parity and number of stop bits correct In other words is the raw nav string arriving correctly 5 3 Are you being sent the expected nav string Look at the raw nav string 5 4 Are you using the best possible nav string In other words are you using as many of the Codasstring fields as possible 5 5 Is the nav string being interpreted correctly 5 6 Is each variable that you expect the nav N A string to update being changed by the nav string Make a list below of the variables and tick N A them off 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 Save your nav string to floppy and reload it onto the sy
365. witch Observe these precautions when handling and storing optical media cartridges l SD O M eop Keep cartridges free from dust or dirt Check the media periodically and clean it when necessary Cartridge cleaning kit are available from Maxoptix Keep cartridges free from moisture Do not allow condensation on or in the optical disk cartridge Do not put cartridges in a damp place or by an air conditioner Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight or place them near a heat source Do not open the shutter of the cartridges Do not drop cartridges Place a cartridge in its protective case when not inserted in the drive Keep the cartridge case horizontal or vertical during storage 234 May 2001 for version 2 1 1 4 1 7 8 Do not stack uncased cartridges Do not stack more than five cased cartridges 9 Store media cartridges in an environment with the following specifications Temperature 10C to 55C Relative humidity 3 to 90 RH Absolute humidity 1g m3 to 30 g m3 Atmospheric pressure 60 kPa to 106kPa Temperature gradient 15C h max Relative humidity gradient 10 h max Recommended MO Disks To ensure best possible results and maximum reliability we recommend a 2 6 Gb 1024 bytes per sector MO disk by the following manufacturers e Maxoptix e Sony e Verbatim or any 2 6 Gb 1024 bytes per sector MO disk that conforms to ISO IEC CD 14517 RW WO Formatting Disks Full deta
366. xpected to contain file called NA VLIB USR which should be your navigation format library A prompt asks if the current nav format library is to be overwritten Are you sure you wish to overwrite your existing navigation library default y y n Press lt y gt to copy the navigation format library on the disketteto the DA System hard disk 12 3 6 Save Navigation Lib This menu item is used to save the current navigation format library to a DOS formatted floppy disk When Save Navigation Lib is selected the system asks for the install password If the password is typed correctly a prompt appears asking for a diskette to be inserted into the floppy disk drive Insert a diskette into Floppy Drive 1 Type go when ready or q to quit default go Insert the diskette and type lt go gt or press lt Return gt This copies the current user navigation format library to a file on the diskette called NAVLIB USR 12 3 7 X Terminal Selecting this option causes a terminal window to appear on the DA System display This is for Coda engineers only No attempt should be made to access this window which is password protected 170 May 2001 for version 2 1 12 3 8 12 3 9 12 3 9 1 12 3 9 2 12 3 9 3 Toggle Video Resolution This menu option toggles the screen between high and low video resolutions Contact Coda Technologies before using this option Tape Menu Selecting this menu item brings up the following
367. xplains what you need to know about using the tape or optical disk drives e Part VI Checklists contains checklists for mobilising the DA System and additional software modules acquiring and recording data inputting navigation data and corrected navigation data saving and loading tag files and using tag and reporting setups during data interpretation e Part VII Glossary amp Conversions contains a table of useful conversions a full list of the terminology used in this manual and a software defect report form product feedback form and manual feedback form 16 May 2001 for version 2 1 1 2 1 Conventions Used in this Manual As you read this manual bear in mind the following conventions e Italics indicates words or phrases that are explained in the Glossary and modes of operation e This font identifies menu items and data control buttons When two or three menu items are joined by an arrow you must select the first item and then the second or third for example File gt Open Acquisition means that you must click on File on the Menu Bar and then in the pull down menu that appears click on Open Acquisition Keyboard keys appear within greater and lesser symbols When key names are joined by a hyphen you must hold down the first key press the other key and then release both keys or example lt Control z gt means you must hold down lt Control gt and press lt z gt h English spelling is used throughout this
368. xternal diameter known for all the pipelines to be surveyed 2 2 Is the client spec for touchdown known for all the pipelines to be surveyed 2 3 Is the minimum span length to report known for all the pipelines to be surveyed Signed Date CODA system mobilised for Pipeline Inspection May 2001 for version 2 1 255 SISI IOYD Checklists M 4 TrackPlot Mosaic Mobilisation Checklist TrackPlot Mosaic Mobilisation Comments Initials 1 Start TrackPlot Mosaic 1 1 Has TrackPlot been switched on in the Coda system 1 2 Is the tape optical disk ready for playback 1 3 Is the seabed being tracked so slant range correction can be applied to TrackPlot Mosaic 1 4 Have you selected the appropriate corrected nav file s in the Survey Overview window 1 5 Is the heading correct 2 Navigation Data 2 1 Have you selected the appropriate corrected nav file s in the Survey Overview window 2 2 Is the heading correct 3 Data Display 3 1 When you start playing the tape optical disk is the vessel track displayed in both the Survey Overview and TrackPlot windows 3 2 Are you focusing on the correct Track 3 3 Have the tags for display been selected in both windows 3 4 Have Object Properties been set in the required Tracks of data 3 5 In Mosaic has image display been switched on in the TrackPlot window 3
369. y however if this is not possible users may create their own interpretation strings Alternatively contact Coda Technol ogies at the address in the front of this manual for further help Each navigation library entry allows the DA System to read data from ASCII text received through a serial interface usually COM2 The navigation library format is described in the following sections using the following symbols indicates logical or indicates that the entry enclosed by the square brackets is optional The formatof the library entry is as follows ident identifier interpretation_list endnav A navigation library entryas defined to consist of a line beginning with the string ident followed by an identifier delimited bydouble quotes The identifier must be unique within the navigation library file Note Any of the navigation entries which consists of more than one word should be enclosed in inverted commas for example ASCII Text Text may be edited in Edit Nav Formats using the following options e Selecting Text Text may be selected that is highlighted on the screen by pressing the left mouse button at the start of a section of text and dragging the pointer to the end of the desired text Alternatively double clicking the left mouse button with the mouse pointer over a word selects that word A word is defined as text delimited by spaces or the beginning end of a line Triple clicking the leftmous
370. y Data toggle to turn on the overlay plane The toggle turns green Clicking on the toggle again turns off the overlay plane and the toggle turns grey again Displaying Fix Information When the overlay plane is on see Section 8 1 the DA System displays the Fix Number and an Easting and Northing pair E N on the fix lines The Fix Number is not currently affected by corrected nav files You can select other data items to appear on the fix lines using the Fix Data pop up The other data items are Date Time Kp Speed Heading Fish Height Line Name Survey Description and for Pipeline Inspection software Pipe Offset and Striking Angle You can also choose whether to display every fix line or only some fix lines If you select Display some fixes you can specify in the text entry box how many fixes to display from 1 in 2 fixes to lin 100 fixes To set the fix data information to display 1 If you have not done so already turn on the Display Overlay Data toggle 2 Select Settings Fix Data The Fix Data Setup pop up appears 3 In the Fix Data To include frame click on the items that you wish to display on the fix lines 4 In the Fix Display Frequency frame click on Display every fix or click on Display some fixes and specify the number you wish to display 5 Click on the OK or Apply button Overlay Data This menu item toggles On and Off the display of overlay data in the display area By default Overlay Data is switche
371. y number of characters before and after the point The point itself may be omitted if unnecessary e Easting is UTM or lat long Easting of the towfish in metres e Northing is UTM or lat long Northing of the towfish in metres Kp is along track kilometre point in kilometres e DCC is distance cross course in metres this is defined to be negative if the towfish is to port of the survey centreline and positive if the towfish is to starboard of the survey centreline e Depth is water depth in metres e Altitude is towfish altitude in metres e Speed is towfish speed in knots e Heading is towfish heading in degrees 0 360 e Line is survey line number or name as a 15 character ASCII string with NO SPACES e Fix is last valid fix number e Soundspeed is the speed of sound through water in metres per second e Delay is the delay between the fix data being obtained and its time of transmission in seconds e Time is system DGPS time in seconds since January Ist 1970 Co ordinated Universal Time UTC To convert date and time to UTC see Appendix C Example CODA 123 354 33998 005 12 234 77 09 34 5 10 2 4 3 031 8 RFP1002 344 1503 45 1 03 797619096 002 lt CR gt lt LF gt May 2001 for version 2 1 207 seo pueddy Appendices B 2 This string means towfish at easting of 123 354m and northing of 33998 005m at a Kp of 12 234 km and dec of 77 09m in a water depth of 34 5m and a fish height of 10 2m travelling at 4 3 knots w
372. y the navigatio time When set to Coda System Time the Coda time will be Coda Nay Time y Figure 5 10 The Network Tab Form of the Open Acquisition Window showing the Reson Seabat 8125 system May 2001 for version 2 1 59 The Seabat 8125 is a 455 kHz Ultra High Resolution Focused Multibeam Echosounder MBES system It can output data either on an RS 232 port or on an Ethernet port The Coda interface decodes sidescan data transmitted from the Ethernet Port Note The Ethernet protocol used in data transmission is UDP which is a connectionless protocol It does not guarantee delivery or correct order and can be severely affected by heavy network traffic For this reason it is recommended that the Reson Seabat 8125 and Coda System have their own private network and are linked simply by a crossover cable Both the Coda system and the Reson Seabat 8125 system must have the same network address the first three entries in an IP address It is very simple to configure IP addresses in the Seabat 8125 system so it is recommended that the IP address of the Coda system stays constant and the local and remote addresses are configured on the Seabat 8125 However if the Coda IP address is to be changed to that of the Reson network carry out the following 1 Choose a free IP address and obtain the sub net mask on the Reson Seabat 8125 network 2 Select the Change IP Address option from the Coda system s Maintenance menu and use th
373. y to display your data If your data has very low or high contrast you can improve the contrast or change the colour to reveal more details using the Processing Image Enhancement toolkit You can also invert the image for printing using the toolkit Remember that changes to image enhancement will not affect the data being recorded just how the data appears on the screen 106 May 2001 for version 2 1 7 5 1 7 5 2 Image Enhancement Setup Left ae Right N F r Input Colourmap Light Rainbow w ont M ou HT Copy to Both Channels Figure 7 6 The Image Enhancement Pop up Window Enhancement is applied to the whole screen area for the channel selected not just for incoming data Image enhancements can be made to the Left Right or Both Channels of data Each display channel keeps its own interactive graph If Both is selected Left and Right channels are assigned the same graph You can save your favourite settings using the Load and Save options To cancel any enhancements and restore the Data Display Area to its previous state click on the Cancel button Enhancements can be applied with or without dismissing the toolkit window by clicking on the OK or Apply button respectively Note that the Image Enhancement pop up behaves differently to most other pop ups in that it allows the displayed data toe modified without the need to click on the Apply or OK buttons This allows you to experiment with changes to th
374. ystem Section 4 3 Section 4 4 No Record pe Section 5 6 amp 5 7 Off line Tests completed wes Advanced Interpretation Tools s w modules Section 12 1 GeokKit Pipeline Inspection P1100 TrackPlot Mosaic gt Section Report Generation 10 10 Section Zoom on 4 gt 8 5 Screen Features 6 gt View Data lt q gt Hardcopy Ouput Section 9 1 to Printer Section Measure Screen 8 6 Features Screen Dump D Section Tag Screen to Printer Section 9 2 10 2 Features Power Down Prepare for Transportation Section Load Save Copy 10 9 Tag Files Figure 5 1 Flow Chart of DA System Operations Obtaining High Quality Sonar Data There are 6 keys to obtaining high quality survey data which should be tackled in the following order 1 Mobilisation 2 Data Acquisition 3 QC by viewing the data 4 Navigation inputs 5 Bottom Tracking 6 Recording to tape or disk The following sections deal with each of these 6 issues in turn 5 1 Getting High Quality Data Step 1 Mobilisation A recent review of all the Technical Support cases which Coda Technologies has dealt with over the past 2 years revealed that over 80 of data gathering problems could have be isolated by the user when the survey spread was being mobilised reducing lost survey time and improving the quality of data obtained 46 May 2001 for version 2 1 5 2 1
375. ystem It may not be a full list of data stored For more details contact Coda Technologies directly Variable Storage Class Description channel byte label describing data sidescan port sidescan starboard seismic unknown channel_count byte number of channels of data arising from this trigger event sync_with byte which channel to synchronise with for display purposes start_delay byte delay from trigger to start of data sampling as a number of samples input_channel byte the input data A D channel the data was cap tured on trigger_number byte trigger used tag_database_id long integer number which corresponds to the start time of the recording session to allow correct database to be accessed ping_number long integer incremented for each trigger event for the chan nel line_time_secs long integer the time the trigger event in seconds since 00 00 00 Ist January 1970 UTC line_time_usecs long integer microsecond fraction of the trigger event time pixel_time float effective sample period in seconds ad_sample_frequency float actuaLA D sample frequency aa_filter_frequency float anti aliasing filter frequency sonar_frequency float operating frequency of the sonar in Hertz tx_power_db float the transmission power in decibels rx_gain_db float the gain applied at the receiver in decibels zero offset short integer DC level of data sampl
376. ystem only 1 Tag file copied correctly Tag filename appears in Tagging Manage Tag Files 1 window following Rescan May 2001 for version 2 1 257 S SI YOOUD 258 May 2001 for version 2 1 O Interpretation Checklist The purpose of this checklist is to make sure that the same tag and reporting setups are used throughout the interpretation process whether onshore or offshore Problems will occur if the data is being interpreted on systems which have different setups 0 1 GeoKit PI100 Interpretation Checklist GeoKit P1100 Interpretation Comments Initials Tag Setup Files 1 1 Are the correct tag types set up Have you included all the tag types required by the client 1 2 Are the start end codes correct 1 3 Are the correct tags active 1 4 Are the forced measures set for the appropriate tags 1 5 Is the Tag Setup saved on the system hard disk opticahdisk 1 6 Has the Tag Setup beenSaved to tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Backup Setup Files 1 7 Has the TagSetup file name changed on the system hard disk opticaldisk 1 8 Has the Tag Setuptbeen reloaded onto the system hard disk from tape optical disk using Maintenance Menu Restore Setup Files 1 9 Is the tape optical disk labelled and write protected Fast Tag Files Are the Fast Tag Setup files correct for the job 2 2 Is the Fast Tag Setup
377. ystems for the first serial port the name commonly used in DOS systems for the second serial port of tape drives the practice of eliminating redundancy in the data being recorded allowing a larger amount of data to be stored ina given space of the DA 00 DA200 a facility which allows recording of incoming data to carry on continuously without the need to stop recording when changing data tapes or optical disks the variation in shades of grey or hue within the display navigation information which has been smoothed to remove spikes or jitter from the positional information the first node in a multi node tag P1100 the length in metres that an automatically detected span must be before it is deemed to be a critical span user defined at ninety degrees to the direction of travel of the towing vessel the straight line cross track distance from the vessel datum point to the point where the tow cable passes over the stern of the vessel cross track slant distance cross track smoothing current tag cursor DA100 DA200 DAT data acquisition data acquisition mode data bits data channel Data Control Area Data Display Area data format data playback mode database datum point DCC DDS the distance measured between two points solely in the cross track direction It is a non slant corrected measure i e it is dependent on fish height of sidescan sonar data low pass filtering of the so

CODA-DA System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents